Home

Nortel Networks BCM200 User's Manual

1. Acronym Description ASM Analog station module analog station media bay module ATA Analog terminal adapter BCM Business Communications Manager BRIM Basic rate interface module basic rate interface media bay module CAP Central answering position CFA Carrier failure alarm CLID Calling line identification co Central office CSU Channel service unit CTM Caller ID trunk module caller ID trunk media bay module DDIM Digital drop and insert MUX DIMM Dual in line memory module DMC Digital mobility controller DSM Digital station module digital station media bay module DSP Digital signal processor DSU Data service unit DTE Data terminal equipment DTM Digital trunk module digital trunk media bay module FEM Fiber expansion module FRU Field replaceable unit GASM Global analog station module global analog station media bay module GATM Global analog trunk module global analog trunk media bay module KEM Key expansion module KIM Key indicator module KRS Keycode retrieval system Nortel keycode retrieval system LAN Local area network LIU Line isolation unit MBM Media bay module MSC Media services card MWI Message waiting indication NIC Network interface card ONS on premise station OSI Open switch interval PCI Peripheral component interface PEC Processor expansion card PSTN Public switched telephone network PSU Power supply unit N0060612 Chapter 1 Getting started
2. DS256 port BCM expansion unit e os COON oO 0 MOOOO OO O O O ol 20 0 0 0 0 eAMOOOO flo oll 000 000 S FIle o 000 000 e g Sf et 0000 8 8 EI lo DS256 port MBM bays and backplane The number and configuration of the MBMs depend on the number of bays available in the main unit and DS30 system resources The BCM200 main unit provides two MBM bays The BCM400 main unit provides four MBM bays All MBM bays must contain either an MBM or an MBM filler blanking plate Fill unpopulated MBM bay openings in the main unit with the MBM filler blanking plates see Figure 22 Figure 22 MBM filler blanking plate _ Filler blanking plate face i 5 The MBMs slide into the MBM bays and lock into place Pull on the MBM ejector to release the MBM or filler blanking plate The MBM or filler blanking plate partially ejects from the bay Slide the MBM out of the bay to remove it from the main unit N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 51 The MBM backplane provides the MBM component interface to the power supply and main card The MBM backplane mounts at the rear of the MBM bays and is a non replaceable component Figure 23 illustrates the BCM200 MBM backplane and connectors Figure 23 BCM200 MBM backp
3. o BE Port 4 Power LED Status LED Port 1 Port 5 Port 2 Port 6 Port 3 Digital drop and insert MUX The digital drop and insert MUX media bay module DDIM enables a BCM system to share its connection to a universal T1 network with a local area network LAN to provide a combination of voice and data channels The DDIM BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 62 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware e provides the functionality of a DTM T1 digital lines only e splits the incoming T1 line so that some of the lines are used for voice traffic and some of the lines are used for data traffic e provides either the channel service unit CSU or data service unit DSU functionality to support connections to data terminal equipment DTE such as a router or a bridge e connects to network devices that support V 35 interfaces e provides end to end transparent bit service e supports loopbacks between the BCM system and the internal BCM components and between the BCM system and digital terminal equipment Figure 35 shows the DDIM faceplate LEDs and connectors Figure 35 DDIM faceplate LEDs and connectors Data module serial port Power LED Status LED In Service LED Loopback test LED Continuity loopback Loopback Receive LEDs RJ 48C digital telephone line Transmit LEDs connector BCM400 expansion gatew
4. Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong Italy Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value Dial tone Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled detection Set preferences Language EuroFrench German English Dutch English Italian first is default English English French English French English Spanish EuroFrench Spanish Turkish Analog VSC None None None None None None tone ONN blocking Analog VSC None None None None None None pulse BRI VSC None None None None None None BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit Release reason Release text Simple Detailed Simple Simple None Simple Release code On Off On On Off On Tone duration 120 msec 120 msec 120msec 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec DTMF Pause time 3 5 msec 3 5 msec 1 5 msec 1 5 msec 1 5 msec 3 5 msec parameters Interdigit time 100 msec 100 msec 80 msec 80 msec 80 msec 100 msec Table 99 Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland PRC Access codes Direct dial digit O 0 0 9 0 0 Dest code for 9 9 9 0 9 9 default route BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
5. Functionality Attribute Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value Dial tone Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled detection Set preferences Language UK English Portuguese Spanish English English Danish first is default VICAP English English French French English Spanish French Spanish Spanish Norwegian Swedish Analog VSC 1831 None None None None None tone ONN blocking Analog VSC 1831 None None None None None pulse BRI VSC None None None None None None BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit Release reason Release text Simple Simple None None None Simple Release code On On Off Off Off On Tone duration 80 msec 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec DTMF Pause time 3 5 msec 1 5 msec 1 5 msec 1 5 msec 1 5 msec 1 5 msec parameters Interdigit time 100 msec 80 msec 80 msec 80 msec 80 msec 80 msec Table 98 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong Italy Access codes Direct dial digit 9 9 0 0 0 9 Dest code for 0 0 9 9 9 0 default route Digital trunking ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS DPN
6. Doa software Replace different No shutdown component Perform BCM maintenance setup Remove the base function tray Remove the old card See correct Install the replacement y eplace new card procedure the base No function ray Remove all cards Insert the base Re install all function tray cards Restore unit to operation y Check LEDs Zn END Removing the base function tray This procedure describes how to remove the base function tray to perform maintenance or replacement activities Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge J Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Warning Use care when removing or inserting the base function tray Do not forcefully ts remove or insert the base function tray because you could damage or stretch the cables N0060612 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 235 To remove the base function tray Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray A OO N a Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded met
7. Wiring the MBMs This section describes how to wire the cables that connect to the station and trunk MBMs e The station MBMs have one or two 50 pin amphenol connectors that require 25 pair cables to connect the MBMs to the equipment in the telephone room where your demarcation point is located Use a qualified technical professional to ensure the cable wiring and your interior telephone wiring are correct e The trunk MBMs connect to central office trunks using RJ type jacks However the GATM4 and GATMS8 have a 50 pin amphenol connector that requires a 25 pair cable to connect to the Central Office CO trunk These cables can be supplied by qualified technical personnel to ensure the correct pin out N0060612 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 141 Warning Qualified persons to service the system The installation and service of this unit must be performed by service personnel with the appropriate training and experience Service personnel must be aware of the hazards of working with telephony equipment and wiring They must have experience in techniques that minimize any danger of shock or equipment damage Warning Leakage currents Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events on network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to protective earth ground through the power cord However if the ac power
8. amp Figure 55 Fasten the BCM400 main unit to an equipment rack Q U Q Q Q amp BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 96 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit Figure 56 Fasten the expansion unit to the equipment rack g oeooooo v A COO op amp q N ol q ol Ql Q Ql q o q y q y y q y Installing the main unit on the wall This procedure describes how to mount the BCM200 or BCM400 main unit to a wall To mount the main unit on the wall you need e awall mount bracket kit NTAB3422 e four 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screws e aplywood backboard 2 cm 3 4 in thick To mount the expansion unit on the wall you need e a wall mount bracket supplied with the unit e two 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screws e aplywood backboard 2 cm 3 4 in thick Caution Refer to Environmental requirements on page 87 for acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM main unit Note Nortel does not recommended use of the rack mount brackets for wall mount applications To install the main unit on the wall 1 Mark the location of the plywood backboard on the wall using a pencil Use a ruler and bubble level to check that the plywood backboard is leve
9. 5 Place the hard disk on a flat clean and static free surface Installing a hard disk into a standard configuration hard disk cage Use this procedure to install a single hard disk into a hard disk cage for a standard BCM200 or BCM400 system Caution Use only Nortel approved replacement components Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts Caution It is vital that you connect the correct IDE ribbon cables to the correct hard disks Connect the primary IDE ribbon cable to the primary hard disk Connect the mirror IDE ribbon cable to the mirror hard disk N0060612 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 269 Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge gt Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container To install a hard disk into a standard configuration hard disk cage 1 Position the hard disk into the bottom position of the hard disk cage Note For a BCM200 system orient the hard disk so that the power and IDE connectors are on the bottom and opposite to the hard disk cage lift tab see Figure 130 For a BCM400 system orient the hard disk so that the power and IDE connectors are on the bottom and on the same side as the hard disk cage lift tab 2 Align the hard disk and hard disk cage retaining screw holes Fasten the hard disk
10. HH HKHH HKKK UULEEHHHKKH HOUE UU uu L oook FROH N0060612 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 321 To install a new clock calendar battery Warning There is a danger of explosion if you do not replace the battery correctly You must replace the battery with a CR2032 3v Maxell coin cell battery The positive side of the battery must face up and the battery must sit securely in the battery socket Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container ON Oa FPF WD 10 11 12 Remove the old battery See To remove the clock calendar battery on page 319 Ensure you have the positive side of the battery facing up when you position it in the socket Push down until the battery snaps into the socket Install the media services card See To install the media services card MSC on page 306 Install the WAN card if applicable See Installing the WAN card on page 302 Partially insert the base function tray into the main unit Connect the DS30 connectors to the MSC Position the PCI cover plate on the front of the base function tray so that the base function tray and cover plate screw holes align Position the PCI cover plate locking screw in the PCI cover plate Tighten the PCI cover plate loc
11. Table 108 ISDN line services MCDN over PRI SL 1 DPNSS DASS2 ETSI QSIG e Basic call e Basic call Basic call e Basic call e DDI e DDI DDI e DDI e Name display e Diversion Originating line identity OLI Name display e Number display e Redirection Terminating line identity TLI Number display e Centralized voice mail e Centralized voice Call charge indication CCl e Camp on mail Call charge rate indication e ISDN call connection limit Call offer CCRD e Network call transfer e Loop avoidance e Break in e Executive intrusion e Trunk route optimization e Three party TRO e Route optimization e Trunk anti tromboning Table 109 ISDN services by protocol Protocol Market profile Available ISDN services e NI e Canada e North America e Basic call e Number display e Caribbean e DID e ONN blocking e Name display e ETSI e Australia e Mexico e Basic call e AOC E specific changes Euro Brazil e New Zealand e DDI for Holland and Italy e CALA e Norway e Subaddressing on e MCID Denmark e Poland S loop e CLIP e France e PRC e ETSI call diversion e COLP e Germany e Spain partial rerouting e CLIR e Global e Sweden e Holland e Switzerland e Hong Kong e Taiwan e Italy e United Kingdom N0060612 Appendix G Market profile attributes 375 Analog and digital trunk types Table 110 provides a description of the types of analog and digital trunks Note that some of the analog and digital trunks are a
12. 362 Appendix G Market profile attributes Table 99 Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland PRC Digital trunking ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG Protocols variants BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 NI 2 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 protocol variant BTNR191 PRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG DMS100 ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG variants MCDN MCDN DMS250 MCDN MCDN MCDN 4ESS MCDN Global analog GATM N A GATM N A GATM GATM trunk versions Conference No Yes No No Yes No tone supported Held line Off Immediate Off Off After 30 Off reminder seconds Delay ring After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 15 After 4 transfer rings rings rings rings rings rings Telephony Transfer After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 15 After 4 feature settings callback timeout rings rings rings rings rings rings Network 30 30 N A 30 30 30 callback Host delay ms 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Link time ms 600 N A 600 N A 600 Target line i
13. Note For the UPS to function correctly connect the UPS before the BCM system is powered up If you connect a UPS to a running system the UPS will not function In BCM 4 0 the serial interface is not supported for UPS connectivity Only the USB interface supports UPS connectivity On BCM systems with more than one unit the power supplies for all of the units must be connected to a single UPS The UPS feature is supported in all markets 110 120V and 220 240V power standards Hard disk The BCM200 main unit and the BCM400 main unit standard contain a single hard disk and hard disk bracket see Figure 41 and Figure 42 N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 67 Figure 41 BCM200 main unit hard disk and bracket Front view Rear view se Hard disk bracket Hard disk ne 7 Hard disk bracket lift tab Figure 42 BCM400 main unit hard disk and bracket Front view Rear view a Hard disk bracket Hard disk a NS gt Ky Hard disk bracket lift tab RAID upgrade kit The BCM200 main unit and the BCM400 main unit standard can contain a redundant array of independent disks RAID The RAID upgrade kits have a single hard disk mirror and RAID controller card Use your current hard disk from the single disk system as the primary hard disk When the RAID upgrade is installed the data from the primary hard disk is written to the mirror hard disk The dual hard dis
14. 5 Make a note of the DIP switch settings for the DS30 offset numbers DIP switch setting for offset Example Position your DSM 32 MBM step 1 which requires two full DS30 buses step 2 in DS30 2 and 3 step 3 Moving across note that the offset is 0 step 4 Set the DIP switches on the MBM to match the DIP switch settings indicated for that offset step 5 Table 28 shows possible DS30 and offset configurations for each type of trunk MBM and the corresponding switch settings For FEM settings refer to FEM switch settings on page 133 Table 28 Possible trunk MBM DIP switch settings Sheet 1 of 2 ou ra jr DS30 bus 16 DDIM Offsets 0 1 2 3 ae Line Exten Trunk MBM positioning DTM CTM CTM8 GATM GATM8 BRI a Offsets Offsets Offsets Offsets Offsets 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 wA DIP switch settings 1 2 offset 345 6 DS30 on on on on on on d on on on on on on on on wW N O BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 118 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM Table 28 Possible trunk MBM DIP switch settings Sheet 2 of 2 Trunk MBM positioning DIP switch settings DS30 bus 4x16 DDIM DTM CTM CTM8 GATM GATM8 BRI Offsets 0 1 2 3 Offset Offset Offsets Offsets Offsets Offsets Offsets 123456 Line Exten 0 0
15. Note When you install a redundant power supply you must also install a redundant cooling fan included with the redundancy upgrade kit Note When you install a redundant power supply you must also remove the jumper installed in the power supply unit status connector RPS output signaling connector on the I O card Figure 147 Redundant power supply upgrade overview Shut down the Install redundant Insert both system MI power supply modules into cage power supply cage Set up unit for Remove PSU maintenance jumper Restore unit to operation Note cable Make internal routing Remove connections cables Check power LED Remove the standard power supply Removing the PSU status connector jumper Use this procedure if you are installing a redundant power supply for the first time Use this procedure only with the BCM400 main unit Note When you upgrade to a redundant power supply you must also install a redundant fan Refer to Installing a BCM400 cooling fan on page 326 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 288 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge ey Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free contai
16. Chapter 13 initializing Ihe System 254 44 ce rece en 177 Data parameter requirements 200000 nee een 177 Using the default BCM system IP address nnn annann 177 Using the Ethernet crossover cable us ur san 0 a 178 Setting the crossover connections urzsusn0se HR HR RR anna 178 Connecting through Ethernet crossover cable 000 cee ee eee 178 Connecting through the serial port 0 00 c eee 179 Null modem cable Self sauna a EE ee ORES REA 180 DOUWAIOKGVOOUE entsandt ERE SORE RE eS 181 Regenerating a keycode after system replacement 0 182 Chapter 14 Configuring the BCM system 00 eee eee eee 183 Initial parameters overview 222m eee 184 Startup parameters overview 000 eee 185 Chapter 15 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 187 Configuring the initial parameters 0 000 eee 188 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 193 PISISQUIGNGS a s ike a an Fa a er ar hei 194 Accessing the BOM system 2 4 540 0 4040 RR RAR Eee 194 Configuring the initial parameters u 180 Je RR aaa 195 Configuring the startup parameters 2 2 2n san 198 Chapter 17 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 205 Startup Profile requirements s 6s6staucreekaveeee ses Ra 206 Configuring basic parameters 00 cee eee 207 Startup Profile t
17. DSM32 MBM Digital station media bay module on page 57 Installing a media bay module MBM on page 105 module on page 56 4x16 MBM 4x16 media bay module on page 58 Installing a media bay module MBM on page 105 ASM8 MBM Analog station media bay modules Installing a media bay module on page 58 MBM on page 105 GASM8 MBM Analog station media bay modules Installing a media bay module on page 58 MBM on page 105 FEM MBM Fiber expansion media bay module Installing a media bay module on page 61 MBM on page 105 DDIM MBM Digital drop and insert MUX on page Installing a media bay module 61 MBM on page 105 GATM MBM Global analog trunk media bay Installing a media bay module MBM on page 105 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 72 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Telephones and adapters The following telephones and devices can be used with the BCM system Digital Phone 7100 one line display one memory button without indicator Digital Phone 7000 not shown International only four memory buttons without display or indicators Digital Phone 7208 one line display eight memory buttons with indicators Digital Phone 7316 two line display three display buttons 16 memory buttons with indicators eight memory buttons without indicators Supports
18. Four offsets per bus las DS30 bus 2 l DS30 bus 3 l DS30 buses DS30 buses available to modules DS30 bus 4 available to modules in a 2 6 split in a 3 5 split DS30 bus 5 DS30 bus 6 DS30 bus 7 DS30 numbers are set using the number 4 5 and 6 DIP switches on the back or underside of the MBMs The exception is the FEM MBM The FEM DIP switches turn on ports each of which consumes one bus Setting offsets Each offset represents one quarter of a DS30 bus Each bus supports 16 lines 32 time slots for most MBMs Note Double Density The 32 time slots are important when you are working with station MBMs The DSM16 DSM32 ASM8 and GASM 8 can be configured using the offset DIP switches to use each of these time slots as separate telephone lines This essentially doubles your system telephone capacity Exceptions e DTM MBMs which support 23 to 30 lines per bus e FEM MBMs where each bus supports one Norstar fiber module connection Offsets are numbered 0 1 2 and 3 MBMs that require less than a full bus can be assigned a DS30 number and an offset number This allows more than one MBM to be assigned the same DS30 number but with a different offset number MBMs that can have offsets assigned include CTM4 CTM8 BRIM S T ASM8 and GASM8 For example two CTM8s can be assigned to the same DS30 number with different offset numbers Howeve
19. N0060612 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 279 Note Install the power supply carefully Ensure the power supply cables are not entangled or crushed against any internal components 3 Secure the power supply to the main unit Align the power supply mounting holes with the holes in the main unit Install the screws at the rear of the main unit see Figure 137 Do not over tighten the power supply mounting screws Figure 137 Install the BCM200 power supply chassis screws I 4 Run the P4 P5 or P6 power supply cable and the IDE cable to the hard disk The I O card is not installed in the main unit for this step a Route the power cable between the I O card chassis standoffs in the area shown see Figure 138 Run the IDE cable in the same manner Tie wrap the power cable to the hard disk cable Position the tie wrap 1 2 inch from the hard disk cable sheathing Ensure the remainder of the power cable does not interfere with internal components BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 280 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply Figure 138 Power and hard disk cable routing Media bay module backplane Tie wrap location P4 P5 P6 hard disk cable 1 2 from MSC hard disk cable sheathing A e Ocard ay 1172 standoffs 4 ee PA P5 P6 power _
20. Read and follow the installation instructions carefully BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 142 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables Connect the MBMs to service providers To connect DTM CTM CTM8 BRIM S T or 4x16 MBMs 1 On the front of the MBM locate the RJ 48C jack DTM RJ 45 jack BRIM or the RJ 11 jacks CTM and 4x16 2 Wire one end of the cable to the demarcation blocks of the building Figure 75 shows the wiring pin outs fora DTM to connect to a service provider Figure 75 DTM RJ 48C wiring array DTM connector o000 To network To plug o o 9 L Receive from 1 Rring network 2 Rtip RJ 48C jack 3 Rshield HHHH Pa Transmit to network 4 Tring 12345678 5 Ttip 6 Tshield Warning If you are using a service provider channel service unit CSU you must disable the BCM system internal CSU Figure 76 shows the wiring pin out for a CTM4 a CTM8 or the CTM jacks on a 4x16 MBM to connect to the service provider All the MBMs have an auxiliary jack the CTM8 has two Do not attempt to plug digital equipment into this jack Figure 76 CTM RJ 11 wiring array CTM connector RJ 11 jacks Pin connection 3 Ring 4 Tip The CTM8 has ten RJ 11 jacks including two auxiliary jacks The 4x16 and CTM4 MBMs have four RJ 11 jacks N0060
21. 13 Use both hands to carefully hold the card along the side edges Push the card away from the PCI riser card connector to disconnect the MSC 14 Remove the MSC from the base function tray Place the MSC on a flat clean and static free surface 15 Remove all processor expansion cards PEC IIIs from the MSC see the procedure To remove the processor expansion card PEC on page 313 Place the PEC IIIs in a safe static free location Reuse the cards in a replacement MSC see the procedure To install the media services card MSC on page 306 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 306 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware To install the media services card MSC 7 Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Note If you purchased optional BCM applications that require keycode activation regenerate the keycodes after you install the replacement MSC For further information see Software keycode on page 181 Note If you need to install a new MSC you must upload core software from the hard disk If you reinstall the same MSC the core software on the MSC is the most current version and no core software upload is necessary Note You require a current backup of your system data to restore the
22. 27 Table 1 Acronyms Sheet 3 of 3 Acronym Description QoS Quality of service RAI Remote alarm indication RAID Redundant array of independent disks REN Ringer equivalence number RFO Redundant feature option RPS Redundant power supply SAPS Station auxiliary power supply SELV Safety extra low voltage SSD System status display UPS Uninterruptable power supply USB Universal serial bus VMWI Visual message waiting indicator VOIP Voice over Internet protocol WAN Wide area network Symbols and conventions used in this guide These symbols are used to highlight critical information for the BCM system Caution Alerts you to conditions where you can damage the equipment Danger Alerts you to conditions where you can get an electrical shock N Warning Alerts you to conditions where you can cause the system to fail or work improperly Note Alerts you to important information Tip Alerts you to additional information that can help you perform a task BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 28 Chapter 1 Getting started changed or where the administrator needs to make a decision about the level of a Security Note Indicates a point of system security where a default should be security required for the system Warning Alerts you to ground yourself with an antistatic grounding strap v before perf
23. 4 Configure the attributes on the Quick Install Wizard form see Table 68 Table 68 Quick Install Wizard attributes Attribute Description Attendant DN Enter the extension number of the attendant or operator assigned to CallPilot Primary UI Style Select the mailbox user interface used as a default for the mailboxes If you select NVM the mailbox user interface uses Norstar voice mail voice and text prompts If you select CallPilot the mailbox user interface uses CallPilot voice and text prompts Primary Language Select the language used as the primary language for the mailboxes From Line Enter the line number of the first line in the range of lines you want CallPilot to answer CallPilot answers the range of lines between this line and the line you enter in the To Line box BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 198 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters Table 68 Quick Install Wizard attributes Attribute Description To Line Enter the line number of the last line in the range of lines you want CallPilot to answer Number of rings Enter the number of rings you want CallPilot to wait before answering lines 5 Click Install Configuring the startup parameters Use the following procedures to configure the startup parameters for the BCM system using Element Manager To enter a name for your system To configure
24. DSM 32 settings on on on on on DSM 32 settings off on on on on off DSM 16 settings DSM 16 settings ASM 8 settings ASM 8 settings on ASM 8 settings on ASM 8 settings DECT combinations This section describes a system containing a DECT MBM three BRIM MBMs and two DSM 32s This configuration uses all the DS30 channels with the exception of one offset Table 55 demonstrates this combination including the switch settings for each MBM BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 154 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables Table 55 Three BRI modules two DSM 32s and one DECT module Each heavily outlined and shaded square represents one module Switch setting 1 3 2 DS30 DECT BRI DSM32s channel offset 0 offset 0 1 and 2 offset 0 12 3 4 5 6 2 on on on on on on 3 4 on on on on DECT switch settings BRI settings BRI settings BRI settings Changing configurations Here are some points to consider when changing modules in existing or new BCM systems e Trunk and analog station MBMs cannot share a DS30 bus e MBMs that require more than one DS30 bus automatically assign the next bus in chronological order Therefore if an existing installed MBM uses either of the required DS30 buses remove the installed MBM You mu
25. Figure 44 Cooling fan co Mount holes 1 O card fan connector Field replaceable units FRU Use Table 12 to Table 17 as a reference when you need to order replace or install component hardware The tables provide references to the component description and installation procedures Note The product engineering code can change over time consult the catalog for the latest information Table 12 Card field replaceable units Component description FRU description Installation procedure Modem card Modem card on page 48 To install a modem card on page 309 Media services card Media services card MSC on page 41 To install the media services card MSC on page 306 Media services PEC III MSC IP call processing hardware on page 43 To install a PEC on page 315 WAN interface card with CSU V 35 North America only WAN interface card on page 46 Installing the WAN card on page 302 Dual V 35 WAN interface card WAN interface card on page 46 Installing the WAN card on page 302 WAN interface card with CSU V 35 X 21 International only WAN interface card on page 46 Installing the WAN card on page 302 256MB memory module Main card on page 43 To install a DIMM card on page 318 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 70
26. c Insert the rivet pin into the rivet collar Repeat this step for the second fan in the BCM400 RFO configuration see Figure 181 Figure 181 Insert the snap rivets into the BCM400 fan access panel IN Insert the rivet collar into the Fan exhaust __ fan access panel hole fan access panel a Insert the rivet pin into the _ rivet collar Rivet collar Rivet pin 3 Connect the power supply cables for each fan to the I O card see Figure 182 a Connect Fan 1 the fan farthest from the power supply to connector 1 on the I O card b Connect Fan 2 the fan closest to the power supply to connector 2 on the I O card BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 328 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan Figure 182 Connect the fan cables to the I O card Connect to redundant ill e fan fan 2 O e Connect to single I O Card fan fan 1 Main Card l lil 4 Mount the fan access panel to the main unit
27. 976 1900 1900 1900 1900 1 900 1 900 1 900 1 900 5551212 5551212 5551212 5551212 Restriction filter 00 1 13 N A N A N A N A N A 05 11 1800 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A 06 Routing service Off Off Off Off Off Off mode Routing service No No No No No No overflow Public DN Public DN Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 8 lengths 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 00 17 00 12 00 12 00 12 00 12 1 3 16 5 01 17 01 17 01 17 01 17 17 4 18 4 011 18 011 18 011 18 011 18 11 1011 1011 1011 411 3 411 3 411 3 411 3 911 3 911 3 911 3 911 3 Unknown N A Variable Variable N A N A Variable number length Public OLI Local number 8 Variable Variable 7 7 Variable length National 9 Variable Variable 10 10 Variable number length Handsfree Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Pickup group 1 None None None None None Set capabilities Allow redirect Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Call forward Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled delay 4 4 4 4 4 4 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 358 Appendix G Market profile attributes Table 97 Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile
28. Appendix D 4x16 wiring charts 343 Appendix D 4x16 wiring charts You can connect up to 4 analog telephone lines and up to 16 digital telephones to the 4x16 media bay module MBM The analog telephones lines are connected to the 4x16 MBM through the RJ 11 jacks labeled 1 to 4 on the front of the MBM see Figure 192 Do not connect analog telephone lines to the auxiliary jack on the front of the MBM The digital telephones such as the Business Series Telephones are connected to the RJ 21 connector on the front of the 4x16 MBM Figure 192 4x16 MBM connectors i C Ille li gt a o 4x16 RJ 21 pin out Power Status Line RJ 11 jacks RJ 11 pin out Table 89 lists the wiring details for the RJ 11 jacks on the 4x16 MBM This wiring applies to the numbered ports and the auxiliary ports Table 89 4x16 RJ 11 port wiring Pin Signal i No connection No connection Ring Tip No connection OIJ AJOJN No connection BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 344 Appendix D 4x16 wiring charts Table 90 lists the wiring details for the RJ 21 connector on the 4x16 MBM Table 90 4x16 MBM RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 1 of 2 Set Pin Connection Wire color 1 26 Tip White Blue 1 Ring Blue White 2 27 Tip White Orang
29. BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide BCM 4 0 Business Communications Manager Document Status Standard Document Version 02 3 Part Code N0060612 Date October 2006 NORTEL Copyright 2006 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved All rights reserved The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks Trademarks Nortel the Nortel logo and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners SOFTWARE LICENSE NORTEL NETWORKS INC NORTEL NETWORKS TELECOMMUNICATION PRODUCTS THE SOFTWARE FOR A REFUND THIS LEGAL DOCUMENT IS A LICENSE AGREEMENT License BETWEEN YOU THE END USER CUSTOMER AND NORTEL NETWORKS PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE BY USING THIS SOFTWARE YOU THE CUSTOMER ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE RETURN THE UNUSED SOFTWARE AND THE ASSOCI
30. Figure 95 Overview of using Element Manager Use Bement Manager to set the basic parameters Configure the initial parameters Configure the startup parameters BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 194 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters Prerequisites BCM Element Manager has the following system requirements Windows Windows 98SE Windows 2000 Windows XP RAM minimum 256 MB recommended 512 MB free space 150 MB BCM Element Manager access is also supported through a Citrix server Accessing the BCM system After your computer is connected to the BCM system either through an Ethernet crossover cable or through a LAN connection you can download BCM Element Manager from the Administrator Applications area of the BCM web page To access the BCM web page 1 Open a web browser and enter the BCM system IP address The Enter Network Password dialog box opens Enter the username and password defaults are shown below Username nnadmin Password PlsChgMe Click OK The Welcome to BCM web page opens To download and install BCM Element Manager 1 On the Welcome to BCM web page click Administrator Applications The Administrator Applications page opens On the Administrator Applications page click BCM Element Manager The BCM Element Manager panel opens Read the information on this panel Click Download Element Manager on the right side of the scr
31. Ringing voltage North America 80 V rms 10 55 Vrms 10 65 V rms 10 65 V rms 10 65 V rms 10 Ringing voltage Europe 75 V rms 10 N A 65 V rms 10 65 V rms 10 65 V rms 10 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 60 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Table 10 ATA2 ASM8 ASM8 GASM and GASI analog device specifications Sheet 2 of 2 Specification ATA2 ASM8 ASM8 GASM8 GASI Loop current 20 mA minimum 20 mA minimum 20 mA minimum 20 mA minimum 20 mA minimum Battery feed voltage 48 V dc 10 48 V dc 10 29 V dc 10 48 V dc 10 48 V dc 10 FIC code OL13ABC N A N A N A N A Ringer equivalency 3 1 2 2 2 number ATA2 to BCM loop 135 ohms N A N A N A N A resistance cable only 800 m of 0 5 mm wire or 2600 ft of 24 AWG wire Analog loop resistance 1300 ohms 250 ohms 1538 200 ohms 1231 200 ohms 1231 200 ohms 1231 on terminal side for 7200 m of m of 0 5 mm m of 0 5 mm m of 0 5 mm m of 0 5 mm voice applications 0 5 mm wire or wire or 5000 ft of wire or 4000 ft of wire or 4000 ft of wire or 4000 ft of cable only 26000 ft of 24 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire AWG wire Analog loop resistance 200 ohms 1231 250 ohms 1538 200 ohms 1231 200 ohms 1231 200 ohms 1231 on terminal side for m of
32. 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 offset DS30 on on on on 0 1 3 2 3 0 1 4 2 3 5 1 6 Eea 0 mes Not Not 1 supported supported Bn an an gt on off off off on off 3 MBM set to offset 0 MBM set to offset 1 m MBM set to offset 2 MBM set to offset 3 Each shaded square represents the amount of the DS30 bus and the offset which the MBM requires If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 bus split DS30 bus 7 is not available to MBM and DS30 bus 6 is not supported for the 4x16 and DDIM N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 119 Table 29 shows possible DS30 and offset configurations for each type of station MBM and the corresponding switch settings Note that DIP switch 1 indicates the density mode for DSM 16 and DSM 32 SDD single density DIP switch 1 on FDD Double Density DIP switch 1 off Table 29 Possible station MBM DIP switch settings DS30 bus 6 7 Station MBM positioning DSM16 DSM32 Offsets 0 1 Offsets 0 1 SDDFDD SDDFDD MBM set to offset 0 DIP switch settings Single density DIP switch settings Double density ASM 8 GASM8 Offsets 0 2 3 offset 4 5 6 12 3 DS30 offset 4 5 6 DS30 on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on MBM set to offset 1 C MBM set to offset 2 _ MBM set to offset 3 E
33. AN Warning Install DTMs in the BCM main unit only DTMs do not function if installed in the BCM expansion unit If there are no empty MBM bays in the BCM main unit move MBMs to the expansion unit to provide space for the DTMs The front bezel of the DTM has an RJ 48C connector that connects the DTM to the service provider connection point The faceplate also has a set of monitor jacks you can use to monitor the span There are six additional LEDs on the front of the DTM For information about these additional LEDs refer to DTM LEDs on page 80 Figure 27 shows the DTM module interfaces Figure 27 DTM faceplate oe 2686 gA 08 e gt o OS Of Power Status Monitor jacks RJ 48C digital telephone line connector N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 55 Tip You can install a maximum of three DTM modules in the BCM main unit depending on the available buses Caller ID trunk media bay module There are two Caller ID trunk media bay modules CTM e CTM4 The CTM4 connects a maximum of four analog calling line ID CLID interfaces to the BCM system through four RJ 11 jacks on the MBM faceplate These jacks are labeled Line 1 Auxiliary Line 2 Line 3 and Line 4 The auxiliary jack connects to Line 1 e CTM8 The CTM8 provides eight analog CLID interfaces to the BCM system through eight RJ 11 jacks on the MBM faceplate Each jack also supports disconnect sup
34. CTM GATM settings CTM GATM settings CTM GATM settings Switch settings for 4x16 CTM GATM settings Switch settings for 4x16 Fully loaded setup This section describes a system containing one DSM 32 32 one DSM 16 16 two ASM 8s and two DTMs This configuration uses all the DS30 buses with the exception of two offsets BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 152 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables Table 53 demonstrates this combination including the switch settings for each MBM Table 53 DSM combined with 2 DTMs and 2 ASMs module 2 DS30 1 1 ASMB8s channel DSM32 32 DSM16 16 GASM8 offset 0 offset 0 offset 0 and 1 Each heavily outlined and shaded square represents one 2 DTMs offset 0 Switch setting 12 3 4 5 6 DSM 32 settings on on on on on on DSM 16 settings on on ASM 8 settings on on on on ASM 8 settings on on en on Lo N0060612 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 153 Table 54 demonstrates either a double density system Table 54 All station MBMs set for double density Each heavily outlined and shaded square represents one module Switch setting DS30 1 1 ASMB8s 2 channel DSM32 DSM16 GASM8 DTMs offset 0 offset 0 offset 0 and 1 offset 0 12 3 4 5 6 2
35. Disconnect from je redundant fan fan 2 Disconnect from I O Card single fan fan 1 Main Card 6 Remove the snap rivets that hold the fan to the fan access panel The snap rivet has two parts a center pin and a collar Gently separate the plastic rivet pin with your fingernails from the center of the rivet collar Remove the rivet pin and collar from the fan access panel Place the rivet pin and collar in a safe location See Figure 179 on page 326 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 326 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan Figure 179 Remove the snap rivets from the BCM400 fan access panel a Remove the rivet pin from Fan exhaust _ the rivet collar fan access panel i Remove the rivet collar from _ the fan access panel hole Rivet collar Rivet pin 7 Lift the fan away from the fan access panel and place it in a safe location 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to remove the redundant fan on the BCM400 RFO configuration Installing a BCM400 cooling fan Use this procedure to install
36. MBM DSM16 DSM 32 single density switch settings new system The following table shows the switch settings for DSM modules deployed as single density on a new system running BCM 3 0 or later software Note DSM modules deployed prior to BCM 3 0 are all single density and cannot be set to double density but they can still be used on new systems The DSM 16 and DSM32 modules can be set to either density Table 44 DSM16 DSM16 and DSM32 DSM32 single density switch settings new system Select Enter these switch To assign these DNs to DS30 settings To assign these DNs to DSM 32 or bus DSM 16 or DSM 16 DSM 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 Top Bottom 2 on on on on on on 221 236 253 268221 236 3 on on on on on 253 268 285 300 253 268 4 on on on on on 285 300 317 332 285 300 5 on on on on 317 332 349 364 317 332 6 on on on on on 349 364 381 396 349 364 7 on on on on 381 396 N A The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 split you cannot use DS30 7 for the DSM 16 module You cannot configure the DSM32 module for DS30 6 because the second set of DNs cannot be accessed DSM16 and DSM 32 double density switch settings new system The following table shows the switch
37. PB In addition international non North American users require a power supply adapter cord for each main unit and expansion unit BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 66 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Power supply adapter cord international users The power supply adapter cord is for international non North American BCM users It connects to the power supply on one end and to the C 14 BCM power bar on the other end You require one power supply adapter cord for each power supply you want to connect to the power bar Uninterruptable power supply An uninterruptable power supply UPS is an optional device that maintains continuous operation during power interruption or failure conditions The UPS provides power source monitoring and battery backup activation so that critical BCM functionality is maintained In a power failure situation the UPS provides sufficient time to either correct the problem or activate a contingency plan to sustain services The UPS is configured to perform a graceful shutdown of the BCM 2 minutes before the UPS battery power is drained The BCM system supports American Power Conversion APC UPS devices that use a USB control interface These include the APC UPS Smart family for example UPS Smart 750 UPS Smart 1000 and UPS Back family for example UPS Back 500 ES UPS Back 350 ES The UPS control software enables the configuration of various operational settings
38. a Hold the fan in place and push the rivet collar through the fan access panel and fan chassis mounting holes b Insert the rivet pin into the rivet collar see Figure 186 Figure 186 Insert the snap rivets into the BCM200 main unit a 1 Insert the rivet collar into the Fan exhaust _ _ fan access panel hole Main unit a Insert the rivet pin into the rivet collar i ON o Dr Rivet pin Rivet collar 4 Connect the power supply cable to the I O card Connect the fan to connector 1 on the I O card Replace the main unit top cover See Installing the main unit top cover on page 246 Restore the BCM system to operation For details refer to Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 The BCM system starts up when you connect the AC power cord The start up process takes several minutes to complete BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 332 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan 7 Test the direction of the fan exhaust air flow to determine if the fan is correctly installed a Hold apiece of paper or your hand close to the fan exhaust A correctly installed fan blows air away from the main unit b Ifthe fan exhaust air flow is incorrect remove the cooling fan see Removing a BCM200 cooling fan on page 329 and reinstall the fan in the correct orientation this procedure Removing an expansion unit fan The BCM expansion unit comes eit
39. e Precautions on page 229 e Special tools on page 231 e Performing a system shutdown on page 231 e Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 e Base function tray maintenance procedures on page 233 e Advanced function tray maintenance procedures on page 239 e Removing and installing the main unit top cover on page 244 e Using the backup and restore utility on page 248 Precautions Before you replace or update any hardware on the BCM system disconnect the system from the trunk lines Remove the top cover to access the standard power supply I O card or backplane components For fan hard disk or power supply maintenance remove the appropriate chassis panels Remove the base function tray to replace any PCI cards Remove the advanced function tray from the BCM400 main unit to replace or upgrade the hard disk If applicable remove the main unit from the server rack Observe the following precautions when working inside the BCM system Maintain a clean and static safe site Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the BCM main unit Read and follow installation instructions carefully Danger Electrical shock warning Partially remove the power supply module from the power supply cage Do not completely remove the power supply module IMPORTANT Wait several seconds before removing the p
40. e cable L MSC bracket standoffs Lf KO Hard disk __ 1 O card ww standoffs Jr IDE hard disk cable Power supply 5 Install the I O card see Figure 139 The I O card installs on top of the power supply and IDE cables Ensure the cables maintain their position as shown in the previous step Figure 139 Install the I O card in the BCM200 main unit 6 Install the BCM200 MSC bracket see Figure 140 N0060612 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 281 Figure 140 Install the BCM200 MSC guide bracket Fasten BCM200 MSC guide bracket mounting screws BCM200 MSC guide bracket 7 Connect a P1 power cable to the media bay backplane connector Tie wrap the excess cable as shown in Figure 141 Figure 141 Tie wrap excess P1 power cable length Media bay module backplane MSC S P1 cable ee P1 cable tie wrap V O card Power supply Hard disk ae 8 Connect the hard disk cable to the secondary IDE I O card connection Connect the hard disk cable to the hard disk connector Connect the power connector to the hard disk see Figure 141 Insert extra connectors under the hard disk 9 Connect the 20 pin motherboard power cable P1 and the 12v po
41. e cables 25 pair cable with right feeding female RJ 21 connectors e 3 5 mm mono audio jack for external music source N0060612 91 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit This section describes how to install the BCM main unit You can install the main unit in an equipment rack on a wall or on a desktop Figure 50 shows the steps required to install the main unit Figure 50 Overview of installing the main unit Install the main unit Unpack the main unit Fre you using rack wall or desktop mount Rack Desktop Wall hount the shelf in the rack Mount the wall bracket Install the unit on Install the unit in the desk top the bracket Install the unit in the shelf BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 92 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit Refer to the following sections for information on installing the main unit Unpacking the main unit Installing the main unit in an equipment rack on page 92 Installing the main unit on the wall on page 96 Installing the main unit on a flat surface on page 98 Unpacking the main unit Open the main unit box and check that you have all of the components listed below one main unit one power supply cable four rubber feet one set of rack mount brackets a documentation CD the BCM 4 0 Installation Checklist and Quick Start Guide Visually inspect the components for any damage that may
42. e replace a primary master or mirror master hard disk in an existing RAID configuration Monitoring or configuring disk mirror settings using Element Manager Use the procedures in this section to ensure all disk mirroring configuration settings are correct Use Element Manager to change the disk mirror settings to the default values if required The procedures described in this section are valid only for those systems equipped with a RAID configuration Accessing disk mirroring through Element Manager Use this procedure to review the primary master and mirror master hard disk settings on systems equipped with a RAID configuration Use Element Manager in this procedure to monitor the RAID disk mirror operation Note You must ensure the system status monitor service is running to monitor primary gt master and mirror master disk operation and disk mirroring activity To access disk mirroring 1 Access Element Manager after system bootup is complete 2 From the Administration tab click System Status and then click Disk Mirroring The Disk Mirroring screen displays see Figure 103 N0060612 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting 223 3 In the Settings area ensure the following fields display the default values as shown see Table 80 a Operation Mode Mirror Mode b Beep on drive failure Every 30 seconds you can configure the interval between beeps Note On some systems if the RAID card fails
43. f nrnnnn UU U al NAN UOUUYU 5 c UU J J DIMM connectors I O card connector I Main card Main card connections The main card provides peripheral and telephony processing control for the BCM system The main card connects to the I O card system status display SSD card and modem interface card Figure 13 shows the main card and I O card connectors N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 45 Figure 13 Card connections Front DIMM connectors Rear ll g P X X J o SSD board 6 I connector I Connect to HDD for BCM400 ae we aes Il z Connect to B va redundant TA e fan SSD connector j a HAL En Ho e Connect to I O Card single fan Modem card se u Connect to Pe 23 e power supply Modem card i Main card 3 20 pi
44. lt EEE J Insert advanced function tray partially into the main unit BR f 5 Install advanced func tray latch screws Removing and installing the main unit top cover Use the procedures in this section to either remove or install the top cover of the main unit You must remove the top cover to access the cabling or hardware components such as the standard power supply I O card or backplanes Removing the main unit top cover Use this procedure to remove the top cover of the BCM200 or BCM400 main unit This procedure assumes that you intend to perform maintenance activities Do not operate the BCM main unit with the top cover removed Do not leave the top cover removed for extended periods of time Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container or work area N0060612 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 245 To remove the main unit top cover Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet If required remove the main unit from the server rack BoD Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 5 Remove the two top cover screws located at the rear of the m
45. on on on 393 400 on 269 276 on on on 401 408 on on on 277 284 on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on oOo lo D Sta N Of oN OF oN Of oa m on _ on on on on on on on on on 253 260 261 268 409 416 417 424 269 276 277 284 425 432 433 440 285 292 293 300 441 448 449 456 301 308 on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on oO on n on on on on on on on on on on Of DD O oN Of ol N of oN OF oN on on on on on FEKEKD on on on on on 285 292 293 300 301 308 309 316 317 324 325 332 333 340 341 348 349 356 357 364 365 372 373 380 381 388 on on ARR on 389 396 on 309 316 1 on 457 464 weee 2 on on 465 472 weee 3 on 397 404 405 412 Custom DN range The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 split DS30 7 is not available kkk Available only on systems set to double density with a 2 6 DS30 sp
46. see Figure 183 a Tip the top of the fan access panel toward you b Insert the bottom lip of the fan access panel in the main unit C Align the screw holes in the fan access panel with the screw holes on the main unit d Install and tighten the fan access panel screws Figure 183 Install the fan access panel to the main unit fe Install fan access panel N J oe u Fr L Install fan access a panel screws ran Pe N0060612 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan 329 5 Restore the BCM system to operation For details refer to Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 The BCM system starts up when you connect the AC power cord The start up process takes several minutes to complete 6 Test the direction of the fan exhaust air flow to determine if the fan is correctly installed a Hold apiece of paper or your hand close to the fan exhaust A correctly installed fan blows air away from the main unit If you are testing two fans cover one fan at a time with your hand b Ifthe fan exhaust air flow is incorrect remove the cooling fan see Removing a BCM400 cooling fan on page 324 and reinstall the fan in the correct position this procedure Removing a BCM200 cooling fan Use this procedure to remove the cooling fan in a BCM200 main unit Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap be
47. tools shock warning 254 trademarks 2 transmit clock 157 transmit data 157 trunk modules BRIM 55 CTM4 CTM8 55 DTM 54 GATM4 GATM8 56 rules for assigning 114 two line display 7316 72 T316E 73 7316E KIM 73 U Uninterruptable power supply 66 W WAN media services card 46 wiring 157 wide area network see WAN 157 WINS server LAN DHCP scope 199 wire color 144 149 339 340 344 347 349 wireless LAN handset overview 74 wiring WAN card 157 wiring chart 4x16 343 ASM 349 BRIM 337 DSM16 347 DSM32 347 DTM 335 GATM 339 wiring requirements 88 N0060612
48. 0 5 mm m of 0 5 mm m of 0 5 mm m of 0 5 mm m of 0 5 mm data applications wire or 4000 ft of wire or 5000 ft of wire or 4000 ft of wire or 4000 ft of wire or 4000 ft of cable only 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire Input impedance at tip 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms and ring Return loss gt 20dBfor200 gt 20dBfor200 gt 20dBfor200 gt 20dBfor 200 gt 20 dB for 200 to 3400 Hz to 3400 Hz to 3400 Hz to 3400 Hz to 3400 Hz when when when when when terminated with terminated with terminated with terminated with terminated with 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms Insertion loss on an ATA2 to BCM ATA2 to BCM ATA2 to BCM ATA2 to BCM ATA2 to BCM internal call loss 3 0 dB 0 5 loss 3 0 dB 0 5 loss 3 0dB 0 5 loss 3 0dB 0 5 loss 3 0 dB 0 5 dB dB dB dB dB Insertion loss on an ATA2 to BCM ASM to BCM ASM to BCM ASM to BCM ASM to BCM external call loss 2 2 dB loss 3 0dB loss3 0dB loss3 0dB loss 3 0 dB 1 0 dB BCM to 1 0dB BCMto 1 0 dB BCM to 1 0dB BCMto 1 0 dB BCM to ATA2 loss 0 5 ASM loss 0 5 dB ASM loss 0 5 dB ASM loss 0 5 dB ASM loss 0 5 dB dB 1 0 dB 1 0 dB 1 0 dB 1 0 dB 1 0 dB MWI type see Note Stutter tone Stutter tone Stutter tone Stutter tone Stutter Tone Voltage MWI Reverse polarity Reverse polarity CO 120 V Voltage MWI Voltage MWI CO 120 V PBX 90 V Disconnect N A N A OSI EIA TIA 464 OSI EIA TIA 464 N
49. 15 second value period the beep alarm sounds in accordance to the beep timing setting BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 224 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting Monitoring RAID disk mirror operational status using Element Manager Use this procedure to monitor the primary master and mirror master hard disk activity on systems equipped with a RAID configuration Use Element Manager in this procedure to monitor the RAID disk mirror operation Note You must ensure the system status monitor service is running to monitor primary gt master and mirror master disk operation and disk mirroring activity To monitor RAID disk mirror operational status 1 Open Element Manager 2 From the Administration tab click System Status and then click Disk Mirroring The Disk Mirroring screen displays 3 Click on the Status tab The Disk Mirroring screen displays the operational status of primary master and mirror master disks 4 Confirm that the status for the disk mirroring activity is correct see Table 81 To produce a status report refer to Accessing the RAID status report using Element Manager Table 81 Status field descriptions Status field Description DupliWin dll Version Read only field that displays the RAID software version The latest load always has the latest RAID software Primary Master Status Read only field that displays the status of the primary mas
50. 174 5 Enter these switch settings 21314 on on To Data assign module these DS30 lines bus 121 144 If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 split you cannot use DS30 bus 6 for the DDIM When you use a 3 5 split DS30 bus 7 is not available for the data module portion of the DDIM You cannot use DS30 bus 7 for the DDIM If you assign DS30 bus 7 there is no DS30 bus available for the data module portion of the DDIM N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 123 BRI switch settings You can install a maximum of three BRIM MBMs per DS30 bus on the offsets indicated in Table 34 Table 34 BRIM S T switch settings Select DS30 2 b offset these offset us 1 2 3 4 5 6 jines Enter these switch To Select Enter these switch Toassian Select settings assign DS30 Select settings g these lines 0 on on on on on on 211 218 121 128 1 on on on on on 219 226 1 129 136 227 234 137 144 181 188 91 98 189 196 1 99 106 197 204 107 114 151 158 159 166 If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 split DS30 bus 7 is not available 167 174 CTM switch settings There are two models of CTMs CTM4 The CTM4 provides connections for four analog calling line identification CLID PSTN lines Each voice line uses one line in
51. 246 247 248 DS30 bus 4 FEM port 3 Norstar 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 BCM 257 258 259 260 253 254 255 256 265 266 267 268 261 262 263 264 DS30 bus 5 FEM port 4 Norstar 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 BCM 273 274 275 276 269 270 271 272 281 282 283 284 277 278 279 280 DS30 bus 6 FEM port 5 Norstar 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 BCM 289 290 291 292 285 286 287 288 297 298 299 300 293 294 295 296 DS30 bus 7 FEM port 6 Norstar 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 BCM 305 306 307 308 301 302 303 304 313 314 315 316 309 310 311 312 Setting DNs and port numbers The MBM based on the switch settings defines which DNs and port numbers can be populated with telephones If you have changed the default start DN for your system use Table 51 to identify the DNs and ports for your sets If you are using the default start DN 221 a completed chart is provided in Table 61 on page 163 Table 51 Cross referencing ports and DNs Sheet 1 of 2 26 White Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 1 Blue white Port 201 Port 301 Port 401 Port 501 Port 601 Port 701 27 White Orange DN DN DN DN DN DN 2 Orange White Port 202 Port 302 Port 402 Port 502 Port 602
52. 25 No connection Slate Violet N0060612 Appendix F ASM8 ASM8 and GASM8 wiring chart 349 Appendix F ASM8 ASM8 and GASM8 wiring chart Analog telephony devices such as single line telephones modems and fax machines are connected to the analog station module ASM through the RJ 21 connector on the front of the media bay module MBM see Figure 194 Figure 194 ASM RJ 21 connector GASM8 GASM 1 25 o 000 onl im 000 ER 26 50 RJ 21 pin out RJ 21 connector Table 92 lists the wiring details for the RJ 21 connector on the ASM Table 92 ASM RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 1 of 2 Set Pin Connection Wire color 1 26 Tip White Blue 1 Ring Blue White 2 27 Tip White Orange 2 Ring Orange White 3 28 Tip White Green 3 Ring Green White 4 29 Tip White Brown 4 Ring Brown White 5 30 Tip White Slate 5 Ring Slate White 6 31 Tip Red Blue 6 Ring Blue Red 7 32 Tip Red Orange 7 Ring Orange Red 8 33 Tip Red Green 8 Ring Green Red 34 No connection Red Brown 9 No connection Brown Red BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 350 Appendix F ASM8 ASM8 and GASM8 wiring chart Table 92 ASM RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 2 of 2 Set Pin Connection Wire color 50 No connection Violet Slate 25 No connection Slate Violet N0060612 351 Appendix G Mark
53. 30 14 Brown Black X14 14 30 40 Black Slate X15 15 31 15 Slate Black X15 15 31 41 Yellow Blue X16 16 32 16 Blue Yellow X16 16 32 42 40 no connections 17 25 Table 49 provides the wiring scheme for the eight pairs that connect to the ASM N0060612 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 147 Table 49 ASM wiring chart Wiring for an ASM 8 or GASM8 25 pair female amphenol connector WARNING Ensure that you have Tip T and Ring R connected to the appropriate pins Pin Wire color Port Set 26 White Blue X01 1 1 Blue White X01 1 27 White Orange X02 2 2 Orange White X02 2 28 White Green X03 3 3 Green White X03 3 29 White Brown X04 4 4 Brown White X04 4 30 White Slate X05 5 5 Slate White X05 5 31 Red Blue X06 6 6 Blue Red X06 6 32 Red Orange X07 7 7 Orange Red X07 7 33 Red Green X08 8 8 Green Red X08 8 34 50 no connection 9 25 Note Refer to Assigning line and extension numbers on page 121 to see the relationship between the DS30 channel number and the DNs Configuration information is included in the BCM 4 0 Administration Guide 2 Install the telephones and peripheral equipment if it is a new system a Attach the cables for the telephones to the connecting blocks b Install the telephones Refer to Installing telephones and peripherals on page 161 Plug the female amphenol connector into the interface on the front of the MBM 4
54. 34 Warning External equipment connected to the auxiliary ringer page relay page IN output and music on hold interfaces must use safety extra low voltage SELV All four interfaces are SELV and the external equipment connected to these interfaces must be SELV If these interfaces are not SELV you must use external line isolation units LIU BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 32 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware BCM200 main unit Figure 1 illustrates the BCM200 main unit and Table 1 describes the main unit components Figure 1 BCM200 main unit components Base function tray MBM bays 0000o o P9028 o f i In Tray latch Tray latch ejectors Table 1 BCM200 main unit component descriptions Component Description Base function tray The sliding base function tray provides call processing functions and interface connections See Base function tray component hardware on page 39 Tray latch The tray latch enables you to remove the base function tray Media bay module MBM The MBM bay is a slot into which you install an MBM The BCM200 main unit has two bays MBM bays See Media bay modules MBMs on page 51 MBM ejectors The MBM ejector enables you to remove an MBM from the MBM bay Figure 2 shows the location of the BCM200 main unit internal components Table 2 des
55. 60 sec 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Mode Sequential Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Night Start 17 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 08 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 Service times Evening Start 00 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 End 00 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 Lunch Start 00 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 End 00 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 N0060612 Appendix G Market profile attributes 357 Table 97 Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Ringing service Off Off Off Off Off Off mode Ringing service Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes trunk ans Restriction Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Restriction 000 190 N A N A N A N A global overrides 434440 Restriction filter 0 013 0 0 0 0 N A 01 1 13 1800 1 1800 1 1800 1 1800 1 1800 Service modes 1877 1877 1877 1877 1888 1888 1888 1888 911 911 911 911 911 911 911 911 9411 976 9411 976 9411 976 9411 976 1976 1976 1976 1976 1 976 1 976 1 976 1
56. A supervision types section section 4 5 10 2 4 4 5 10 2 4 4 5 10 2 5 1 4 5 10 2 5 1 Note The MWI type depends on the country profile and the MWI voltage shown is a maximum value N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 61 Specialized media bay modules MBMs This section describes the MBMs that perform a specific job outside of the trunk and station MBM descriptions see Table 11 Table 11 Specialized MBMs Module type What it does Special notes FEM see Fiber expansion units media bay module on page 61 Connects a maximum of six Norstar expansion The switches on the FEM are used to turn fiber ports on and off The FEM does not work correctly if you set these switches using the rules used for other MBMs DDIM 61 see Digital drop and insert MUX on page Enables a BCM system to share its connection to a universal T1 network with a LAN Fiber expansion media bay module The fiber expansion media bay module FEM connects a maximum of six Norstar MBMs to the BCM system These connections provide a quick way to upgrade a Norstar system to a BCM system The front bezel of the FEM has six connectors These connections are made using fiber cables between the FEM module and the Norstar expansion unit Figure 34 shows the front of the FEM module Each enabled port consumes one DS30 bus Figure 34 FEM faceplate LEDs and connectors
57. Figure 159 Remove the power supply module from the power supply cage Rear view Power supply modules slide out of the power supply cage a Compress the locking u tab toward the handle Unfasten the power supply module locking nut fo a SY e JG _ module handle 5 Place the power supply module on a flat clean static free surface 6 Repeat this step for any remaining power supply modules N0060612 299 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware This section describes how to replace data cards and processing hardware components and provides the following topics e Replacing cards on page 299 e Replacing the processor expansion card PEC on page 311 e Replacing memory on page 315 e Replacing the clock calendar battery on page 318 Warning You must remove all of the connections to the BCM system before you power the system down Failure to disconnect lines before you power down the system can cause damage to the system Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge S Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container The following are field replaceable units FRUs for the BCM200 and BCM400 systems e Base function tray e Cards WAN MSC modem e Memory e PECs e Main card CMOS battery Replacing cards
58. Line loop resistance Terminal loop resistance 135 ohms maximum 1300 ohms maximum Analog data device The ATA2 connects a standard analog data device such as a fax or modem to the BCM system Figure 81 shows an installation overview for connecting a data communication device through an ATA2 to the BCM system Figure 81 Data communication device installation overview ATA 2 power cord Data communication BCM main unit CF device Central Office C boe m 7 Line loop resistance Terminal loop resistance 135 ohms maximum 200 ohms maximum Installing the ATA2 This section provides information on installing the ATA2 e Connecting the ATA e Mounting the ATA on page 169 e Test insertion loss measurement on page 170 Connecting the ATA2 After the correct environment has been set up connect the BCM system and the analog device to the ATA2 and then connect the power see Figure 82 N0060612 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter 169 Figure 82 ATA2 top view Lire jack Terminal jack Power supply connector receptacle Figure 83 shows the pin outs for the connection cables Figure 83 ATA2 pin outs Line jack Terminal jack TCM Ring B Lead TCM Tip A Lead r The TCM input i
59. MBMs The BCM400 main unit accommodates a maximum of four MBMs If your BCM400 system requires more than four MBMs you must connect an expansion unit to the BCM main unit A Warning Install DTMs in the BCM main unit only DTMs do not function if installed in the BCM expansion unit If there are no empty MBM bays in the BCM main unit move MBMs to the expansion unit to provide space for the DTMs Note The number of MBMs you can add varies depending on the DS30 resources that are available Refer to Table 25 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 136 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM To install an MBM in the BCM main unit or expansion unit 1 Ensure that the switches on the MBM are set correctly For information about how to set the switches refer to Determining MBM DIP switch settings on page 116 In the case of FEM modules the switches activate the front ports Ensure that the switches accurately reflect the ports you require Refer to FEM switch settings on page 133 Select an open media bay With the face of the MBM facing toward you insert the MBM into the open bay Push the MBM completely into the unit You will hear a click when the MBM is firmly seated in the media bay Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each MBM you want to install N0060612 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 137 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables This section describes initial system startup pr
60. Market profile DSM32 ASM8 ASM8 GASM8 CTM8 GATM8 4x16 BRI DTM Australia ov tt v v v v Brazil v v v v CALA v v v Canada v v v v v v v v v Caribbean v v v v v v v Denmark v v v France v v v BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 352 Appendix G Market profile attributes Table 93 Media bay module availability by market profile Sheet 2 of 2 DSM16 ASM CTM4 GATM4 Market profile DSM32 ASM8 ASM8 GASM8 CTM8 GATM8 4x16 BRI DTM Germany v v v Global v v v Holland v v v Hong Kong vA pa v v Italy v v v Mexico vA v v v New Zealand v v v North America v v v v v v v v v Norway v v v Poland v ov v v v PRC v v v Spain v v v Sweden v v v Switzerland v v v Taiwan vA v v v United Kingdom v v v v v FEM MBM Norstar trunk cartridge combinations Norstar trunk cartridges can be connected to the BCM system using the fiber expansion module FEM The following table provides a cross reference between market profiles and the Norstar trunk cartridges you can connect to the FEM Table 94 Norstar trunk cartridge availability by market profile Sheet 1 of 2 Analog Country specific Market profile BRI S T 2 4 BRI U2 4 Analog DID Analog E amp M CLID analog trunk card Australia v v Brazil v CALA v v v v Canada
61. Not Not supported supported supported Caribbean Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Global Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Mexico ETSI Not No Supported No Supported Not Not supported 425 Hz 250 supported supported ms On 250 ms Off New Zealand ETSI Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported 500ms UK supported supported Guarded Clear N0060612 Appendix G Market profile attributes 371 Table 104 On hook caller ID disconnect supervision and message waiting parameters Sheet 2 of 2 On hook caller ID Disconnect supervision Message waiting DTMF Market Start Digit Line Voltage Stutter profile FSK Stop Digit OSI Busy tone reversal FSK reversal dial tone North Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not America supported supported supported Poland ETSI Not No Supported in Supported Supported Not Not supported unsupervised in supported supported mode supervised 425 Hz 500 mode ms On 500 ms Off Taiwan ETSI Supported No Supported No Supported Not Not D C 480 620 supported supported Hz 500 ms On 500 ms Off United ETSI Not Yes No No Supported Not Not Kingdom supported 500ms UK supported supported Guarded Clear GASMS8 parameters This section contains information for the GASM8 MBM Global analog s
62. Port 702 28 White Green DN DN DN DN DN DN 3 Green White Port 203 Port 303 Port 403 Port 503 Port 603 Port 703 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 150 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables Table 51 Cross referencing ports and DNs Sheet 2 of 2 29 White Brown DN DN DN DN DN DN 4 Brown White Port 204 Port 304 Port 404 Port 504 Port 604 Port 704 30 White Slate DN DN DN DN DN DN 5 Slate White Port 205 Port 305 Port 405 Port 505 Port 605 Port 705 31 Red Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 6 Blue Red Port 206 Port 306 Port 406 Port 506 Port 606 Port 706 32 Red Orange DN DN DN DN DN DN 7 Orange Red Port 207 Port 307 Port 407 Port 507 Port 607 Port 707 33 Red Green DN DN DN DN DN DN 8 Green Red Port 208 Port 308 Port 408 Port 508 Port 608 Port 708 34 Red Brown DN DN DN DN DN DN 9 Brown Red Port 209 Port 309 Port 409 Port 509 Port 609 Port 709 35 Red Slate DN DN DN DN DN DN 10 Slate Red Port 210 Port 310 Port 410 Port 510 Port 610 Port 710 36 Black Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 11 Blue Black Port 211 Port 311 Port 411 Port 511 Port 611 Port 711 37 Black Orange DN DN DN DN DN DN 12 Orange Black Port 212 Port 312 Port 412 Port 512 Port 612 Port 712 38 Black Green DN DN DN DN DN DN 13 Green Black Port 213 Port 313 Port 413 Port 513 Port 613 Port 713 39 Black Brown DN DN DN DN DN DN 14 Brown Black Port 214 Port
63. RAID upgrade kit the mirror disk and primary disk IDE ribbon cables are preinstalled If applicable install the programmed hard disk from your single disk system into the RAID hard disk cage use as the primary disk see Figure 132 Fad gt Note For a BCM200 system orient the hard disk so that the power and IDE connectors are on the bottom and opposite to the hard disk cage lift tab see Figure 130 For a BCM400 system orient the hard disk so that the power and IDE connectors are on the bottom and on the same side as the hard disk cage lift tab see Figure 131 Note The hard disk storage capacity in MB for both primary and mirror hard disks must be identical Equipment provided by Nortel assures correct hard disk capacity requirements To install a primary hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage 1 Position the primary hard disk into the top position of the RAID hard disk cage 2 Align the hard disk and hard disk cage retaining screw holes Fasten the hard disk cage retainer screws into both sides of the hard disk cage see Figure 131 3 Connect the correct primary IDE ribbon cable connector to the primary hard disk N0060612 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 271 Figure 131 Install a primary hard disk into the RAID hard disk cage Fai ete he programe Primary hara ais ine 2 Install the hard disk retaining screws the hard disk cage Sr A Rear view Primary hard disk I
64. Setup any mobile system you are using e Ensure the base stations are correctly installed and connected to the appropriate MBMs on the BCM system In the case of the Wireless LAN IP telephone system ensure that the access point is correctly set up to connect to the BCM system LAN or WAN e Configure and register the handsets according to the instructions provided for each type of system BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 148 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables Wiring the FEM A fiber expansion module FEM allows you to upgrade from a Norstar system to a BCM system by reusing the Norstar MBMs The MBMs connect to the FEM using the same fiber cable that connected them to the Norstar fiber expansion card AN Warning Handling optical fiber cables If the cable is too long ensure that it is coiled correctly using the fiber spool Coil excess fiber cable carefully around the spool provided Do not bend the cable around any tight corners Bends in the fiber cable must not be less than 100 mm in diameter Place the fiber cable spool into a slot at the back of the cable trough in the Norstar MBM To connect the fiber cables 1 Ensure the BCM system is powered up and functional 2 Connect the fiber cables from the Norstar MBMs to the jacks on the FEM Note The DIP switch settings you chose determine which FEM ports are available If you enable all six FEM ports the BCM system has no more DS30 resource
65. Startup Profile template to save a version of the Startup Profile sps file and a version of the Startup Profile editor Excel spreadsheet on your computer Exit from Microsoft Excel Insert the USB storage device into the USB port of the computer Copy the Startup Profile sps file to the root directory of the USB storage device If you want to apply your keycode file using the Startup Profile copy the keycode file to the root directory of the USB storage device The name of the keycode file on the USB storage device must exactly match the filename you entered in the Startup Profile editor Remove the USB storage device from the USB port of the computer The Startup Profile is now stored on the USB storage device To load the Startup Profile data onto the BCM system Turn off the power switch at the rear of the main unit Insert the USB storage device into the USB port on the main unit Turn on the power switch at the rear of the main unit The BCM system automatically detects the Startup Profile file and loads the information during the bootup sequence Loading the Startup Profile increases the time for the BCM system to boot depending on the selected parameters See Table 76 for details about Startup Profile times and LED status The Startup Profile is not fully loaded until the system reboots Note The Startup Profile functions only on a BCM system that does not have a keycode file applied After a keycode file is appl
66. Table 87 GATM4 RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 1 of 2 Line Pin Connection Wire color 1 26 Tip White Blue 1 Ring Blue White 2 27 Tip White Orange 2 Ring Orange White 28 No connection White Green 3 No connection Green White 29 No connection White Brown 4 No connection Brown White 3 30 Tip White Slate 5 Ring Slate White 4 31 Tip Red Blue 6 Ring Blue Red 32 No connection Red Orange 7 No connection Orange Red 49 No connection Violet Brown 24 No connection Brown Violet BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 340 Appendix C GATM wiring chart Table 87 GATM4 RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 2 of 2 Line Pin Connection Wire color Aux 50 Tip Violet Slate 25 Ring Slate Violet Note The Aux port supports full data speeds When the line is in use by an analog device the icon is lit on the phone to indicate it is in use If you try to seize the line using the phone the display shows in use Also in the event of a power failure an analog set on line 1 goes active powered by the CO Table 88 lists the wiring details for the RJ 21 connector on the GATM8 Table 88 GATM8 RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 1 of 2 Line Pin Connection Wire color 1 26 Tip White Blue 1 Ring Blue White 2 27 Tip White Orange 2
67. Technical Support Web site http www nortel com support This site provides quick access to software documentation bulletins and tools to address issues with Nortel products More specifically the site enables you to e download software documentation and product bulletins e search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues e sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for Nortel equipment e open and manage technical support cases Getting Help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center If you don t find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support Web site and have a Nortel support contract you can also get help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center In North America call 1 800 4NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 Outside North America go to the following Web site to obtain the phone number for your region http www nortel com callus Getting Help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers you can use an Express Routing Code ERC to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel product or service To locate the ERC for your product or service go to http www nortel com erc Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical
68. The Open dialog box opens Select the keycode file for your system and click Open Refer to the Keycode Installation Guide for details on how to retrieve and enter the keycodes for your system BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 196 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters To configure the LAN IP address oa fF O N 7 From the Configuration tab click the Resources folder to expand it Select Network Interfaces Select the Interfaces tab It is normally selected by default Select the LAN interface to configure From the Details panel select the IP Settings tab From the IP Address Specification area click Modify The Modify IP Settings dialog box opens Configure the IP Settings attributes see Table 66 Table 66 Modify IP Settings attributes Attribute Description Obtain IP address dynamically If this is selected the BCM system attempts to take IP address information from a DHCP server If this is not selected you must enter values for static IP address IP subnet mask and Default gateway IP address The IP address of the BCM system IP subnet mask The subnet mask used by the BCM system Note If any of the attributes are modified then the Element Manager session is disconnected 8 Click Ok To configure the modem a A O N From the Configuration tab click the Resources folder to expand it Select Network Interfaces S
69. To check system power and status 1 Ifthe base function tray power LED does not light a Disconnect the power cords b Check all cables and power connections Ensure that the AC outlet has power c Reconnect the power cords 2 Ifthe power LED is red and there is no power use a paper clip to select the reset button Alternatively power cycle the system to restart 3 You are now ready to connect the system to the network and initialize it Note You can monitor the state of the BCM system LEDs from your computer When the system power is on and the system has successfully booted the power and status LEDs on the faceplates of the MBM are lit and remain constant Figure 74 shows an example of an MBM and the LEDs on the MBM faceplate Table 47 provides a description of the MBM power and status LED states BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 140 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables Figure 74 Module power and status LEDs All modules have a power and status LED Table 47 Module power and status LED states Indicates state OK Check for hardware A minimum of 1 power No power to the of system problem with fan supply needs attention module power power or heat inside housing Indicates All monitored In startup shutdown N A Not all services are O condition of services are mode working MSC may system status functioning check for problem not have started with MSC wiring correctly
70. V DC source BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 174 Chapter 12 Installing optional telephony equipment Activating auxiliary ringer programming You can activate the auxiliary ringer by setting auxiliary ring for specific external lines and BCM telephones Connecting the external paging system You can connect a customer supplied external paging system to provide paging over external loudspeakers Ensure the paging system follows these guidelines The paging output from the MSC is 100 mV rms across an input impedance of 600 The output level is 0 dBm0 with reference to 600 ohms for a PCM encoded signal at 0 dBm There is no DC voltage across the page output terminals The page output uses the tip and ring terminals of the jack The sleeve terminal of the jack connects to ground You must use a stereo plug to connect the page signal output When you use the page signal output jack to connect an external paging amplifier you also use the page relay jack which contains a floating relay contact pair The system uses this jack to control the external paging amplifier The contact pair has a switch capacity of 50 mA non inductive at 40 V maximum You must remove any inductive load on the output The page relay contacts connect to the tip and ring terminals of the jack The sleeve terminal of the jack connects to ground You must use a stereo plug to connect the page relay To install an external paging sys
71. Variable Variable 10 Variable Variable Variable number length Handsfree Auto None Auto Auto Auto Auto Pickup group None None None None 0 None Set capabilities Aiow redirect Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Call forward Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled delay 4 4 4 4 4 4 Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value Dial tone Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled detection Set preferences Language English UKEnglish English Norwegian Polish English first is default French VICAP French English EuroFrench French Spanish Spanish Swedish English Spanish Turkish Danish Czech Turkish Analog VSC None 141 None None 1831 None tone ONN blocking Analog VSC None 141 None None 1831 None pulse BRI VSC None 141 None None None None BRI per loop SuprsBit SrvcCode SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit Release reason Release text Simple Detailed None Simple Simple Simple Release code On Off Off On On On Tone duration 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec 110 msec 120 msec DTMF Pause time 1 5 msec 3 5 msec 1 5 msec 3 5 msec 1 5 msec 1 5 msec parameters Interdigit time 80 msec 100 msec 80 msec 100 msec 80 msec 80 msec Table 100 Sp
72. a list of additional documents referred to in this guide There are two types of publication Technical Documents on page 29 and User Guides on page 29 Technical Documents System Installation Upgrade Guide N0060597 BCM 4 0 Installation Checklist and Quick Start Guide N0060602 BCM1000 BCM 3 7 Installation and Maintenance Guide N0008587 01 BCM 4 0 for BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide Addendum N0060603 Keycode Installation Guide N0060625 System Programming BCM 4 0 Administration Guide N0060598 BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide N0060600 BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide N0060606 BCM 4 0 Telset Administration Guide N0060610 Telephones and Peripherals BCM 4 0 Telephony Device Installation Guide N0060609 Digital Mobility Digital Mobility System Installation and Configuration Guide N0000623 T7406 Cordless Handset Installation Guide P0606142 IP Telephony WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Configuration Guide N0060634 Call Pilot CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide N0027247 CallPilot Telephone Administration Guide N0060618 User Guides There are no references to specific user guides BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 30 Chapter 1 Getting started How to get help This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services Getting Help from the Nortel Web site The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel
73. adapter This section provides installation instructions for the analog terminal adapter 2 ATA2 or ATA The ATA2 connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to the BCM system through a digital station module Examples of analog voice devices are analog telephones and answering machines Examples of analog data communication devices are modems and fax machines The ATA2 is designated as either an ONS on premise station or an OPS off premise station port Refer to the following sections for information on installing an ATA2 e Configuration overview e Installing the ATA on page 168 e Configuring the ATA on page 172 Refer to Table 10 for ATA2 specifications Configuration overview This section describes environment configurations for connecting analog and data devices to the main unit using an ATA2 e Analog telephone e Analog data device on page 168 Analog telephone Figure 80 on page 168 shows an installation overview for connecting an analog device through an ATA2 to the main unit BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 168 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter Figure 80 Analog telephone installation overview ATA 2 power cord BCM main unit LF Analog telephone Central Office I in
74. and auxiliary equipment refer to Installing telephones and peripherals on page 161 The North America market profile supports the following format 5554775 613 All other market profiles display the numbers in a continuous string of a maximum of 14 characters 6135554775 Core parameters for market profiles The core parameters for the available market profiles are provided in the following tables market profiles are listed in alphabetical order e Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark see Table 97 e France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy see Table 98 e Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC see Table 99 e Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom see Table 100 Table 97 Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Access codes Direct dial digit 9 9 0 0 0 0 Dest code for 0 0 9 9 9 9 default route Digital trunking ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 NI 2 ETSI 403 Protocol protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG relocate variants BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 NI 2 NI 2 ETSI 102 protocol variant PRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 NI 2 ETSI 403 protocol ETSI Q
75. and music telephony equipment to the media services card MSC connectors Locate and use the MSC connectors on the front of the BCM base function tray This section describes the following main topics Installing an auxiliary ringer on page 173 Activating auxiliary ringer programming on page 174 Connecting the external paging system on page 174 Connecting an external music source on page 175 Installing an auxiliary ringer An auxiliary ringer is a customer supplied piece of hardware that provides external ringing capability to telephones on the BCM system To install an auxiliary ringer 1 Figure 86 Use the installation instructions that came with the ringer hardware to install the auxiliary ringer Connect the ringer generator miniature jack to the auxiliary ringer output on the MSC Refer to Figure 86 Select the appropriate option for your system e Ifyou are adding more auxiliary equipment proceed to Connecting the external paging system on page 174 or Connecting an external music source on page 175 e If you are finished adding auxiliary equipment proceed to Next step on page 176 Auxiliary ringer jack Ring Auxiliary relay output MSC faceplate Auxiliary ringer Tip Auxiliary relay output CI 0000 Sleeve Ground Warning The auxiliary ringer must not be connected to exposed plant The ringer must not draw more than 50 mA from a 40
76. cage retainer screws into both sides of the hard disk cage see Figure 130 Figure 130 Install a single hard disk in the standard configuration hard disk cage Insert the hard disk into the BCM200 shown _ hard disk cage ae Front view i _ Align and install the lu disk 92 hard disk retainer cage lift a I rew IDE connector tab Power supply connector Note Install the BCM200 hard disk so that the IDE and power connectors are opposite to the hard disk cage lift tab Installing a primary hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage Use this procedure to install a primary hard disk into the RAID hard disk cage for the BCM200 or BCM400 system Use this procedure if you need to replace a faulty primary hard disk or install a programmed hard disk from a standard configuration BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 270 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk Nortel recommends that you replace a failed primary hard disk to retain full redundancy Replace the failed primary hard disk during a period of low call traffic Caution Use only Nortel approved replacement components Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Note For a
77. cards e_ WAN card PCI clamp press plate PCI connector TI CSU connector WAN1 V 35 DB25 female connector WAN2 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 48 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Modem card The V 92 or V 90 modem connects the BCM system to the public switched telephone network PSTN enabling the BCM system to send and receive data The modem card is standard on North American systems while it is optional for APAC and EMEA The modem kit consists of a modem card RJ 11 interface and connector cable For further information on installation and removal see To install a modem card on page 309 and To remove the modem card on page 307 Figure 19 shows the modem components Use the modem connection to e manage the BCM system from a different location e provide dial up backup for a WAN card Figure 19 Modem card and interface Modem card RJ 11 card interface To main card modem socket connector Modem card RJ 11 connector pin guide exposed on base a function tray face Base function Di mount points i je Main card connector O interface card The V O interface card provides a signal junction between the base function tray hard disk power supply and cooling system Figure 20 shows the I O interface card and connections N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 49 Figure 20 I O interface card conne
78. components The RAID status LEDs indicate monitoring of the following e Primary hard disk activity e Mirror hard disk activity e RAID card status activity N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 39 Figure 7 Advanced function tray RAID status LEDs Primary Mirror Alarm Reset N ORT E L amp Status Base function tray component hardware This section describes the following base function tray components e Base function tray faceplate components on page 39 e Base function tray internal components on page 40 e Main card on page 43 e Data networking components on page 46 e TO interface card on page 48 Base function tray faceplate components Figure 8 illustrates the base function tray faceplate components Table 5 describes the faceplate components Figure 8 Base function tray faceplate components System status LEDs Reset button Du N WAN card o I aa MSC zu zu _ _ IB Sm USB port Modem port COM port Ethernet Ethernet serial port port 2 port 1 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 40 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Table 5 Base function tray faceplate component descriptions Component Description System status LEDs The system status display LEDs indi
79. connected to a CTM on page 227 To troubleshoot the emergency telephone on the system Check the power LED on the ASMS to check that the ASM8 is receiving power Check that the emergency telephone has dial tone Check the external line and emergency telephone connections A OO N a To avoid damage to the emergency telephone connect the telephone directly to the external line and check for dial tone 5 Replace the MSC N0060612 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting 227 To troubleshoot the emergency telephone connected to a CTM 1 2 Check that the system has a CTM installed Check that there is no dial tone at the emergency telephone 3 Replace the CTM ATA2 does not function If the BCM ATA2 does not function use these procedures to troubleshoot the problem To troubleshoot the ATA2 O a fF WN Make sure there is AC power connected to the ATA2 unit Make sure that the ATA2 is in the tones off mode for data applications only Correctly configure the ATA2 telephone port for data communication Allow sufficient start up time Assign the prime line Assign a ringing line if required For example auto answer modems and fax machines require a ringing line To check the ATA 2 wiring 1 ATA2 to the terminal The resistance must be 200 ohms or less for data applications and 1 300 ohms or less for voice applications BCM system to ATA2 The wiring must be equivalent to 800 m of 0 5 mm wi
80. enter the number to which the system calls back in order to verify the dial up user access Modem Callback Passcode This is the code the system uses to confirm the callback is legitimate ISDN Callback Number If ISDN Callback is required enter the number to which the system calls back in order to verify the dial up user access ISDN Callback Passcode This is the code the system uses to confirm that the ISDN callback is legitimate Change Password On Login Select this checkbox to force the user to change the password upon first login Change Password On Login Telset Select this checkbox to force the user to change the Telset password upon first login 6 Click Ok 7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 to create more user accounts Next step After you set the basic parameters proceed to Completing the initial installation optional on page 211 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 204 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters N0060612 Chapter 17 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 205 Chapter 17 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters The Startup Profile tool enables an experienced administrator to customize a template with common BCM parameters This template is used to quickly configure one or multiple systems You create the Startup Profile using the Startup Profile template a Microsoft Excel template You t
81. er 2 acer 2 ea ia nen 122 BRI SWIC SBHNdE lt jnaceees Scene eietes bade hoelee ake weede bese Rees 123 CTH SWIN Eid rien pode areas 123 ATM swith Beliinde a2 ee 125 dx TC SIEH SONGS san nen a 126 ASM 8 and GASMB switch settings c cscc2eeceeedeeeaneebo nee ke nee 128 DSM SAV SCS icy eels een FORRES aa eee 130 FEM SWIIEN Settings ann a kee ween eee 133 BCM400 expansion gateway MBMs 20 000 c eee eee 134 Installing an MEN 244004 24504040354 50 oh ioe GEG eee pega gaded seas euks 135 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 00 0c cece eee eee eee 137 Connecting power to the BCM system 00 cece eee 138 Checking system power and status 222 000 c cee eee 139 POG IE WEIS 20 er 140 Connect the MBMs to service providers 0000 cece eee ee ees 142 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Contents Wiring MBMs to internal connections ars assed adew sees oeee eww 144 AVI DO FEN 255 aig te era 148 Setting DNs and port numbers 0 eee ee ees 149 MBM COMDINGHONS cccccnecccwetiGeetagee naar 150 Combining CTMs GATMs and 4x16s 0 000 cee 151 FREE na 151 DECT COMDINAIONS coccccdgcnces eier ia 153 Changing configurations zu ae ee Se 154 SYS COUP aan rer ins ea kr 155 Connecting the data networking hardware 222222 cece cece eee eae 155 Connecting the BI scis aan dw lara en Re aus 156 Installing the cards 2200s scot e anes ee aha 159 Chapter 10 Ins
82. from a BCM main unit or expansion unit To remove an MBM 1 Power down the BCM system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Remove any cabling from the MBM faceplate Grasp the right edge of the MBM ejector lever with your thumb index and middle fingers Pull outward to partially eject the MBM Pull further on the lever to eject the MBM from the bay Refer to Figure 119 Figure 120 or Figure 121 4 Grasp the top and bottom edges of the MBM Remove the MBM from the BCM unit see Figure 119 Figure 120 and Figure 121 Place the MBM in a clean safe and static free area Figure 119 Remove a BCM200 MBM Ue the edge of the MBM ejector lever and pull outward N0060612 Chapter 21 Replacing a media bay module 251 Figure 120 Remove a BCM400 MBM A N Grasp the edge of the MBM ejector lever and pull outward Figure 121 Remove the expansion unit front bezel BCM expansion unit m m vol mp Wa oW Push against the bottom Pull out from the top MBM latches BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 252 Chapte
83. ground 157 clear to send 157 configuration Element Manager 193 overview 184 Telset Admin 187 configuring the BCM system 183 connecting WAN card 157 conventions guide 27 cooling fan description 68 copyright 2 copyright music source 20 cordless 7406 73 cordless telephones digital mobility phones overview 74 CTM 4x16 settings 126 dip switch settings 117 119 123 overview 55 D data carrier detect 157 data devices using ATA 2 168 data networking modem card 48 data setready 157 data terminal ready 157 158 data transmission requirements ATA2 168 DB25 connector 157 DDIM overview 61 dedicated cable 75 default gateway LAN DHCP scope 199 digital extensions 108 digital lines 4x16 56 digital mobility handset overview 74 digital station media bay module 56 digital trunk module DTM 54 digitizing analog equipment ATA2 161 dip switch settings ASM GASMS 128 BRI 123 CTM 123 DSM 130 DTM 121 FEM settings 133 GATM 125 offset 110 DN ASM dip switch settings 128 DSM switch settings 131 132 DNs default on 4x16 344 defaulton ASM 349 defaulton DSM16 347 default on DSM32 347 dip switch settings 121 see also extensions DS30 channels ASM switch settings 128 BRI switch settings 123 CTM switch settings 123 dip switch settings 117 119 DSM switch settings 130 DTM switch settings 121 hierarchy 114 offset configurations 110 sharing offsets 111 DSM 4x16 settings 126 dip switch setting
84. have occurred during shipping If you find any damage contact your Nortel sales representative Note You must supply cable management tools or techniques depending on the type of BCM system installation Installing the main unit in an equipment rack You can install a BCM main unit in a standard 19 inch equipment rack along with your other networking and telecommunications equipment The BCM expansion unit installs in a similar manner to the main units e Caution When installing the main unit in a rack do not stack units directly on top of one another in the rack Fasten each unit to the rack with the appropriate mounting brackets Mounting brackets cannot support multiple units For desk mount installations do not place anything directly on top of the BCM main unit Refer to Environmental requirements on page 87 for acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM main unit Use the following procedures to install a BCM unit in a rack To attach the rack mount brackets on page 93 To mount the main unit in an equipment rack on page 94 N0060612 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit 93 To attach the rack mount brackets 1 Place the BCM main unit on a flat clean surface 2 Align the screw holes between the BCM main unit and the right rack mount bracket 3 Fasten the bracket to the BCM main unit using four screws Caution Use only the screws suppli
85. icon and selecting FAT32 reformatting This destroys any data you had on the USB Note The Startup Profile functions only on a BCM system that does not have a keycode applied After a keycode is applied the Startup Profile does not function This condition prevents overwriting of the parameters of a configured system To re apply the Startup Profile remove the applied keycode file by returning the system to factory defaults using the BIT tool Refer to the following sections for information on setting the initial parameters on the BCM system Startup Profile requirements Configuring basic parameters on page 207 Startup Profile requirements To use the Startup Profile template you need the following a computer with a USB port Microsoft Excel 2000 or later the Nortel BCM Startup Profile template Microsoft Excel template If you do not have the Startup Profile template on your computer you can get a copy from the the Nortel support web site www nortel com support or the Administrator Applications page on the main unit Refer to To download the Startup Profile template on page 206 for details on getting the Startup Profile template from the main unit a portable USB storage device compatible with USB 1 1 formatted for FAT32 To download the Startup Profile template Access the BCM web page see To access the BCM web page on page 194 From the Welcome to BCM web page click Administrato
86. is released at the far end E amp M T1 and E amp M This type of trunk line is used to create simple network connections to other phone systems This trunk always operates in a disconnected supervised mode PRI ISDN interface with 23 B channels and 1 D channel at 1 544 Mb s in Europe 30 B channels and 1 D channels at 2 048 Mb s These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are auto answer trunks BRI ISDN loop that provides both T and S reference point loops These loops can support both network T and S loops and terminal equipment S Loop connections This type of line provides incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network ETSI ISDN BRI is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute specification for BRI ISDN service BRI provides two bearer B channels operating at 64 Kb s and a data D channel which operates at 16 Kb s The D channel is used primarily to carry call information Like loop start trunks BRI lines can be configured as manual answer or auto answer DASS2 British Trunk provides multiline IDA interconnection to the British Telecom network BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 376 Appendix G Market profile attributes Table 110 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions Sheet 2 of 2 Trunk types Description DPNSS A digital private network signaling system which allows phone systems from different ma
87. list of available accounts N0060612 Chapter 15 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 191 12 Press CHNGE to change the password for the selected account 13 Enter the new password for the account 14 Enter the new password again to confirm it Refer to To create user accounts on page 203 for more information on creating user accounts using Element Manager Next step After you configure the initial parameters using Telset Administration you must configure the startup parameters using Element Manager Refer to Configuring the startup parameters on page 198 for more information BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 192 Chapter 15 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters N0060612 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 193 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters The Element Manager application provides a computer based client interface that can connect to devices over an IP network and display the programming interface for that device Through Element Manager you can configure all of the basic parameters which include e Configuring the initial parameters on page 195 e Configuring the startup parameters on page 198 Refer to the BCM 4 0 Administration Guide for more information on how to use Element Manager Figure 95 shows an overview of using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
88. main unit The BCM400 main unit is available either in a standard or redundant feature option RFO configuration Figure 3 illustrates the BCM400 main unit and Table 3 describes the main unit components These components are the same for the standard and RFO configurations Figure 3 BCM400 main unit components Advanced function tray Tray latch e MBM bays Tray latch e E x a a Base function tray MBM ejector Table 3 BCM400 main unit component descriptions Component Description Base function tray The sliding base function tray provides call processing functions and interface connections See Base function tray component hardware on page 39 Advanced function tray The sliding advanced function tray contains a hard disk and a bay for future use See BCM400 advanced function tray on page 37 Tray latch The tray latch enables you to remove the base function tray or the advanced function tray Media bay module MBM The MBM bay is a slot into which you install an MBM See Media bay modules bay MBMs on page 51 MBM ejector The MBM ejector enables you to remove an MBM from the MBM bay Figure 4 shows the BCM400 main unit standard configuration internal components while Figure 5 shows the BCM400 main unit RFO internal components Table 4 descri
89. memory or cause a loss of telephony programming If this occurs complete the installation of the PEC and then restore the data from your backup medium Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container N0060612 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 315 To install a PEC Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet 2 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 3 Decide which slot you are going to install the PEC into on the MSC If you have more than one card holder BCM400 completely populate one card holder at a time Line the card up between the rails of the slot Ensure the card label is face up Carefully slide the PEC into the slot until it is firmly seated see Figure 171 on page 315 Note Do not force the card into its slot If the PEC does not slide in easily check the alignment Figure 171 Insert the processor expansion card PEC III ee A A P a Processor expansion card ra LO A A g IN zZ LA ge Completely insert the base function tray into the main unit see To install the base function tray on page 236 7 Restore the BCM system to operation Refer to Restarting the system after maintenance on page 2
90. modules are working properly these LEDs are both solid green Table 77 Module power and status LED states condition of services are mode working system status functioning Indicates All monitored In startup shutdown N A Not all services are Some types of modules also have LEDs beside the jacks or for data indicators Refer to the information on individual modules for a description of the function of these LEDs The BCM system status monitor allows you to view the status of the system LEDs on your PC This status display allows you to make preliminary decisions regarding the type of intervention required without necessarily having to inspect the BCM hardware Monitoring standard configuration hard disk status using Element Manager Use the procedure described in this section to monitor the operational status of systems equipped with the standard hard disk configuration The standard configuration uses a single hard disk The procedures describe monitoring and diagnosis techniques for the standard hard disk configuration Note If you are using the Element Manager system status monitor function ensure the gt hard disk monitoring configuration settings are set correctly Use the system status monitor from Element Manager to determine the operational status of the hard disk Alternatively examine the LED display panel on the front of the base function tray see Base function tray system status display LEDs on pa
91. on 115 118 07 Not supported 1 If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 split you cannot configure this module for DS30 6 because DS30 7 is not available for the second level 2 The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 128 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM ASM 8 and GASM8 switch settings In a single density configuration such as for DS30 6 or 7 when they are set to the default PDD only offset 1 and 2 are available to ASM 8 GASM6B8 In a double density configuration you can install four GASMB8s for each DS30 bus Table 38 shows the switch settings for each DS30 number and the dialing numbers DNs assigned to each DS30 number Table 39 ASM 8 settings Select bus Select Enter these switch To Select Enter these switch To offset settings assign offset settings assign 1 2 3 4 5 6 these 12 3 a 5 6 these DNs DNs 2 5 system upgraded to 3 0 3 0 and newer systems on on on on on on 221 228 on on on on on on 221 228 on on on on on 229 236 on on on on on 229 236 on on on on on 377 384 on on on on on 237 244 on on on on 385 392 on on on on 245 252 on on on on on 237 244 on on on on on 253 260 on on on on 245 252 on on on on 261 268
92. on T er er ot sron e 4x16 switch settings The 4x16 MBM combines a CTM and a DSM16 The CTM only requires four lines on the DS30 bus Therefore it can be assigned any of the four offsets in a DS30 bus The DSM then automatically assigns the next DS30 bus and all the assigned DNs The 4x16 MBM can be combined with three other CTMs or one CTM8 on the same DS30 bus N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 127 Table 38 shows the switch settings for each DS30 bus and the assigned lines and dialing numbers DNs for each DS30 bus Table 38 4x16 switch settings Se Select Enter these switch settings To assign And this DS30 bus 2Custom DN offset 1 2 3 4 5 6 these lines and DNs range bus on 02 0 211 214 on on on on on DS30 bus 03 1 on on on on on 219 222 237 252 2 5 upgrade 2 on on on on on 227 230 253 268 new system 3 on on on on 235 238 U U on on on on on 51 184 DS30 bus 04 1 on on 189 192 253 268 2 5 upgrade 2 on 197 200 285 292 i SM 205 208 gt ayer U4 U on on 154 1 on on 159 162 DS30 bus 05 269 284 2 5 upgrade 2 on on 167 170 317 332 aa a3 on 175 178 un 0 0 on on 121 124 _ DS30 bus 06 aon 129 132 285 300 2 5 upgrade 2 on 137 140 349 364 new system 3 on 145 148 oo ER DS30 bus 07 bus L a a 301 316 2 5 upgrade 2 on 107 110 381 396 new system 3 on on
93. on how to monitor disk mirroring progress refer to RAID disk mirroring on page 221 Replacing a hard disk in the hard disk cage Use the procedures in this section to remove or install the hard disk in the hard disk cage for the standard and RAID upgrade BCM200 and BCM400 configurations Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Refer to the following detailed information e Removing a hard disk from a standard configuration hard disk cage on page 265 e Removing a primary hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage on page 266 e Removing a mirror hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage on page 267 e Installing a hard disk into a standard configuration hard disk cage on page 268 e Installing a primary hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage on page 269 e Installing a mirror hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage on page 271 Removing a hard disk from a standard configuration hard disk cage Use this procedure to remove the hard disk from the hard disk cage for the standard BCM200 and BCM400 system Use this procedure only to replace a faulty hard disk Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in a static fre
94. or the line drops Remove the single line telephone Measure the 1 kHz tone at the far end of the analog port which is where the analog loop ends and where the analog device connects Note The tone must be greater than 10 dB for example 9 dB is acceptable To measure the insertion loss from the analog device to the CO 1 Establish a connection to a silent termination on the CO service line with an analog telephone attached to the ATA2 2 Make sure the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 172 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter e Replace the analog telephone with the test set e Use TRANSMIT 600 OHM HOLD mode on the test set 3 Make sure the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the analog telephone or the line drops Remove the analog telephone Introduce a 1 kHz tone into the analog line at 10 dBm and measure the level at the CO exchange Note The difference in levels is the transmit loss and must be less than 10 dB for example 9 dB is acceptable Configuring the ATA2 Configure the ATA2 using Element Manager or Telset Administration For detailed configuration information refer to the BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide N0060612 173 Chapter 12 Installing optional telephony equipment Use the procedures described in this chapter to connect the optional ringer page
95. product has been exposed to rain water or liquid has been spilled on the product disconnect and allow the product to dry out to see if it still operates but do not open up the product If the product housing has been damaged If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance gt Caution To eliminate the possibility of accidental damage to cords plugs jacks and the telephone do not use sharp instruments during the assembly procedures A Warning Do not insert the plug at the free end of the handset cord directly into a wall or baseboard jack Such misuse can result in unsafe sound levels or possible damage to the handset 12 Save these instructions Use of a music source In accordance with U S Copyright Law a license may be required from the American Society of Composers Authors and Publishers or similar organization if Radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the music on hold or Background Music features of this telecommunication system Nortel hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license Safety Business Communications Manager BCM equipment meets all applicable requirements of both the CSA C22 2 No 60950 and UL 60950 Edition 3 A Danger Risk of shock Read and follow installation instructions carefully Ensure the BCM system is not powered and that all telephone data cables are removed prior to opening the BCM unit in the field If
96. settings for DSM plus modules deployed as double density on a new system BCM 3 0 or later software Note DSM modules deployed prior to BCM 3 0 are all single density and cannot be set to gt double density but they can still be used on new systems The DSM 16 and DSM32 modules can be set to either density Table 45 DSM 16 and DSM32 double density switch settings new system Sheet 1 of 2 To assign these Select Enter these switch settings DNs To assign these DNs to DSM 32 connectors DS30 bus to DSM 16 A B b l2 3 4 5 6 A DSM1 B DSM2 top B Bottom 5 on on on on on A 221 236 A 237 252 on on on on B 237 252 B 221 236 gt on on on on A 253 268 A 269 284 on on on B 269 284 B 253 268 F on on on on A 285 300 A 301 316 on on on B 301 316 B 285 300 N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 133 Table 45 DSM 16 and DSM32 double density switch settings new system Sheet 2 of 2 A 317 332 A 333 348 B 333 348 B 317 332 A 349 364 A 365 380 B 365 380 B 349 364 A 381 396 A 397 412 B 397 412 B 381 396 The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 split you cannot use DS30 7 FEM switch settings The DIP switche
97. station media bay modules ASM ASM8 ASM8 and GASM 8 can connect to a maximum of eight analog telecommunication devices These devices are standard analog telephones cordless telephones fax machines answering machines or modems The maximum speed for a modem connection is 28 8 kbit s In addition to ASM8 features the ASM8 and GASMS offer the following features e Visual Message Waiting Indicator VMWI LED indicates to the end user that a message is waiting e Disconnect supervision Open Switch Interval OSI as per EIA TIA 464 indicates to the attached device in an established communication that the connected device should release the call see disconnect supervision note e Caller ID provides the name phone number and other information about the caller to the end user at the start of the call e Firmware downloading capability allows the system to upgrade the ASM8 and GASM8 firmware at customer sites e Enhanced ringing capability ASM8 and GASMS provide a ringing voltage of 2 REN 65 V rms per port e Calling line identification CLID e The GASMS is designated as an ONS on premise station port N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 59 Disconnect supervision note The central office disconnects the call after the ASM68 provides an open switch interval OSD to the off hook station of 850 ms TIA EIA 464 section 5 4 10 2 4 minimum is 600 ms as a disconnect signal If t
98. support staff for that distributor or reseller N0060612 31 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware The Nortel Business Communications Manager BCM system provides private network and telephony management capability to small and medium sized businesses The BCM system integrates voice and data capabilities voice over Internet protocol VoIP gateway functions and quality of service QoS data routing features into a single telephony system The BCM system is a compact system that enables you to create and provide telephony applications for use in a business environment Refer to the following sections for information on the BCM hardware components e Main units e BCM400 advanced function tray on page 37 e Base function tray component hardware on page 39 e BCM expansion unit BCM400 only on page 49 e MBM bays and backplane on page 50 e Media bay modules MBMs on page 51 e BCM400 expansion gateway on page 62 e BCM components on page 63 e Field replaceable units FRU on page 69 e Telephones and adapters on page 72 Note Some of the components described in this document are not available in all areas gt Ask your Nortel sales agent for information about availability Main units The primary hardware component in the BCM system is the main unit e BCM200 main unit see BCM200 main unit e BCM400 main unit see BCM400 main unit on page
99. system continues to operate normally during the disk mirroring process However because disk mirroring occupies computing resources Nortel recommends that you perform disk mirroring during a period of low call traffic Nortel recommends that you perform any system reboot only as required and at the beginning of the disk mirroring process BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 256 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk Note If this is the first time installation of the RAID upgrade both Primary and Mirror status LEDs are green N0060612 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 257 Replacing a RAID configuration hard disk Use this procedure to replace a faulty disk in an existing RAID configuration To replace a RAID configuration hard disk 1 If you still have access to Element Manager monitor the RAID hard disk activity status Diagnose hard disk fault conditions and perform maintenance activities if required For further information refer to RAID disk mirroring on page 221 Determine if any of the RAID hard disks require replacement If you determine a RAID disk is faulty continue to step 3 If you determine no fault exists in the hard disks you do not need to replace a hard disk Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power source Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a ground
100. system after you install the new MSC 10 11 12 13 14 Disconnect the BCM system from the wall power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Install the processor expansion cards PEC IIs in the MSC Refer to the procedure Installing a processor expansion card PEC on page 314 Position the MSC in the correct PCI riser card connector Push the card firmly and fully into the PCI riser card connector Ensure the lanclet tab on the MSC PCI bracket aligns correctly with the lanclet slot on the base function tray Install the two mounting screws at the rear of the MSC see Figure 164 Position the PCI cover plate on the front of the base function tray so that the base function tray and cover plate screw holes align Position the PCI cover plate locking screw in the PCI cover plate Tighten the PCI cover plate locking screw until the plate is firmly set in place see Figure 163 Install the base function tray bezel See To install the base function tray bezel on page 238 Partially install the base function tray in the main unit Connect the DS30 connectors to the MSC Install the base function tray completely into the main unit Be careful not to crimp the DS30 cables see To install the base function tray on page 236 Insert all connectors in the correct locations on the base function tray face Restore the BCM system to operation Fo
101. the audible alarm sounds continuously for 15 seconds After the 15 second period the beep alarm sounds in accordance to the beep timing setting Figure 103 Disk mirror settings screen Task Navigation Panel Disk Mirroring Configuration Administration Settings General EH System Status Operation mode Mirror Mode LED Status QoS Monitor Beep on drive failure Every 30 seconds UPS Status NTP Metrics Interface Metrics Test Beep Disk Mirroring QoS Metrics Telephony Metrics Status i Operational status Drives are identical i ia Backup and Restore HHE Logs l l EHT Software Management Primary disk status Mirror disk status Rebuild status fidle Table 80 Setting field descriptions and actions Settings field description Perform the activity Operation Mode Options available are Nortel recommends that you select Mirror mode from the Primary Only Mirror Only or Mirror Mode drop down menu default value You can disable the mirroring function and operate from either the primary master or the mirror master drive only Use this option to isolate drive problems Beep on drive failure Options available Select the beep timing interval for alarm notification are disabled continuously Every 5 On some systems if the RAID card fails the audible alarm seconds or Every 30 seconds default sounds continuously for 15 seconds After the
102. the bezel below and between the base function tray latches Lift the bezel until the bezel clips line up with the corresponding base function tray bezel holes 6 Tilt the bezel forward then push the bottom of the bezel into the base function tray to engage the bezel clips 7 Push on the face of the bezel so that it rests flush with the face of the base function tray 8 Install the base function tray bezel screws See Figure 109 Figure 109 Install the base function tray bezel BI I er bezel against base i 2 unten tray A Install bezel screws u d Insert bezel clips into Position bezel between base function tray und latches and move upward 9 Ifrequired install the base function tray in the main unit Refer to To install the base function tray on page 236 Advanced function tray maintenance procedures This procedure applies only to the BCM400 system This procedure describes how to remove and install the advanced function tray in the main unit Use this procedure for maintenance purposes The advanced function tray houses the hard disk or RAID components for the BCM400 system see Figure 110 For further information also see BCM400 advanced function tray on page 37 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 240 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades Figure 110 Advanced function tray a Hard disk a Hard cage ee Advanced functio
103. the date and time settings To configure DHCP server settings To configure IP Phones on page 200 To configure SNMP settings on page 201 To configure SNMP community strings on page 202 To configure the SNMP manager list on page 202 To create user accounts on page 203 To enter a name for your system 1 2 3 From the Configuration tab click the System folder to expand it Select Identification from the System folder Enter a name for your system in the System name field To configure the date and time settings 1 2 From the Configuration tab click the System folder to expand it Select Date and Time The Date and Time panel opens N0060612 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 199 3 Configure the Date and Time attributes see Table 69 Table 69 Date and Time attributes Attribute Description Date and Time source Set to NTP if the system uses a network server to determine the correct time and date Set to Trunk if you want to receive time and date settings from PSTN if available Set to Manual if you want to be able to manually configure the time and date for your system NTP server If Date and Time source is set to NTP then enter an address for the server Date and time Use the drop down calendar to select the correct date and time Time zone Select the time zone for this system To config
104. the offset Because each DS30 bus has four lines per offset you can assign a maximum of four CTMs to a single DS30 bus by making the offset switch settings different for each MBM You can also combine three CTMs with the trunk part of the 4x16 on the same DS30 bus CTMS The CTM8 provides connections for eight analog calling line identification CLID PSTN lines Each line uses one voice line Because each DS30 bus has four lines per offset you require two offsets You can assign a maximum of two CTM8s to a DS30 bus by making the offset switch settings different for each MBM You can also combine a CTM8 with a 4x16 on the same DS30 number When you choose an offset number for the CTM8 the system automatically adds the next offset number You cannot assign offset 3 to the CTM8 because this does not allow the MBM to assign the second set of lines You can also mix the two MBMs For instance if you have two existing CTM MBMs with offset 0 and 1 you can add a CTM8 on offset 2 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 124 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM Table 35 shows the switch settings for each DS30 number and the resulting line assignments for CTMs and CTM8s Table 35 CTM4 and CTM8 switch settings Select Select Enter these switch settings To assign To assign these lines DS30 offset the
105. tie wrap from the power supply support bracket Place the power supply in a safe static free location Installing a BCM400 standard power supply Use this procedure to install a functional standard power supply in a BCM400 main unit The base function and advanced function trays must be partially removed Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge 5 Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Warning Power supply cable management is critical Loose or incorrectly positioned 4 f cables can result in cable damage To install a BCM400 standard power supply 1 Ensure the new power supply is an auto adjust power supply Insert a tie wrap in the power supply support bracket lanclet Place the standard power supply top down on a flat surface Place the power supply support bracket on the bottom surface of the power supply 4 Gather together and route the main card 20 pin power cable P1 and the 12v power cable P9 at the tie wrap N0060612 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 285 5 Secure the power cables to the power supply support bracket with the tie wrap inserted in step 2 see Figure 144 Figure 144 Fasten the power supply support bracket cables Gather and route the power La A Inserta tie wrap in cables at the tie wrap C the power supply supp
106. to the following sections for procedures on mounting an expansion unit e Installing the main unit in an equipment rack on page 92 e Installing the main unit on the wall on page 96 e Installing the main unit on a flat surface on page 98 Caution When installing the BCM expansion unit in a rack do not stack units directly on top of one another Fasten each unit to the rack with the separate mounting brackets N0060612 Chapter 7 Installing an expansion unit 103 Connecting the BCM expansion unit to the BCM main unit After the expansion unit is installed in the desired location use the supplied DS256 cable NTAB3086 to connect it to the BCM main unit The cable has the following characteristics e all 8 pins must be connected as shown in Table 24 and Figure 60 e the cable must be shielded e the cable must be exactly 5 m long Table 24 DS256 cable pinout Expansion unit Main unit Signal name PIN PIN Circuit name Color TXD 1 1 PAIR 3 White Green TXD 2 2 PAIR 3 Green SYNC 3 3 PAIR 2 White Orange CLK 4 4 PAIR 1 Blue CLK 5 5 PAIR 1 White Blue SYNC 6 6 PAIR 2 Orange RXD 7 7 PAIR 4 White Brown RXD 8 8 PAIR 4 Brown Figure 60 DS256 cable Warning The timing in the BCM system is critical Use the correct length cable as A supplied with the expansion unit The system will not work properly if you conn
107. use Table 49 Table 48 provides the wiring scheme for the DSM16 4x16 and DSM32 MBMs The sets heading indicates the set numbering for each of the amphenol pairs Set DNs are allocated by the BCM system based on the DS30 bus setting on the station MBM BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 146 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables Table 48 DSM wiring chart Wiring for DSM 16 16 4x16 DSM 32 32 25 pair connector DSM 32 The second 25 pair connector is wired in the same sequence as the first one 1 Single connector or bottom connector on DSM 32 32 modules 2 Upper connector on DSM 32 32 modules Pin Wire color Port Set 2Set 26 White Blue X01 1 17 1 Blue White X01 1 17 27 White Orange X02 2 18 2 Orange White X02 2 18 28 White Green X03 3 19 3 Green White X03 3 19 29 White Brown X04 4 20 4 Brown White X04 4 20 30 White Slate X05 5 21 5 Slate White X05 5 21 31 Red Blue X06 6 22 6 Blue Red X06 6 22 32 Red Orange X07 7 23 7 Orange Red X07 7 23 33 Red Green X08 8 24 8 Green Red X08 8 24 34 Red Brown X09 9 25 9 Brown Red X09 9 25 35 Red Slate X10 10 26 10 Slate Red X10 10 26 36 Black Blue X11 11 27 11 Blue Black X11 11 27 37 Black Orange X12 12 28 12 Orange Black X12 12 28 38 Black Green X13 13 29 13 Green Black X13 13 29 39 Black Brown X14 14
108. v v v v v Caribbean v v v v v Denmark v N0060612 Appendix G Market profile attributes 353 Table 94 Norstar trunk cartridge availability by market profile Sheet 2 of 2 Analog Country specific Market profile BRI S T 2 4 BRI U2 4 Analog DID Analog E amp M CLID analog trunk card France v v v Germany Global Holland Hong Kong Italy Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan SENN SN NESSES SI SI SI SI SS lt S lt United Kingdom Time zones and language information This section provides information about time and date format and language support for Central America and South America Time and date format based on language Time zones are based on the actual time zone where the BCM system is located You can choose a compatible time zone from the Time Zone list in Element Manager If your exact location is not on the list choose the location with the time zone closest to you Note that some time zones are individualized because they do not switch from Standard Time to Daylight Saving Time for example Saskatchewan BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 354 Appendix G Market profile attributes The format of the time and date changes are based on the prime language of the market profile Table 95 provid
109. when you choose the side on which to install the bracket 7 Fasten the wall mount brackets securely to the BCM main unit using the screws provided Refer to Figure 57 or Figure 58 Caution Use only the screws supplied with the wall mount bracket kit NTAB3422 Do not replace the screws Other screws can damage the unit BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 98 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit Figure 57 Attach the wall mount brackets to the BCM200 main unit amp Install wall mount bracket screws amp Install wall mount bracket screws 8 Hang the BCM main unit on the backboard screws Make sure the main unit is level Ensure the wood screw heads seat fully into the wall mount bracket slots 9 Tighten the wood screws against the wall mount bracket Installing the main unit on a flat surface Use this procedure to install the BCM main unit on any flat surface that can safely support the weight of the unit Caution Refer to Environmental requirements on page 87 for acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM main unit N0060612 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit 99 Caution Do not place anything directly on top of the BCM main unit or expansion unit To install the BCM main unit on a table or shelf 1 Attach four rubber feet to the corners on the bottom of the main unit Position the mai
110. 0 2 oar O N 7 Inthe Subnet Mask field enter the subnet mask of the BCM system if using the default enter 255 255 255 0 8 Click OK 9 Click OK Your computer is now configured to connect to the BCM system Connecting through the serial port You can also connect to the BCM system through the serial port using a null modem cable You can then change the IP address of the BCM system and perform other basic configuration tasks You can use Element Manager to perform more detailed configuration of your system You must use a null modem cable connection to the BCM main unit if the default IP address is not compatible with your LAN or WAN network Required equipment e null modem cable e VT100 compatible terminal or a computer that has a terminal program such as Hyperterminal Warning Your terminal must be VT100 compatible and must support the VT 100 National Character set If the terminal does not support the National Character set the text displays incorrectly You can enable or disable the serial port through Element Manager This functionality is helpful for diagnostics and to make the system more secure By default the serial port is enabled BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 180 Chapter 13 Initializing the system Null modem cable setup Table 63 and Figure 91 show the correct wiring for the BCM serial port of the null modem cable Table 63 Serial port pinout 1 Data Carrier Detec
111. 00 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 164 Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals Table 62 Cross referencing ports and DNs on a new version 3 0 or newer system DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 bus 02 bus 03 bus 04 bus 05 bus 06 bus 07 Pins Port DNs DNs DNs DNs DNs DNs 26 1 X01 221 253 285 317 349 381 27 2 X02 222 254 286 318 350 382 28 3 X03 223 255 287 319 351 383 29 4 X04 224 256 288 320 352 384 30 5 X05 225 257 289 321 353 385 31 6 X06 226 258 290 322 354 386 32 7 X07 227 259 291 323 355 387 33 8 X08 228 260 292 324 356 388 34 9 X09 229 261 293 325 357 389 35 10 X10 230 262 294 326 358 390 36 11 X11 231 263 295 327 359 391 87 12 X12 232 264 296 328 360 392 38 13 X13 233 265 297 329 361 393 39 14 X14 234 266 298 330 362 394 40 15 X15 235 267 299 331 363 395 41 16 X16 236 268 300 332 364 396 Second level DNs DS 30 bus set to Double Density Pins Port DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 bus 02 bus 03 bus 04 bus 05 bus 06 bus 07 DNs DNs DNs DNs DNs DNs 26 1 X17 237 269 301 333 365 397 27 2 X18 238 270 302 334 366 398 28 3 X19 239 271 303 335 367 399 29 4 X20 240 272 304 336 368 400 30 5 X21 241 273 305 337 369 401 31 6 X22 242 274 306 338 370 402 32 7 X23 243 275
112. 00 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 212 Chapter 18 Completing the initial installation optional After the basic configuration is completed you can further customize your system by using the following configuration options e Configuring the media bay module e Configuring modem settings on page 213 e Checking for software updates on page 213 e Configuring voice mail on page 213 e Customizing security policies on page 213 e Performing a backup on page 214 Configuring the media bay module For information on installing a media bay module MBM and setting the DIP switches refer to Installing a media bay module MBM on page 105 You can also refer to Connecting the BCM expansion unit to the BCM main unit on page 103 for more details on connecting the cables between the main unit and expansion unit To configure the MBM 1 Open BCM Element Manager and connect to your BCM system 2 From the Configuration tab click the Resources folder to expand it 3 From the Resources folder select Telephony Resources see Figure 98 Figure 98 Telephony Resources page Task Navigation Panel Telephony Resources Configuration Administration o Welcome 3 09 System os pone late bee pae poes Low E Administrator Access E Resources Application Resources Media Gateways NJA Port Ranges fay elephony Resources Trunk Mod ad Bi ae Re ai Network Interfaces Stn
113. 00 eee eee eee nn 64 Power supply adapter cord international users 22222220 66 Uninterruptable power SUpply is cscc ceed ca ea ewe aka 66 Hardiidiek ars pear 220 1 re dots ih sae ee mene 66 PAD Upgrade Re Sieh e Peewee FREER EAR OSS Ee aREs eH 67 COMMIT are a henner Er Eure eR te WEN 68 Field replaceable unite FRU ccccisccc cated taste aan 69 T lephones and Allapletz wc wake rasant 72 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM system LEDs 000 ce eee e eens 77 Base function tray system status display LEDs 0 000 e eee eee 77 Modia bay module LEDS unse ie ar brkhauehndagn 79 DTM LEDS 2400 ea ee EES a 80 BRINI CEOS as poke earth 82 Chapter 4 instalation Overview sauna anna na ed neeessdastseadeus 83 Chapter 5 Checking the installation prerequisites 00e eee eee 87 General TeqQuirements 34 24 Be es di de ees 87 Environmental requirements 22H 00 ann nennen nennen 87 Electrical requirements uu 0ur 00 anne 88 Site telephony wiring requirements 2 22 2un sense nennen eee 88 Binal DO stein 88 PAIGE BOB en leise 89 System equipment supplies and tools 0 ccc ees 89 Basic H arcnarle acc ccnetcan tienen dade esak roret rta ceded obmeee oan 4 89 Oplictial BAUIEMBRE ryter 044000000 068058654864 tere 89 Other hardware and 00le as dona seskadeeh ened oE a AEE eee gedes 90 Chapter 6 Installing the BOM main unit 260202 co ces ce eees cease sceseende MR 91 LUnpackmo he MA
114. 00 main unit the hard disk assembly installs at the rear of the main unit For the BCM400 main unit the hard disk assembly installs in the advanced function tray Use the procedures described in this chapter under the following conditions e if you need to replace an existing hard disk in a standard configuration e if you need to upgrade to a RAID configuration e if you need to replace a hard disk in a RAID configuration e if you need to replace a RAID card Remember to take suitable precautions when working inside the BCM system Maintain a clean and static safe site Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the BCM main unit Read and follow installation instructions carefully Caution Use only Nortel approved replacement components Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 254 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk Note Maintain a current backup of your system When you replace the hard disk you need to restore the BCM system programming from the backup using the backup and restore utility BRU If you do not have a current backup you must reenter configuration data For further information on how to perform a backup or restore refer to the BCM 4 0 Administration Guide Caution Do not use an electric or magnetized screwdriver n
115. 060612 Chapter 21 Replacing a media bay module 249 Chapter 21 Replacing a media bay module This chapter describes the procedure for replacing a media bay module MBM Figure 118 provides an overview of the process for replacing MBMs A Warning This section describes replacing an MBM with the same type of MBM If you want to replace an MBM with a different type of MBM you must treat it as a new installation Ensure the new MBM does not overrun any lines already assigned to other MBMs Figure 118 Overview of MBM replacement process Replacing an MBM Disconnect cables from the front of the main unit and expansion unit Set DIP switches Monitor LEDs for on new MBM power and status Remove power from both units Check the MBM settings in Element Manager Install new MBM Remove front bezel from expansion unit Replace bezel Remove MBM Restore power to main unit and expansion unit Reconnect all cables Refer to the following procedures to replace an MBM e Removing an MBM on page 250 e Installing an MBM on page 252 e Returning the system to operation on page 252 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 250 Chapter 21 Replacing a media bay module Removing an MBM Use the procedures is this section to remove one or more MBMs
116. 10 Installing telephones and peripherals T7406 cordless telephones use the DNs for the ports on the station module that is connected to the base station They are digital sets and use M7310 T7316 as an operational model Moving telephones You can move a BCM digital telephone to a new location within the system without losing its programmed settings if the telephone has been enabled with Set relocation automatic telephone relocation When you enable Set relocation the internal numbers auto dial settings and personal speed dial codes remain with the telephone when you disconnect the telephone If you connect a different telephone to the jack before you reconnect the moved telephone the new telephone takes the programmed settings The BCM system can no longer identify the old telephone After you plug a moved set into a new jack the BCM system can take 45 seconds to identify the telephone Programming relocation takes 3 minutes to complete Wait for this to occur before you change any settings for the telephone in the system Warning If you disconnect a relocated telephone before the relocation programming is IN complete the telephone can lose the programmed settings Note Automatic telephone relocation is disabled by default For IP telephones to retain DN specific features the Keep DN Alive setting for the telephone programming must be selected N0060612 167 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal
117. 111 Understanding DS30 numbers A DS30 bus is a block of virtual pathways on the media services card MSC On a default system six buses of DS30 channel blocks can be assigned to MBMs The block to which the MBM is assigned determines the range of line trunk numbers or extension numbers DNs that can be allocated by the MBM to the equipment connected to that MBM The other two blocks are permanently routed to the PEC digital signal processors DSPs to support internal BCM functions such as voice mail VoIP trunks IVR and IP telephony functions This configuration is called a 2 6 bus split You can change the DS30 allocation to a 3 5 split to accommodate increased IP telephony or VoIP trunk requirements You do this by assigning bus 7 to the voice data sector This choice should be made at system startup but a default system can be changed through Element Manager to a 3 5 split after startup if IP requirements increase You indicate the split you want when you configure the system Warning If you change the bus split from 3 5 to 2 6 after your system is configured you will lose all the data and optional application connections Figure 64 shows a model of how the MSC DS30 buses are a subgroup of the DS256 bus on the MSC The diagram also shows the offset channels which are a subgroup of the buses BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 110 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM Figure 64 DS30 model
118. 12 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 157 To connect the BCM system to the WAN 1 Ensure the system is powered up before connecting this cable 2 Do one of the following e To connect the WAN card using the RJ 48C connector insert the wide area network WAN cable into the RJ 48C jack on the WAN card see Figure 79 on page 156 e To connect the WAN card using the DB26 connector use an adapter cable to connect the wide area network WAN cable to the DB26 connector on the WAN card These adapter cables are available from your BCM supplier see Figure 79 on page 156 Table 57 shows the wire connections for a DB26 adapter cable Table 57 DB26 adapter cable 1 Chassis Ground 1 14 14 2 Transmit Data 2 15 Transmit Clock 15 3 Receive Data 3 16 16 4 Request to Send 4 17 Receive Clock 17 5 Clear to Send 5 18 18 6 Data Set Ready 6 19 19 7 Signal Ground 7 20 Data Terminal Ready 20 Common Return Data Carrier Detect 8 21 21 9 22 22 10 10 23 23 11 11 24 External Clock 24 12 12 25 25 13 13 26 To connect the modem 1 Ensure the system is powered up before connecting this cable 2 Insert a PSTN line into the line jack on the modem interface see Figure 79 on page 156 Table 58 shows the wire connections for a RS 422 EIA 530 cable Table 58 RS 422 EIA 530 adapter cable Sheet 1 of 2 1 Protective Ground 1 14 Transmit Data B 14 2
119. 2 3 Read and understand all instructions Follow the instructions marked on the product Unplug this product or host equipment from the wall outlet before cleaning Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a damp cloth for cleaning Do not use this product near water for example near a bath tub wash bowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do not place this product on an unstable cart stand or table The product may fall causing serious damage to the product This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register This product should not be placed in a built in installation unless proper ventilation is provided Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble this product but have it sent to a qualified service person when some service or repair work is required BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 20 Regulatory information 11 Unplug this product or host equipment from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions a b When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed If the
120. 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 0005 229 PIERALIONE Ladue tal eee eee ba cutlets Se ied rs bed 229 Specials riss 231 Performing a system SAMMOWN icc ede ewe eee chee Reba a ees 231 Restarting the system after maintenance 00 0c eee eee ees 232 Base function tray maintenance procedures 0 cece eee eee eee 233 Removing the base function tray 000 0 nennen ees 234 Advanced function tray maintenance procedures 00 eee eee eee 239 Removing and installing the main unit top cover 0 c eee ee eee 244 Removing the main unit top COVE a buaie nares caus 244 Installing the main unit top Cover 0 00 eee 246 Using the backup and restore utility 00 2 eee 248 Chapter 21 Replacing a media bay module 00cc cece eee nn nen 249 Removing an MBM u 500000 Renee ae dee eines 250 metalng an MBM zur sun een sn 252 Returning the system to operation aasa eee nennen nenn 252 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 2 2 52 04 0400 esis HE a 253 installing a RAID system sus ea 255 Replacing a RAID configuration hard disk 0000 0c eee eee ees 257 Removing a hard disk Cage ss6 544504560408 rare 258 Removing a hard disk cage from a BCM200 main unit 2222er 258 Removing a hard disk cage from a BCM400 advanced function tray 260 N0060612 Contents 15 lnstalling a Baden 261 Installing
121. 307 339 371 403 33 8 X24 244 276 308 340 372 404 34 9 X25 245 277 309 341 373 405 35 10 X26 246 278 310 342 374 406 36 11 X27 247 279 311 343 375 407 37 12 X28 248 280 312 344 376 408 38 13 X29 249 281 313 345 377 409 39 14 X30 250 282 314 346 378 410 40 15 X31 251 283 315 347 379 411 41 16 X32 252 284 316 348 380 412 For each port substitute the X for the DS30 bus number Example Port X01 on DS30 bus 02 is port 0201 N0060612 Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals 165 Installing an emergency telephone You can use the emergency telephone to make calls when there is no power to the BCM system To install an emergency telephone on the BCM system connect a single line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM GATM When you make a call from the emergency telephone the auxiliary port uses the telephone line connected to the line 1 port of the CTM GATM Tip You can connect an emergency telephone to every CTM installed on your BCM system To install the emergency telephone 1 Connect a single line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM 2 Connect an analog PSTN line cable to the line 1 port of the CTM Installing IP Phones The system can be set to automatically assign DNs to the Nortel IP Phones If you choose to manually assign DNs choose DNs from unused DNs in the digital range However port numbers are assigned from DS30 01 ports 0101 0132 first then f
122. 314 Port 414 Port 514 Port 614 Port 714 40 Black Slate DN DN DN DN DN DN 15 Slate Black Port 215 Port 315 Port 415 Port 515 Port 615 Port 715 41 Yellow Blue DN DN DN DN DN DN 16 Blue Yellow Port 216 Port 316 Port 416 Port 516 Port 616 Port 716 MBM combinations This section describes some combinations of trunk and station MBMs to demonstrate how to fit the MBMs into the DS30 resources These configurations are meant to help demonstrate how your system can be configured using the information in this guide and do not necessarily reflect real life configurations N0060612 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 151 Combining CTMs GATMs and 4x16s The 4x16 combination MBM is a combination of a CTM4 and a DSM16 A maximum of four CTM4s GATM4s can fit into a DS30 bus when each is given a different offset Therefore you can combine a maximum of three CTM4s GATM4s with a 4x16 MBM This configuration would occupy two full DS30 buses You can install a maximum of three of the above combinations in a BCM system with an expansion unit added to it Table 52 demonstrates this configuration of CTMs and 4x16 MBMs including the switch settings for each MBM Table 52 CTMs GATMs combined with 4x16 MBMs Each heavily outlined and shaded square represents one module Switch setting 2 4 1 DS30 4x16s CTM4s GATM4s CTM8 GATM8 offset 3 offset 0 1 and 2 offset 2 12 3 4 5 6
123. 319 e To install a new clock calendar battery on page 321 N0060612 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 319 The clock calendar battery supplies the power required to keep the CMOS information current if there is a power failure Figure 174 provides an overview of the process of replacing this component Warning You must replace the battery with a CR2032 3v Maxell coin cell battery Do A not use any other manufacturer because this may invalidate the safety approval of the BCM main unit and possibly cause a fire or explosion Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge gt Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Figure 174 Battery replacement overview Do a software shutdown Set up unit for Install maintenance new battery WARNING faces up CAREFULLY lift battery off motherboard Restore unit to operation Danger Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before AN opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully To remove the clock calendar battery Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free con
124. 32 Replacing memory This section describes how to remove and install the random access memory card This section contains the following procedures e Removing the dual in line memory module DIMM card on page 316 e To install a DIMM card on page 318 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 316 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware The BCM system is equipped with 256 MB of random access memory RAM The memory resides on a dual in line memory module DIMM on the main card The main card contains space to add a second DIMM or you can upgrade the existing DIMM Figure 172 provides an overview of the process for replacing or adding memory chips Figure 172 Memory replacement overview Do a software shutdown Install a new DIMM Remove the base Restore unit to operation function tray Test system Set up unit for maintenance Pull DIMM off motherboard Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the p Danger Risk of shock computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Caution Use only a Nortel approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts Increasing the amount of memory To increase the amount of memory in the system you can e add another DIMM to the second DIMM slo
125. 6 if your system is set to a 3 5 split Refer to DDIM switch settings on page 122 If you chose a 3 5 bus split for your system DS30 7 cannot be used by any MBM For MBMs that require two buses this means that you cannot set the DIP switches to DS30 6 for those MBMs because the second level of lines falls into DS30 7 which is not accessible see Figure 68 on page 115 Refer to Understanding DS30 numbers on page 109 for more information about 2 6 and 3 5 DS30 bus splits DSM32 MBMs require two DS30 numbers When you assign the first DS30 number to a DSM32 the MBM automatically adds the next DS30 number For example if you assign DS30 2 to a DSM32 it uses DS30 2 and 03 However you cannot choose DS30 7 for the DSM32 because the second level of DSM lines would not be accessible The same applies to DS30 6 if your system is set to a 3 5 split Refer to DSM switch settings on page 130 DSM 32 MBMs can be set to either single or double density When they are set to double density the MBM only requires one DS30 bus The DIP switches on the 4x16 are used to set the DS30 designation and offset for the CTM part of the MBM The MBM automatically assigns the first half of the next bus for the 16 DSM lines However you cannot choose DS30 7 for the 4x16 because the DSM lines would not be accessible The same applies to DS30 6 if your system is set to a 3 5 split Refer to 4x16 switch settings on page 126 The CTM8 uses two of
126. 612 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 143 Figure 77 shows the wiring pin out for a BRIM S T to the service provider This diagram also applies to an S Loop BRI and is capable of having S Loop devices connected to it video phones terminal adapters group 3 fax machines The T setting on the BRI Loop is used when connected to the CO or PSTN Warning The BRIM S T must only be connected to an NT1 provided by the service L f provider The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV to Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV barrier Figure 77 BRIM S T RJ 45 wiring array BRIM S T connector Pin connection System side 1 not used 2 not used 3 Rx Tx RJ 45 jacks 4 Tx Rx 5 Tx Rx 12345678 6 Rx Tx 7 not used 8 not used 3 Insert the connector into the jack on the MBM Refer to the BCM 4 0 Administration Guide for steps about changing the default settings for each line or loop 4 You can now use Element Manager to configure the lines or sets associated with the MBM see the BCM 4 0 Administration Guide To connect the GATM 1 On the front of the MBM locate the amphenol connector 2 Wire one end of the cable to the demarcation blocks of the building BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 144 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables Figure 78 on page 144 shows the wiring pin outs fora GATM to connect to a service provider Fi
127. 80 e BRIM LEDs on page 82 DTM LEDs The DTM has additional LEDs that are not on most other MBMs Figure 47 shows the location of the DTM LEDs N0060612 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM system LEDs 81 Figure 47 DTM LEDs a O Ga 58 qo EE Power LED Status LED In service LED Loopback test LED Receive LEDs Transmit LEDs Table 21 describes the functions of the DTM LEDs Table 21 DTM LED functions LED Status Descriptions Power Refer to Media bay module LEDs for details Status Refer to Media bay module LEDs for details In service Flashing The T1 ETSI or PRI trunks are out of service because a loopback test is running or the DTM is initializing Loopback test On A continuity loopback test is running Receive alarm On A problem with the received digital transmission This half duplex link does not work Receive error On A small error as a result of degraded digital transmission Possible causes are an ohmic connection water ingress or too long a loop Transmit alarm On The DTM cannot transmit The DTM sends an alarm indication signal AIS to the terminating switch This half duplex link does not work Transmit error On The DTM is sending a remote alarm indication RAI carrier failure alarm CFA to the terminating switch If the transmit alarm is not on this error indicates a far end or cable problem All LEDs F
128. AID LEDs Use this procedure to determine the current operational state of the RAID hard disks and disk mirroring operation see Figure 102 The RAID status LEDs are visible only for systems equipped with the RAID configuration Three LEDs are located on the bezel face of the BCM400 advanced function tray or on the hard disk access panel at the rear of the BCM200 main unit The RAID LEDs indicate monitoring of the following e Primary master hard disk activity e Mirror hard disk activity e RAID disk mirroring status activity Figure 102 Advanced function tray RAID status LEDs Q Alarm Reset N ORT E L Primary Mirror Status BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 220 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting To determine RAID status 1 Examine the Primary and Mirror LEDs on the BCM400 advanced function tray faceplate Alternatively examine the hard disk cover access panel on the rear of the BCM200 Use Table 78 to interpret the operational state of the RAID primary master and mirror master hard disks and perform any associated maintenance action if required Table 78 Primary Mirror master hard disk LED description Primary Mirror LED color Description Maintenance action Solid Green Drive installed and initialized on the Normal operation no maintenance current channel required Flashing Orange Indicates disk activity Normal disk mirror function no maintenanc
129. ATED DOCUMENTATION TO NORTEL NETWORKS THROUGH A NORTEL NETWORKS AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR WITHIN FIVE 5 DAYS OF YOUR ACQUISITION OF Subject to the terms hereinafter set forth NORTEL NETWORKS grants to CUSTOMER and or its representatives with a need to know a personal non exclusive license 1 to use the licensed software proprietary to NORTEL NETWORKS or its suppliers and 2 to use the associated documentation CUSTOMER is granted no title or ownership rights in or to the licensed software in whole or in part and CUSTOMER acknowledges that title to and all copyrights patents trade secrets and or any other intellectual property rights to and in all such licensed software and associated documentation are and shall remain the property of NORTEL NETWORKS and or NORTEL NETWORKS suppliers The right to use licensed software may be restricted by a measure of usage of applications based upon number of lines number of ports number of terminal numbers assigned number of users or some similar measure Expansion beyond the specified usage level may require payment of an incremental charge or another license fee NORTEL NETWORKS considers the licensed software to contain trade secrets of NORTEL NETWORKS and or its suppliers Such trade secrets include without limitation thereto the specific design structure and logic of individual licensed software programs their interactions with other portions of licensed software both internal
130. Canada designation identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 18 Regulatory information Federal Communications Commission FCC Notice FCC registration number This telephone equipment complies with Part 68 Rules and Regulations of the FCC for connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network Your connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network must comply with these FCC rules e Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations See installation instructions for details e Use only an FCC Part 68 compliant Universal Service Order Code USOC network interface jack as specified in the installation instructions to connect to the Public Switched Telephone Network e Ifthe equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discon
131. Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Table 13 Chassis field replaceable units Component description FRU description Installation procedure Base function tray Base function tray component hardware on page 39 To install the base function tray on page 236 Wall mount kit N A Installing the main unit on the wall on page 96 BCM field redundancy upgrade kit BCM400 main unit on page 34 Upgrading to a redundant power supply on page 286 Replacing the hard disk on page 253 Replacing or installing a cooling fan on page 323 Table 14 Hard drive field replaceable units Component description FRU description Installation procedure BCM hard disk programmed 20GB Hard disk on page 66 Replacing the hard disk on page 253 BCM RAID upgrade kit RAID upgrade kit on page 67 Replacing the hard disk on page 253 BCM replacement blank hard drive Hard disk on page 66 Replacing the hard disk on page 253 Table 15 Power supply field replaceable units Component description FRU description Installation procedure BCM uninterruptable power supply BCM power supply on page 63 Replacing a standard power supply on page 275 BCM400 redundant power supply module single BCM400 redundant power supply on page 64 Upgrading to a redund
132. DE ribbon cable N ae Connect the primary hard disk IDE ribbon cable to the primary hard disk Mirror hard disk IDE ribbon cable Note Do not unfold the hard disk IDE ribbon cables Installing a mirror hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage Use this procedure to install the mirror hard disk into the RAID hard disk cage for the BCM200 and BCM400 systems Use this procedure if you need to replace a faulty mirror hard disk Nortel recommends that you replace a failed mirror hard disk to retain full redundancy Replace the failed mirror hard disk during a period of low call traffic If you choose to remove both the primary and mirror hard disks from the hard disk cage place an identifying mark on the primary hard disk to ensure correct installation Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Note For a RAID upgrade kit the mirror disk and primary disk IDE ribbon cables are preinstalled If applicable install the programmed hard disk from your single disk system into the RAID hard disk cage use as the primary disk see Figure 131 Note For a BCM200 system orient the hard disk so that the power and IDE connectors are on the bottom and opposite to the hard disk cage lift tab see Figure 130 For a BCM400 system orient the hard disk so that the p
133. DIP switch settings Affix the label to the front of the MBM as a quick reference during maintenance activities Assigning line and extension numbers The switch settings on the MBM determine the line numbers and extension numbers the MBMs use The tables in this section show the correspondence between DS30 numbers switch settings and the line and extension numbers for each type of MBM The DS30 number and switch settings correspond with Table 28 DTM switch settings Although DTMs have more than 16 lines they occupy only one DS30 bus per DTM Table 30 shows the switch settings for each DS30 bus and the resulting line assignments Table 30 DTM switch settings T1 Select Enter these switch settings 10 Select Enter theae switen 5 assign settings To assign DS30 DS30 A bus 1 2 3 4 5 6 these these lines lines 2 on on on on on on 211 234 121 144 3 on on on on on 181 204 6 91 114 4 on on on on on 151 174 61 84 If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 split DS30 bus 7 is not available Table 31 shows the switch settings for each DS30 bus and the resulting line assignments Table 31 DTM switch settings North American PRI Enter these switch settings To Enter these switch settings Select assian Select Toassign pssi I ns DS30 these bus ines lines 2 on on on on on on 211 233 121 143 3 on on on o
134. DSM16 DSM32 e Illo oMi e M E S Je Power Status Power Status RJ 21 connector RJ 21 connectors 1 25 26 50 RJ 21 pin out Table 91 lists the wiring details for the RJ 21 connectors on the DSM16 and DSM32 Table 91 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 1 of 2 Set Pin Connection Wire color 1 26 Tip White Blue 1 Ring Blue White 2 27 Tip White Orange 2 Ring Orange White 3 28 Tip White Green 3 Ring Green White 4 29 Tip White Brown 4 Ring Brown White 5 30 Tip White Slate 5 Ring Slate White BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 348 Appendix E DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts Table 91 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 2 of 2 Set Pin Connection Wire color 6 31 Tip Red Blue 6 Ring Blue Red 7 32 Tip Red Orange 7 Ring Orange Red 8 33 Tip Red Green 8 Ring Green Red 9 34 Tip Red Brown 9 Ring Brown Red 10 35 Tip Red Slate 10 Ring Slate Red 11 36 Tip Black Blue 11 Ring Blue Black 12 37 Tip Black Orange 12 Ring Orange Black 13 38 Tip Black Green 13 Ring Green Black 14 39 Tip Black Brown 14 Ring Brown Black 15 40 Tip Black Slate 15 Ring Slate Black 16 41 Tip Yellow Blue 16 Ring Blue Yellow 42 No connection Yellow Orange 17 No connection Orange Yellow 50 No connection Violet Slate
135. FO The redundant power supply consists of two power supply modules and a power supply unit see Figure 39 and Figure 40 The power supply modules are interchangeable and can be exchanged one at a time during power on conditions N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 65 Figure 39 BCM400 redundant power supply and modules a gee Power supply module ue inserted in the NER Power supply module lt removed from the redundant 6 power supply unit ia lt 2 redundant power supply unit Figure 40 BCM400 redundant power supply connectors Connector Configuration for Cable Lengths and Purpose and Notes Redundant Sparkle Power Supply Markings Route to Media bay backplane 1 Tie any slack at 550mm P2 the connector behind the MBM Route to Media bay backplane 2 Tie any slack at 550mm P3 the connector behind the MBM 325mm toifirst To hard disk Tie any slack at the power supply P4 50mm to Tuck any loose connectors under the hard disk next P5 100mm to last P6 total 475mm 340mm to first Unused Tie to the center of the hard disk cage P7 right angle 150mm to next P8 total 490mm sa Route to the I O card 2 ef 515mm P1 Route to the I O card 515mm P9 Route to the I O card al 515mm PA SS p Unused N i 300mm
136. IN UNE voces cece eeet seed ieee eer seen derpeneiesedkes 92 N0060612 Contents 11 Installing the main unit in an equipment rack 00 cee eee 92 Installing the main unit on the wall 2 00 00 cece eee 96 Installing the main unit on a flat surface 2 ee 98 Chapter 7 Installing an expansion unit 000 eee eee 101 Unpacking the expansion Uhl iciceiais deh eep u Hr a res 102 installing the expansion UNI xsadacseeescatavasdeeeegak ae a eR ROME KOs 102 Connecting the BCM expansion unit to the BCM main unit 103 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 20 ee eee e ee ees 105 Selecting MBMs for your BCM system 0000 0c cece eee eee 105 Selecting tunk MEMS 222 isiciheee den 106 Selecting station PAB WIS r o eks 2 Sek ae ee naar Su Rok Be al 108 Selecting a fiber expansion module FEM 00 0 ee eee eee 109 Determining system capacity asus as a dire ea ra 109 Understanding DS30 numbers 00 0 00 eee 109 Seting offsets rien 110 Determining bus requirements cece eee ee ees 111 Assigning DSO SEHE area 114 Choosing the assigned order for MBMS 0000 cee eee eee ee 115 Determining MBM DIP switch settings Heer ee 116 Setting MBM DIP Switches 2 ccccadencaccecseone dees RR ana 120 Assigning line and extension numbers 0000 ernennen nenn 121 DEM SoG SEINES anreisen sa 121 DDIM swilch Seflings
137. IN to another media bay module located on the same BCM system Doing this results in unpredictable behavior with both modules BCM400 expansion gateway MBMs MBMs are installed in the BCM400 expansion gateway in the same manner as in the BCM400 main unit Refer to Figure 72 on page 134 and Figure 73 on page 135 for sample MBM layouts using the expansion gateway The following rules apply when using a BCM400 expansion gateway e All stations must be on the host unit e Primary rate interface PRI PSTN trunking interfaces must be on the expansion gateway If analog modems are deployed as part of the overall customer configuration and intended to share PSTN network access with the normal voice trunks then an exception to the above rules is required In this case analog stations for example ASM8 GASM 8 or even ATAs connected to a DSM16 32 must be configured in the expansion gateway to support the modem connections only Fax machines or other analog telephones must be connected to MBMs on the host system Figure 72 BCM400 expansion gateway configuration Example 1 E i System needs E 16 analogtrunks eee DOMS2 U0 e 32 analog phones 128 digital phones BCM400 expansion gateway 10 IP Phones a ASM8 amp o ASM8 o 6 S ASM8 o CIMB_ k m U CIM8a
138. Mod No Ni Li C Telephony ASM de je u C Data Services _ Trunk Mod o iia i P ne Applications 5 Data Mod TE ii een id BRI ST4 None x11110 N A Lines 0 N A IP Trunks N A NJA amp App Sets N A Enabled Loop None 10110 NJA Lines 4 Disable Enable Details for Module 2 4 Inthe Modules section select the row of the MBM that you want to configure 5 Double click the Prog Type field to display the drop down list N0060612 Chapter 18 Completing the initial installation optional 213 6 Select the type of MBM that you installed in that location 7 Click Enable 8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 to enable each MBM in your system You can set other parameters for the MBMs depending on the type of MBM you installed Configuring modem settings Your system modem is either enabled or disabled depending on the configuration you chose during your basic configuration If you plan on using the modem for management tasks you can customize its settings including dial in and dial out settings depending on your specific needs Refer to the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide for information on configuring the modem Checking for software updates Nortel frequently updates the BCM software Therefore a standard part of any installation is to ensure your system has the latest version of the software Refer to the BCM 4 0 Administration Guide for information on checking for and installing software u
139. Off Off Off Off service mode Restriction N A N A N A N A 999 global overrides 112 Restriction filter N A N A N A 0 1 1800 0 0800 1 01 1877 1888 11 911 Service modes er i an 1976 1 976 1900 1 900 5551212 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A 010 1 00 05 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A 06 Routing service Off Off Off Off Off mode Routing service No No No No No overflow Public DN Public DN Default 25 Default 11 Default 25 Default 7 Default 8 lengths 00 17 0 11 00 12 0 11 00 17 01 10 01 17 1 3 9 3 02 10 011 18 020 9 1 11 411 3 0200 10 911 3 02000 7 020000 10 0201 10 02010 9 07 10 071 11 0718 10 072 11 077 11 09 11 1 3 N0060612 Appendix G Market profile attributes 367 Table 100 Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile United Functionality Attribute Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Unknown Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable number length Public OLI Local number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length National Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable number length Handsfree Auto Auto Auto Auto None Pickup group None None None None None Set capabilities ans redirect Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Call forward Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Dis
140. Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge F Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Note Ensure the label of the new fan faces the back wall of the BCM expansion unit chassis Airflow is out of the chassis as indicated by the arrows imprinted on the fan To install an expansion unit fan Place the fan in the expansion unit so that the label faces the back wall of the unit Align the screw holes in the fan with the screw holes in the expansion unit and attach the fan Connect the fan power supply cable to the hub board Replace the cover a A O N Restore the BCM system to operation For details refer to Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 The BCM system starts up when you connect the AC power cord The start up process takes several minutes to complete 6 Test the direction of the fan exhaust air flow to determine if the fan is correctly installed a Hold apiece of paper or your hand close to the fan exhaust A correctly installed fan blows air away from the main unit b Ifthe fan exhaust air flow is incorrect remove the cooling fan see Removing a BCM200 cooling fan on page 329 and reinstall the fan in the correct orientation this procedure Troubleshooting cooling fans There are three LEDs on the front of the BCM base function tray and one on the front of the expansion
141. RAID LED display The advanced function tray in the RFO configuration contains two hard disks and a RAID controller card and has an LED display to monitor RAID status The extra unpopulated bay is reserved for future development The advanced function tray mounts in the upper BCM400 main unit bay The advanced function tray slides out and away from the front of the main unit for hard disk maintenance RAID upgrade or exchange purposes Figure 6 illustrates the advanced function tray and faceplate interfaces for the BCM400 standard and RFO configurations BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 38 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Figure 6 Advanced function tray Hard disk Advanced function tray latch N e Advanced function tray chassis Status LEDs RAID only u Buzzer reset button RAID only Bezel screw Reserved bay Advanced function tray face with single hard disk Advanced function tray RAID configuration Hard disk cage Pri disk Power supply N db Hard disk P u Zu connector eserved bay ES ower supply 7 ae Zo connector I I ke i og RAID axa card NSS Mirror Hard disk x disk IDE connector cage lift tab IDE connector BCM400 advanced function tray RAID status LEDs Three LEDs are located on the bezel face of the advanced function tray see Figure 7 The LEDs show the current state of redundant array of independent disks RAID hardware
142. Refer to the BCM 4 0 Telset Administration Guide for information on using Telset Administration to set this parameter Other telephony startup parameters are configured using Feature CONFIG Refer to the BCM 4 0 Telset Administration Guide for more information To initialize voice mail You initialize your voice mail system using Feature 983 from a two line display telephone Refer to the CallPilot Telephone Administation Guide for information on using Telset Administration to initialize your voice mail system To create Telset user accounts Note You can only create Telset accounts using Telset Administration To create Element Manager accounts you must use Element Manager 1 Select Feature 9 8 from a two line display telephone 2 Enter the following user ID and password User ID SETNNA Password CONFIG The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344 respectively Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select User Accounts Press OK The Accounts screen appears Press NEXT to scroll through the list of available accounts to create Press CHNGE to change the status of the current account N Oo oO Ff W Press CRT to create the account If you see the DEL command instead of the CRT command then the account is already created 8 Press BACK The Accounts screen appears 9 Press NEXT The password screen appears 10 Press CHNGE to change the password 11 Press NEXT to scroll through the
143. Ring Orange White 28 No connection White Green 3 No connection Green White 29 No connection White Brown 4 No connection Brown White 3 30 Tip White Slate 5 Ring Slate White 4 31 Tip Red Blue 6 Ring Blue Red 32 No connection Red Orange 7 No connection Orange Red 33 No connection Red Green 8 No connection Green Red 5 34 Tip Red Brown 9 Ring Brown Red 6 35 Tip Red Slate 10 Ring Slate Red 36 No connection Black Blue 11 No connection Blue Black 37 No connection Black Orange 12 No connection Orange Black 7 38 Tip Black Green 13 Ring Green Black N0060612 Appendix C GATM wiring chart 341 Table 88 GATM8 RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 2 of 2 Line Pin Connection Wire color 8 39 Tip Black Brown 14 Ring Brown Black 40 Noconnection Black Slate 15 Noconnection Slate Black 49 Noconnection Violet Brown 24 No connection Brown Violet Aux 50 Tip Violet Slate see 25 Ring Slate Violet Note Note The Aux port supports full data speeds When the line is in use by an analog device the icon is lit on the phone to indicate it is in use If you try to seize the line using the phone the display shows in use Also in the event of a power failure an analog set on line 1 goes active powered by the CO BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 342 Appendix C GATM wiring chart N0060612
144. SIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG DMS100 DMS100 ETSI QSIG variants MCDN MCDN MCDN DMS250 DMS250 MCDN 4ESS 4ESS MCDN MCDN Global analog GATM GATM GATM GATM GATM N A trunk versions BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 356 Appendix G Market profile attributes Table 97 Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Conference Yes Yes Yes No Yes No tone supported Held line After 30 Off Off Off Off Off reminder seconds Delay ring After 15 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 transfer rings rings rings rings rings rings Telephony Transfer After 15 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 feature settings callback timeout rings rings rings rings rings rings Network 30 30 30 N A 30 30 callback Host delay ms 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Link time ms 300 600 600 600 600 Target line if Busy Prime Prime Prime Prime Prime busy setting Companding A law A law A law mu law mu law A law law DTI carrier type E1 E1 E1 T1 T1 E1 System settings Number of rings 2 1 1 1 1 1 in a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes supported Default delay 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring Hunt groups cycles cycles cycles cycles cycles cycles Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec
145. SM32 single density switch settings upgraded system The following table shows the switch settings for DSM modules deployed as single density on a system For single density modules you set the first DS30 number on the DIP switches and the system assigns the next DS30 bus Note in Table 42 how the DSM32 module spans two DS30 bus numbers and that there are only five possible DS30 settings for the DIP switches Note DSM modules deployed with 2 5 systems are all single density and cannot be set to gt double density The DSM 16 and DSM 32 modules can be set to either density N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 131 Table 42 DSM16 DSM16 and DSM32 DSM32 single density switch settings upgraded system Select Enter these switch To assign these DS30 settings DNs to DSM16 or a nl b DSM 16 DSM 32 or DSM 32 wm 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 on on on on on on 221 236 221 252 DS30 2 and 3 3 on on on on on 237 252 237 268 DS30 3 and 4 4 on on on on on 253 268 253 284 DS30 4 and 5 5 on on on on 269 284 269 300 DS30 5 and 6 6 on on on on on 285 300 285 316 DS30 6 and 7 7 on on on on 301 316 N A The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 split you cannot
146. SS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 HKTA2015 ETSI 102 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG Protocols variants BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 protocol variant PRI trunk ETSI 403 I ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 HKTA2015 ETSI 403 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG MCDN ETSI QSIG variants MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN Global analog N A N A GATM N A GATM N A trunk versions N0060612 Appendix G Market profile attributes 359 Table 98 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong Italy Conference No Yes No No No Yes tone supported Held line Off Off Off Off Off Off reminder Delay ring After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 transfer rings rings rings rings rings rings Telephony Transfer After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 After 4 feature settings callback timeout rings rings rings rings rings rings Network 30 30 30 30 N A 30 callback Host delay ms 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Link time ms N A N A 600 600 600 N A Target line if PBX gt PBX gt Busy Prime Prime Prime PBX gt busy setting Busy DID gt Busy DID gt Prime DID gt Prime Prime Companding A law A law A law A law mu
147. System Startup Element Manager is available Solid Green Solid Green LED state 8 Alarm 10909 System Startup Startup complete Service Manager and Scheduling Services available Media bay module LEDs The two media bay module MBM LEDs show the power and status of the MBM Figure 46 shows the location of the Power and Status LEDs on an MBM The power and status LEDs are located in the same place on all MBMs BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 80 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM system LEDs Figure 46 MBM LEDs GATM A orl Power Status Table 20 describes the possible MBM LED states Table 20 MBM LED descriptions Power Status Description Off Off The MBM does not have power or there is a failure of the MBM power converter Off BCM to expansion unit failure or system initialization Blinking Hardware is working but there is an operational problem such as e no link to main unit is detected e frame alignment is lost on messages from the main unit e bandwidth not allocated e MBM is in maintenance state e MBM is in download state GASM GATM4 GATM8 Blinking Blinking The MBM has power but there is a hardware problem such as e partial failure of power converter e thermal overload e fan failure On On The MBM is ready to operate The following MBMs have additional LEDs e DTM LEDs on page
148. Transmit Data A 2 15 Transmit Clock A 15 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 158 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables Table 58 RS 422 EIA 530 adapter cable Sheet 2 of 2 o o Receive Data A Receive Clock A 17 N 5 Clear to Send A 5 Request To Send B 19 ar o 7 Signal Ground 7 21 er 9 Receive Clock B 9 Data Terminal Ready B 23 o 11 External Clock B 11 25 M o 13 Clear To Send B 13 Table 59 shows the wire connections for a V 35 adapter cable Table 59 V 35 adapter cable Protective Ground lt Transmit Clock A k o 3 Receive Data A R lt Receive Clock A i N 5 Clear to Send D ay co 7 Signal Ground B i 9 Receive Clock B X N w 11 External Clock B W N o ER ao Zz QO Q o O N Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 159 Table 60 shows the wire connections for a DB15 X 21 adapter cable Table 60 DB15 X 21 adapter cable 1 Chassis Ground 1 JSS 3 Receive Data A 17 Receive Clock A 6 5 Clear to Send A 19 Request To Send B 10 7 Signal Ground 8 21 9 Receive Clock B 13 23 11 External Clock B 14 25 13 Clear To Send B 12 Installing the cards Refer to Replacing data cards and processing hardware on page 299 for the removal and instal
149. ULAR PURPOSE THIS LIMITATION OF WARRNATIES WAS A MATERIAL FACTOR IN THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE LICENSE FEE CHARGED FOR EACH SPECIFIC ITEM OF SOFTWARE LICENSED IN NO EVENT WILL NORTEL NETWORKS AND OR NORTEL NETWORKS SUPPLIERS AND THEIR DIRECTORS OFFICERS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE TO OR THROUGH CUSTOMER FOR INCIDENTAL INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING LOST PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS OR BUSINESS INFORMATION BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR OTHER ECONOMIC DAMAGE AND FURTHER INCLUDING INJURY TO PROPERTY AS A RESULT OF USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LICENSED SOFTWARE OR BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY OR OTHER TERM OF THIS LICENSE REGARDLESS OF WHETHER NORTEL NETWORKS AND OR NORTEL NETWORKS SUPPLIERS WERE ADVISED HAD OTHER REASON TO KNOW OR IN FACT KNEW OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the United States government is subject to the restrictions as set forth in the Right in Technical Data and Computer Software Clauses in DFARS 252 227 7013 c 1 ii and FAR 52 227 19 c 2 as applicable The rights and obligations arising under this License shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Tennessee If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision of this License or portion thereof to be unenforceable that provision of the License shall be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to effect the intent
150. Use the procedures in this section to perform the following e To remove the WAN card on page 301 e To install a replacement WAN card on page 303 e To remove the media services card MSC on page 304 e To install the media services card MSC on page 306 e To remove the modem card on page 307 e To install a modem card on page 309 e To remove the processor expansion card PEC on page 313 e To install a PEC on page 315 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 300 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware e To remove a DIMM card on page 317 e To install a DIMM card on page 318 e To remove the clock calendar battery on page 319 e To install a new clock calendar battery on page 321 Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Caution Use only a Nortel approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts Figure 160 shows an interior view of the base function tray looking forward The illustration identifies the location of interior components Use the flowchart shown in Figure 161 to replace the cards Figure 160 Base function tray interior components WAN slot MSC slot PCI cov
151. Yes N A 60 40 700 N0060612 Appendix G Market profile attributes 369 Table 101 Localization PSTN standards and pulse dialing parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Pulse Dialing ms Break Make Interdigit Market profile Localized PSTN standards time time time Poland Yes 1 Polish ASS_1_v1 doc 66 33 700 2 ITU T Telecommunication Standardization Sector of ITU Supplement2 Series E 01 94 Taiwan Yes 1 Technical Specifications for 66 33 800 Terminal Equipment for Connection to Public Switched Telephone Network PSTNO1 September 27 2001 United Kingdom Yes N A 66 34 740 Table 102 Transmission parameters Transmission Loop length Tx CO gain Rx CO gain PCM coding adjustment short medium short medium Market profile scheme AC impedance capability long long Australia A law 220 820 No N A 0 N A N A 6 dB N A 120nF Brazil A law 600 900 Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB CALA A law 600 Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Canada mu law 600 Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Caribbean mu law 600 Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Global A law 600 No N A 3 dB N A _ N A 3 dB N A Mexico A law 600 No N A 3 dB N A _ N A 3 dB N A New Zealand A law 320 1050 No N A 3 dB N A _ N A 3 dB N A 230nF North America mu law 600 Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Poland A law 600 No N A 3 dB N A N A 3 dB N A Taiwan
152. a hard disk cage ina BCM200 main unit 04 262 Installing a hard disk cage in a BCM400 main unit 0005 263 Replacing a hard disk in the hard disk cage 00 0c eee eee eee 265 Removing a hard disk from a standard configuration hard disk cage 265 Removing a primary hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage 266 Removing a mirror hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage 267 Installing a hard disk into a standard configuration hard disk cage 268 Installing a primary hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage 269 Installing a mirror hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage 271 Initializing the hard disk in a single disk configuration 00 000 273 Initializing the hard disk in a RAID configuration 00 0 eee eee 273 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 0 eee cece eee eee 275 Replacing a standard power supply 200 e eee eee eee 275 Removing a BCM200 power supply 020 00 cee eee eae 276 Installing a BCM200 standard power supply 20000 cece e eee 278 Removing a BCM400 standard power supply 000 0 02 eee eee 282 Installing a BCM400 standard power supply 0000 cece eens 284 Upgrading to a redundant power supply 0 0 2c eee eee ee eee 286 Removing the PSU status connector jumper 0000 cee eee 287 Install
153. a separate mute key and a headset key under the dialpad Digital Phone 7316E two line display three display buttons 16 memory buttons with indicators eight memory buttons without indicators Handsfree mute and headset buttons are located under the dialpad The default button assignment for the 7316E is different from the 7316 N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 73 Digital Phone 7316E Key Indicator Module KIM all the features of the 7316E plus 24 extra memory buttons with indicators per KIM Can be configured as an enhanced central answering position CAP that supports line and Hunt group appearances the eKIMs or as an ordinary KIM that only supports memory button programming the OKIMs Supports a maximum of four eKIMs and up to nine OKIMS Digital Phone 7406 cordless telephone system provides cordless mobility in a small office environment Each base station supports three telephones Function is based on the 7316 telephone The base station connects to a DSM on the system Provides six memory buttons with indicators and a two line display with three display buttons For installation instructions refer to the 77406 Cordless Telephone Installation Guide IP Phone 1120E not shown The Nortel IP Phone 1120E brings voice and data to the desktop by connecting directly to a Local Area Network LAN through an Ethernet connection The IP Phone 1120E ha
154. a single or redundant cooling fan in a BCM400 main unit Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container To install a BCM400 cooling fan 1 Place the new fan in the fan access panel in the position from which you removed the old fan Ensure the I O card connector cable is oriented to the bottom of the fan and that the fan label is closest to the grill on the panel Note Ensure the label of the new fan faces the back wall of the BCM main unit Airflow is out of the chassis as indicated by the arrows imprinted on the fan Note Redundant feature option dual fans If you are installing a second fan you must use the new fan access panel included with the redundant feature option kit on the back of the BCM main unit The redundant fan access panel has two fan exhausts N0060612 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan 327 2 Attach the fan to the fan access panel using the four plastic rivets a Align the fan chassis mounting holes with the holes in the fan access panel see Figure 180 Figure 180 Fan chassis mounting holes we Chassis mounting holes I O card fan connector a b Hold the fan in place against the fan access panel Push the rivet collar through the fan access panel and fan chassis mounting holes
155. abled 4 Disabled 4 delay Note The field for number of rings is hidden in defau delay the field for It mode disabled When you e number of rings becomes visible with the given default value nter a value for call forward Dial tone Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled detection Set preferences Language Euro Swedish German English UKEnglish first is default Spanish English English French VICAP English Norwegian EuroFrench Spanish Portuguese Danish Italian Analog VSC None None None None 141 tone ONN blocking Analog VSC None None None None 141 pulse BRI VSC None None None None 141 BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SrvcCode Release reason Release text Simple Simple Simple Simple Detailed Release code On On On On Off Tone duration 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec DTMF Pause time 3 5 msec 1 5 msec 3 5 msec 1 5 msec 3 5 msec parameters Interdigit time 100 msec 80 msec 100 msec 80 msec 100 msec BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 368 Appendix G Market profile attributes Global analog trunk parameters This section contains information for the GATM4 and GATM8 MBMs The information in the tables applies to downloaded profiles only it is not applicable to DIP switch modes Global analog trunks are not supported in the following market profiles Denmark France Germany Holland Italy N
156. ach shaded square represents the amount of the DS30 bus and the offset which the MBM requires If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 split DS30 7 is not available to MBMs ASM MBMs always use the single density DIP switch settings with the appropriate offset BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 120 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM Setting MBM DIP switches Before you install the MBMs into the BCM system you must set the DIP switches Make a note of these settings either on the chart shown in Table 28 or in the Programming Record form To set MBM DIP switches 1 Locate the DIP switches on the MBM See Figure 70 Figure 70 MBM DIP switches L Underside of the 1A MBM Ir rs f MBM is On 4123456 right side up DIP switches Back of the MBM Rear view of the MBM Note The GASM and GATM MBM s have a different DIP switch configuration gt than shown in Figure 70 2 Set the switches to correspond with the settings you chose in the procedure To determine MBM DIP switch settings on page 116 3 Repeat step 2 for each MBM you want to install N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 121 4 You are now ready to install the MBMs into the BCM system Refer to Installing optional telephony equipment on page 173 for details Tip Create a label with the DS30 bus and
157. acing or installing a cooling fan 000 c eee cee eee 323 Toremove a BCM400 cooling aaa me ie I ea aiai 324 To instala BOMA00 cooling Tau 326 Te removed BCM200 Cooling Ri 329 Te instala BCM200 cooling TAR ee 331 To romove an expansion UM LAN een nie 332 To Teta anh TSI Dit an ee 334 N0060612 Contents 9 Contents Regulatory information 0 u zuauua0 Ha a a nenn nein 17 North American regulatory information 2 4 62 0 k0e0 RR RR HR HR na 17 Canadian NOICE sergas rei aka la E N 17 Federal Communications Commission FCC Notice 0000 18 Ringer Equivalence Number REN 2002 cece eee eee eee 18 EMVEMC FCG Fall I ocspecstea anced a 18 important safely iNSWUCHONS a an 19 SAE ac geha dG ein ke trdo ehn eka RE SE RE EEE Er 20 Enhanced 911 configuration s s asc eed eismo on ode Khe eee u 21 Radio frequency interference 0c eee ee ee 21 Telecommunication registration 0 00 eee 21 International regulatory information 000 cece ee 22 DOI uni Soe sabe le Gakeaheba oh hesae ear ee anes Suse Ee tee ea ees 23 Additional safety information si s444ss 008 sn 0 aa ass 23 ITU Standardization compliance ca ccd es bones Kade RR aa 24 Chapter 1 Getting Stared hccccs cee anne aan na aa aa en Cedi aan 25 ARBSUETHESURIE 15 3nd 15865 05 oS ee IE en 25 PUPNGNES dns dows Rene SARE Nee FETETELE TEATATI TITT 25 AOPONYING reseso tae nowmks re eae ee ee eS 25 Symbols and con
158. age Figure 158 BCM400 main unit redundant power supply rear view Power supply mounted in the BCM400 redundant feature option main unit 4 Ifyou are installing the redundant power supply for the first time restore the BCM400 system to operation as described in Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 N0060612 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 297 The BCM400 system starts up when you connect the AC power cord If the system does not start and the red Power LED is on you may need to press the reset button on the base function tray panel to start the system If you are replacing a single faulty power supply module the BCM400 is already in operation The replacement power supply module powers up when fully and correctly inserted in the redundant power supply cage Verify the LEDs on the power supply module are lit Verify all LEDs on the base function tray indicate the system functions correctly Removing a power supply module Use this procedure for any of the following conditions Remove a single failed power supply module A power supply module indicates a failure when the green LED located on the module is not lit Remove power supply modules before you install a new power supply cage in the BCM400 main unit see Upgrading to a redundant power supply on page 286 Note It is not necessary to remove power from the BCM400 main unit or expan
159. ain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile United Functionality Attribute Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Access codes Direct dial digit 9 9 9 0 0 Dest code for 0 0 0 9 9 default route N0060612 Appendix G Market profile attributes 365 Table 100 Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile United Functionality Attribute Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Digital trunking ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ITU T ETSI 403 P i protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG rotocols variants BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 protocol variant BTNR191 PRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ITU T ETSI 403 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG MCDN ETSI QSIG variants MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN Global analog N A N A N A GATM GATM trunk versions Conference No No No No Yes tone supported Held line Off Off Off Off Immediate reminder Delay ring After 4 rings After4rings After4rings After4rings After 4 rings transfer Telephony Transfer After 4 rings After4rings After4rings After4rings After 4 rings feature settings callback timeout Network 30 30 30 N A 30 callback Host de
160. ain the folds in the primary hard disk IDE ribbon cable Ensure you connect the primary hard disk to the correct RAID IDE connector Caution It is vital that you connect the correct IDE ribbon cables to the correct hard disks Connect the primary ribbon cable to the primary hard disk Connect the mirror ribbon cable to the mirror hard disk N0060612 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 273 Initializing the hard disk in a single disk configuration The BCM system is normally initialized prior to shipment If you replace the hard disk in a standard single disk system the BCM system initializes the hard disk automatically to the default values for network parameters time zone and market profile After auto initialization you can change the default values see To initialize the hard disk in a single disk configuration on page 273 To initialize a RAID configuration refer to Initializing the hard disk in a RAID configuration on page 273 For further information on how to replace a hard disk in a standard configuration refer to Replacing a hard disk in the hard disk cage on page 265 For further information on how to monitor disk activity refer to System monitoring and troubleshooting on page 215 After initialization you should restore the configuration data to the BCM Use the backup and restore utility BRU to restore configuration data see Using the backup and restore utility on page 248 Nor
161. ain unit Place the screws in a safe location 6 Lift the back of the cover and slide rearward until it disengages from the main unit Refer to Figure 114 on page 245 or Figure 115 on page 246 7 Lift the top cover up and away from the main unit Place the cover in a safe location Figure 114 Remove the BCM200 top cover Fi EN 2 Lift cover at rear Remove the top cover screws BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 246 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades Figure 115 Remove the BCM400 top cover Main unit top cover yy Remove the top cover screws Pa 3 Slide cover open N Installing the main unit top cover Use this procedure to install the top of the main unit cover This procedure assumes that maintenance or installation activities are complete and that you are ready to start the BCM system Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container or work area To install the main unit top cover 1 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet If required remove the main unit from the server rack Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Set the top cover on the main unit Slide the to
162. al surface Remove the main unit top cover Refer to Removing the main unit top cover on page 244 Remove the base function tray latch screws and place them in a safe location Move the base function tray latches to the unlocked position See Figure 106 oO N OA Grasp the base function tray latches and partially remove the base function tray from the main unit Do not exert force on the DS30 cables or connectors 9 Disconnect the DS30 cable connectors from the media services card If necessary remove the WAN card to access the DS30 cables see To remove the WAN card on page 301 Figure 106 Remove the base function tray Unfasten base function tray latch screws o a Disconnect DS30 cables N from the MSC _ Slide base function tray partially I wr away from the main unit 10 Remove the base function tray completely from the main unit Remove the base function tray carefully to prevent damage to the cables and connectors 11 Place the base function tray on a flat clean and static free surface BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 236 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades To install the base function tray Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container or work area N Warning Use ca
163. ally selected by default Click Modify in the SNMP Settings area The Modify SNMP Settings dialog box opens BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 202 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 5 Configure the attributes for Modify SNMP Settings see Table 73 Table 73 Modify SNMP Settings attributes Attribute Description Enable SNMP Agent Select whether to enable or disable the SNMP agent by selecting or not selecting the check box Minimum required security Select the minimum required security for SNMP from the drop down list SNMP Version Support Select the SMNP version support from the drop down list 6 Click Ok To configure SNMP community strings a fF Wa N From the Configuration tab click the Administrator Access folder to expand it Select SNMP from the Administrator Access folder Select the Community Strings tab Click Add The Add Community String dialog box opens Configure the Add Community String attributes see Table 74 Table 74 Add Community String attributes Attribute Description Community string Enter the entry name used as a key to uniquely identify an individual community entry on the SNMP agent Type of access Specify the read and write access for this community Available options are Read Only and Read Write 6 7 Click Ok Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add more community strings To configu
164. and external and the programming techniques employed therein In order to maintain the trade secret status of the information contained within the licensed software the licensed software is being delivered to CUSTOMER in object code form only NORTEL NETWORKS or any of its suppliers holding any intellectual property rights in any licensed software and or any third party owning any intellectual property rights in software from which the licensed software was derived are intended third party beneficiaries of the License All grants of rights to use intellectual property intended to be accomplished by this License are explicitly stated No other grants of such rights shall be inferred or shall arise by implication CUSTOMER warrants to NORTEL NETWORKS that CUSTOMER is not purchasing the rights granted by this License in anticipation of reselling those rights CUSTOMER shall e Hold the licensed software in confidence for the benefit of NORTEL NETWORKS and or NORTEL NETWORKS suppliers using no less a degree of care than it uses to protect its own most confidential and valuable information and e Keep a current record of the location of each copy of licensed software made by it and e Install and use each copy of licensed software only on a single CPU at a time for this purpose single CPU shall include systems with redundant processing units and e Affix to each copy of licensed software made by it in the same form and locat
165. ant power supply on page 286 Table 16 Cooling fan field replaceable units Component description FRU description Installation procedure BCM400 cooling fan 4 wire base unit Cooling fan on page 68 Installing a BCM400 cooling fan on page 326 BCM expansion unit cooling fan Cooling fan on page 68 Installing an expansion unit fan on page 334 BCM200 cooling fan Cooling fan on page 68 Installing the BCM200 cooling fan on page 331 N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 71 Table 17 MBM Component description FRU description Installation procedure MBM bay filler blanking plate MBM bays and backplane on page 50 Installing a media bay module MBM on page 105 DTM MBM Digital trunk media bay module on page 54 Installing a media bay module MBM on page 105 CTM4 CLID trunk MBM Caller ID trunk media bay module on page 55 Installing a media bay module MBM on page 105 CTM8 CLID MBM Caller ID trunk media bay module on page 55 Installing a media bay module MBM on page 105 BRI S T MBM Basic rate interface media bay module on page 55 Installing a media bay module MBM on page 105 DSM16 MBM Digital station media bay module on page 57 Installing a media bay module MBM on page 105
166. assis 1 Lift hard disk cage tab gt 11 Remove the hard disk cage from the BCM400 advanced function tray chassis Place the hard disk cage on a flat clean and static free surface Installing a hard disk cage Use the procedures in this section to install a standard or RAID configuration hard disk cage into a BCM200 or BCM400 system Install the hard disk cage in the BCM after RAID upgrade or in a hard disk or RAID card replacement conditions This section describes the following procedures e Installing a hard disk cage in a BCM200 main unit on page 262 e Installing a hard disk cage in a BCM400 main unit on page 263 Warning You must initialize the BCM system when you install a new hard disk on a A single disk system see Initializing the hard disk in a single disk configuration on page 273 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 262 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk Installing a hard disk cage in a BCM200 main unit Use this procedure to install the standard or RAID configuration hard disk cage into the BCM200 main unit Y Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container To install a hard disk cage 1 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet 2 Attach one end of the grounding strap to y
167. ata cards and processing hardware Figure 169 PEC replacement overview Ensure you have a current data backup Do a software shutdown Set up unit for Install the maintenance PEC Remove the top Restore unit to cover operation Test system If required remove PEC module from MSC A Warning Incorrect handling of the PEC during installation could result in loss of telephony programming Danger Electrical shock warning AN Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Caution Use only a Nortel approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts N0060612 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 313 To remove the processor expansion card PEC Warning Possible data loss Ensure that you do not touch the PEC casing to any of the components on the MSC This may cause shorting which can erase memory or cause a loss of telephony programming If a loss of memory or telephony programming occurs complete the removal of the PEC and then restore the data from your backup medium upon reinstallation see Installing a processor expansion card PEC on page 314 Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic disc
168. ation prerequisites Refer to the following sections for information on BCM system installation prerequisites General requirements Environmental requirements Electrical requirements Site telephony wiring requirements on page 88 System equipment supplies and tools on page 89 General requirements Before you install the BCM main unit or expansion unit complete the following actions Determine the location for the BCM main unit or expansion unit telephones and other equipment based on spacing and electrical requirements Order the required trunks from the central office Ensure that you have all the equipment and supplies you need to install the system Environmental requirements Ensure you meet the installation environmental requirements The installation area must be a minimum of 4 m 13 ft from equipment such as photocopiers electrical motors and other equipment that produces electromagnetic radio frequency and electrostatic interference within 1 5 m 5 ft of a three wire grounded electrical outlet clean free of traffic and excess dust dry and well ventilated within the temperature ranges of 10 C and 40 C 50 F and 104 F between 20 and 80 non condensing relative humidity structurally strong enough and with enough space to support the BCM units a minimum of 46 cm 18 in from the floor gt Note The installation area must be of sufficient height from the flo
169. ation tab click the System folder to expand it 2 Select Identification The System Identification screen appears 3 Verify that the region setting is correct for your system If you must change the region see Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters on page 193 Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge J Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container To install a modem card 1 Obtain a correct and functional modem kit 2 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 3 Remove the base function tray bezel See To remove the base function tray bezel on page 237 If required remove the WAN card See To remove the WAN card on page 301 If required remove the MSC card from the base function tray See To remove the media services card MSC on page 304 6 If you are installing the modem card for the first time locate the modem port label on the front of the base function tray Remove the modem port label if required and discard see Figure 167 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 310 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware Figure 167 Modem port label Remove modem port label 7 Ifapplicable install the modem card guide pin on the main card Ensure the modem card g
170. ations company This type of customer provided equipment cannot be used on party lines or coin lines BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 22 Regulatory information Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician International regulatory information The CE Marking on this equipment indicates compliance with the following This device conforms to Directive 1999 5 EC on Radio Equipment and Telecommunicati
171. ay The BCM400 expansion gateway is available in standard and redundant configurations for BCM400 systems only The BCM400 expansion gateway kit North America only consists of a BCM400 main unit and enough VoIP gateway trunk authorization codes to enable 48 ports of VoIP trunks The BCM400 expansion gateway combined with the BCM400 host system provides a maximum of 192 TDM sets instead of 160 while communicating to the PSTN through TDM trunks on the expansion gateway The VoIP trunks connect the two systems and allow the BCM400 expansion gateway to tandem from IP trunks to the PSTN TDM trunks see Figure 36 on page 63 The addition of a second BCM400 expansion gateway provides up to two T1 PSTN trunks This releases enough system resources on the host BCM400 main unit for the addition of 64 digital telephones N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 63 Figure 36 BCM400 expansion gateway configuration Host BCM main unit and expansion unit BCM400 expansion gateway All stations are connected to the Host Al GO00 00000 o ie 0 es 00000 m O00000 llo lt i _ fe 7 N o lo KEP 000 88 PALI IP trunk 7 Two PSTN trunks N on expansion 7 gateway BCM components Refer to the following sections for descriptions of the BCM components e BCM power supply e BCM400 redundant power supply e Power s
172. ay opening faces the rear of the main unit 14 Align the mounting holes in the redundant power supply cage with the screw holes in the main unit 15 Attach the redundant power supply cage to the main unit using the four chassis mounting screws Refer to Figure 152 Figure 152 Attach the redundant power supply cage Fasten power supply BR P mounting screws A Pa 16 If you have not already done so install a redundant fan into the unit Refer to Installing a BCM400 cooling fan on page 326 17 Install a new cable clamp on the underside of the top cover Place the new cable clamp beside the existing cable clamp see Figure 153 Use the cable clamp to secure the power IDE and auxiliary cables to the roof of the main unit BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 292 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply Figure 153 Install a new cable clamp _ Mount new cable X clamp located on underside of cover Cable clamp located on top of power supply 18 Run the power supply auxiliary and IDE cables to the hard disk Secure these cables in the new cable clamp Note Verify the power supply cables are connected correctly and are routed so they do not interfere with any internal components when moved 19 Connect cable runs P2 and P3 to the media bay backplane see Figure 153 as follows a Bundle the cables together Run the
173. bes the internal components N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 35 Figure 4 BCM400 main unit internal components standard configuration Removable cover Power supply _ me gt fs 2 5 gt lt e i LL function tray 8 2 O Cc gt 2 Q N je a gt E Rack mount bracket Rear view MBM backplane connectors N N gt A bg ZN QO COO 00 COO Of RN gt N Fan exhaust support bracket mount BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 36 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Figure 5 BCM400 main unit internal components RFO configuration re Removable cover Front view Advanced function tray Base function tray SH PS a a N ol T gt HD AA Sle e MBM backplane Rack mount bracket r P Rear view MBM backplane connectors N 2 N 04 OP Fan exhausts N N N SN a A A le Fan access LAT Power supply panel E support bracket mount N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 37 Table 4 BCM400 main unit internal component descriptions standard and RFO configurations Component Description Front view Removable cover The removable cover provides access to internal components Power supply Standard The auto sensing p
174. bus 07 Pins Port DNs DNs DNs DNs DNs DNs 26 1 X01 221 237 253 269 285 301 27 2 X02 222 238 254 270 286 302 28 3 X03 223 239 255 271 287 303 29 4 X04 224 240 256 272 288 304 30 5 X05 225 241 257 273 289 305 31 6 X06 226 242 258 274 290 306 32 7 X07 227 243 259 275 291 307 33 8 X08 228 244 260 276 292 308 34 9 X09 229 245 261 277 293 309 35 10 X10 230 246 262 278 294 310 36 11 X11 231 247 263 279 295 311 37 12 X12 232 248 264 280 296 312 38 13 X13 233 249 265 281 297 313 39 14 X14 234 250 266 282 298 314 40 15 X15 235 251 267 283 299 315 41 16 X16 236 252 268 284 300 316 Second level DNs DS 30 bus set to Double Density Pins Port DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 bus 02 bus 03 bus 04 bus 05 bus 06 bus 07 DNs DNs DNs DNs DNs DNs 26 1 X17 377 393 409 425 441 457 27 2 X18 378 394 410 426 442 458 28 3 X19 379 395 411 427 443 459 29 4 X20 380 396 412 428 444 460 30 55 X21 381 397 413 429 445 461 31 6 X22 382 398 414 430 446 462 32 7 X23 383 399 415 431 447 463 33 8 X24 384 400 416 432 448 464 34 9 X25 385 401 417 433 449 465 35 10 X26 386 402 418 434 450 466 36 11 X27 387 403 419 435 451 467 37 12 X28 388 404 420 436 452 468 38 13 X29 389 405 421 437 453 469 39 14 X30 390 406 422 438 454 470 40 15 X31 391 407 423 439 455 471 41 16 X32 392 408 424 440 456 472 For each port substitute the X for the DS30 bus number Example Port X01 on DS30 bus 02 is port 0201 BCM2
175. cables on the top of the power supply chassis and secure with the cable clamp b Connect cable P2 into the bottom media bay module backplane power connector Connect cable P3 into the top media bay module backplane connector Bundle power cables P2 and P3 along with auxiliary cable P7 or P8 together with a grommet see Figure 154 e Insert the P2 P3 and auxiliary cable into the cable slot on the chassis secured with the grommet f Ensure that one power run connects to one MBM backplane connector Do not connect a single power run to both MBM backplane connectors N0060612 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 293 Figure 154 Install a cable grommet Insert the P2 P3 and auxiliary cables into the cable slot Cable slot 20 Install the main unit top cover See Installing the main unit top cover on page 246 Removing a BCM400 redundant power supply cage Use this procedure to remove an existing redundant power supply cage from the BCM400 main unit Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container To remove a BCM400 redundant power supply cage 1 Set up the BCM400 for maintenance see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect all cables from the front of the base function t
176. card X Data networking components The data networking components connect the BCM system to the WAN WAN interface card The network interface card NIC uses a T1 interface and sync port that connects the BCM system to the WAN The WAN card is available as a field replaceable unit For further information on removal installation and initialization refer to Replacing cards on page 299 The international WAN card version Europe Middle East Africa EMEA connects to a channelized T1 TDM circuit with an X 21 or V 35 interface see Figure 16 on page 47 The dual V 35 WAN card version connects to channelized T1 TDM circuits using two V 35 interfaces North America see Figure 17 on page 47 The North American WAN card version connects to a channelized T1 TDM circuit with an integrated T1 DSU CSU or a V 35 interface or both see Figure 18 on page 47 N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 47 Figure 16 WAN interface card international version Daughter cards WAN card PCI clamp press plate PCI connector X 21 DB25 female connector WAN1 V 35 DB25 female connector WAN2 Figure 17 Dual V 35 WAN interface card Daughter cards WAN card PCI clamp press plate PCI connector V 35 DB25 female connector WAN1 V 35 DB25 female connector WAN2 Figure 18 WAN interface card North American version Daughter
177. cate the current status of the hardware components see Base function tray system status display LEDs on page 77 Reset button The reset button restarts the BCM system WAN card The WAN card field upgrade connects the BCM system to the wide area network WAN See WAN interface card on page 46 Media services card MSC The MSC performs call processing and media processing of the voice channels for the BCM system See Media services card MSC on page 41 USB universal serial bus port The two USB ports connect USB compatible peripherals to the BCM system Modem port The modem port provides PSTN dial up access to the BCM system COM port or serial port The COM port provides a serial connection to a laptop for maintenance purposes See Connecting through the serial port on page 179 Ethernet port 2 Ethernet port 2 provides access to the internal local area network Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port 1 provides access to the external local area network Base function tray internal components The base function tray installs in the main unit and houses the main card with the system interfaces Figure 9 illustrates the base function tray layout BCM200 configuration shown Table 6 describes the internal components Figure 9 Base function tray internal components DS256 interface MSC mounting screws PEC Ill N0060612 Cha
178. ced function Restore unit to tray operation Remove hard disk Check LEDs Install new hard disk END To remove the advanced function tray Warning Use care when removing or inserting the advanced function tray Do not forcefully remove or insert the advanced function tray because you could damage or stretch the cables Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge 7 Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container or work area Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet Remove the main unit top cover see Removing the main unit top cover on page 244 Return to this step when complete 4 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 5 Remove the advanced function tray latch screws see Figure 112 Place the screws in a safe location 6 Move the advanced function tray latches to the unlocked position BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 242 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 7 Grasp the advanced function tray latches and partially remove the unit from the main unit Do not exert force on the hard disk power cables and connectors 8 Disconnect hard disk power cable connectors 9 Disconnect the IDE connect
179. ceiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment N0060612 Regulatory information 19 Important safety instructions The following safety instructions cover the installation and use of the Product Read carefully and retain for future reference Installation N Warning To avoid electrical shock hazard to personnel or equipment damage observe the following precautions when installing telephone equipment e Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm e Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations e Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product Use When using your telephone equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following 1
180. cket Rear view Remove this bracket to accommodate redundant power supply 7 Remove both power supply modules from the redundant power supply cage before you install the power supply in the main unit see Removing a power supply module on page 297 8 Place the redundant power supply top down on a flat surface Place the power supply support bracket on the bottom surface of the power supply 9 Inserta tie wrap in the power supply support bracket lanclet 10 Gather together and route the motherboard 20 pin power cable P1 the 12v power cable P9 the 3 3v load cable PB and the PS monitor cable PA to the tie wrap 11 Secure the cables to the power supply support bracket with the tie wrap see Figure 151 Figure 151 Fasten the power supply support bracket cables ms Place the support bracket on the power gt Insert a tie wrap in the K a Gather and route the supply 3 power supply support 2 87 cables to the tie wrap we bracket i I 1 T __ Place power supply top side down on flat surface 5 Secure the cables to the _ power supply bracket with the tie wrap 12 Install the power supply support bracket in the BCM400 main unit see Figure 145 N0060612 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 291 13 Position the redundant power supply cage in the main unit Make sure the power supply module tr
181. cribes how to install configure and maintain the BCM200 and BCM400 hardware running Business Communications Manager BCM 4 0 software The concepts operations and tasks described in this guide relate to the hardware of the BCM system This guide provides task based information on how to install the hardware components and perform basic configuration tasks Use Element Manager Startup Profile and Telset Administration to configure various BCM parameters In brief the information in this guide explains e Installing hardware components e Starting and initializing the system hardware e Replacing components e Testing the system Audience The BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide is directed to installers responsible for installing configuring and maintaining BCM 4 0 systems To use this guide you must e bean authorized BCM 4 0 installer or administrator within your organization e know basic Nortel BCM terminology e be knowledgeable about telephony and IP networking technology Acronyms The following is a list of acronyms used in this guide Table 1 Acronyms Sheet 1 of 3 Acronym Description ACU Audio conference unit Als Alarm indication system APC American Power Conversion BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 26 Chapter 1 Getting started Table 1 Acronyms Sheet 2 of 3
182. cribes the internal components N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 33 Figure 2 BCM200 main unit internal components Front view Fan p Removable cover Hard disk _ I O card _ Rear view MBM backplane connectors In Mm Fan exhaust 0 b Hard disk bay removable panel Relemeunt adapter lt anchor points Table 2 BCM200 main unit internal component descriptions Component Description Hard disk The programmed hard disk or field redundancy upgrade provides an additional hard disk and redundant array of independent disks RAID controller card See Hard disk on page 66 Power supply The auto sensing power supply standard provides power to the main unit see BCM power supply on page 63 Cooling fan The system cooling fan forces warm air out of the main unit see Cooling fan on page 68 I O card The I O interface card provides a signal junction between the base function tray hard disk power supply and cooling system see I O interface card on page 48 MBM backplane The MBM backplane provides the MBM component interface to the power supply and main card see MBM bays and backplane on page 50 Removable cover The removable cover provides access to internal components BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 34 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware BCM400
183. ct the main unit and the expansion unit if applicable from the AC power connection 3 Remove the top cover from the main unit see Removing the main unit top cover on page 244 4 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 5 Locate and disconnect the power supply cables from the I O card media bay backplane and hard disk N0060612 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 277 Disconnect all cables from the I O card Partially remove the base function tray see Removing the base function tray on page 234 Remove the screws that secure the MSC guide bracket to the I O card Place the MSC guide bracket and screws in a safe location see Figure 134 Figure 134 Remove the BCM200 MSC guide bracket Unfasten BCM200 7 MSC guide bracket u vis BCM200 MSC guide bracket mounting screws F al aa S S gt 2 a gt 9 Remove the screws that secure the I O card to the main unit see Figure 135 Place the screws in a Safe location 10 Remove the I O card from the main unit Place the I O card in a safe clean and static free location Note Power supply and hard disk cables run underneath the I O card Remember the location and position of the power supply and hard disk cables You will need to route the cables in the same manner when you reinstall the power supply Figure 135 Remove the I O card from the BCM200 main un
184. ctors PSU status RPS output signalling connector BCM200 MSC guide bracket Fan 2 connector 7 Fan 1 connector K gt 20 pin power 6 lt 3 7 supply connector gt lt Primary IDE controller IDEO ok I O Card Base function tray connector PSU AUX connector Secondary IDE controller IDE1 BCM expansion unit BCM400 only In addition to a main unit the BCM400 system can have one expansion unit The expansion unit is not compatible with the BCM200 system The BCM expansion unit contains six additional bays for MBMs The supplied DS256 cable is 5 m 16 ft long and connects into a DS256 port on the MSC of the main unit and into a DS256 port on the center panel of the expansion unit see Figure 21 Use of any other cable is not supported See Installing an expansion unit on page 101 for more information on installing a expansion unit Note The number of MBMs that you can install is determined by the number of DS30 gt buses required by the MBMs and the number of buses available Refer to Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM on page 105 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 50 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Figure 21 BCM expansion unit connected to BCM400 main unit BCM400 main unit Cc a Woes
185. d the power bar or between the power bar and the electrical outlet Site telephony wiring requirements This section describes the requirements for wiring digital telephony devices digital loop and analog telephony devices analog loop to the BCM system Refer to the following sections for information on the parameters for digital and analog loops e Digital loop e Analog loop on page 89 Digital loop The following parameters must be met for a digital loop e one two or three twisted pair cables per telephone e DC loop resistance of less than 64 e cable length 0 5 mm or 24 AWG less than 300 m 975 ft N0060612 Chapter 5 Checking the installation prerequisites 89 use of a station auxiliary power supply SAPS for loops 300 m 975 ft to 1200 m 3900 ft In North America the SAPS must be a CSA or UL approved Class 2 power source In Europe the SAPS must be a Class II power source and CE marked no bridge taps Analog loop The following parameters must be met for an analog loop maximum DC loop resistance of 208 maximum cable length 0 5 mm or 24 AWG of 1220 m 4000 ft System equipment supplies and tools Refer to the following sections for the equipment required to install the BCM system Basic hardware Optional equipment Other hardware and tools on page 90 Basic hardware The BCM system consists of some combination of the following hardware main unit expa
186. ddress and netmask for the BCM system before you connect it to the network Setting the crossover connections To connect to the BCM system using an Ethernet crossover cable you need a computer equipped with a 10 100 Base T network interface card and TCP IP protocol Figure 90 shows the connections required Figure 90 Ethernet crossover cable 3TD 3TD 6TD 6TD IRD IRD 2RD 2RD Connecting through Ethernet crossover cable Use the following two procedures to connect the Ethernet crossover cable and configure your computer to connect to the BCM system To connect the Ethernet crossover cable 1 Shut down the computer 2 Attach one end of the Ethernet crossover cable to the LAN card on the BCM main unit 3 Connect the other end of the cable to the network interface card on your computer N0060612 Chapter 13 Initializing the system 179 4 Start the computer To configure your computer Note The steps below may differ slightly depending on the operating system of your computer The task in this section is to specify the IP address and subnet mask for the computer From the Start menu choose Settings then choose Control Panel Double click the Network icon Select your TCP IP adapter and then click the Properties button Click the IP Address tab Click the Specify an IP address option In the IP Address field enter the IP address of the BCM system if using the default IP address enter 10 10 1
187. disk or RAID to the system a Connect the hard disk or RAID card to the IDE ribbon cable b Connect the power supply to the hard disk Caution It is vital that you connect the correct IDE ribbon cables to the correct hard disks Connect the primary IDE ribbon cable to the primary hard disk Connect the mirror IDE ribbon cable to the mirror hard disk Note All connectors have a notch that allows you to align the connectors correctly If you cannot push a connector in easily do not force it Examine the connector before attempting to install the cable to determine the correct orientation 8 Slide the advanced function tray completely into the BCM400 main unit see To install the advanced function tray on page 243 N0060612 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 265 9 Restore the BCM system to operation Refer to Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 10 If you installed a new programmed hard disk in a standard configuration for RAID configuration skip to the next step a Initialize the hard disk Refer to Initializing the hard disk in a single disk configuration on page 273 b After the disk is initialized restore your data from your backups If you did not back up your keycodes reenter them see Software keycode on page 181 11 If you installed a new blank hard disk mirror or primary in a RAID wait for the disk mirror process to complete For further information
188. dministration to set the basic parameters For simplicity the task of configuring the basic BCM parameters is divided into two parts Bement Manager Use Bement Manager to set the basic parameters Complete the initial installation e Initial parameters overview on page 184 e Startup parameters overview on page 185 Startup Profile Use the Startup Profile to set the basic parameters BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 184 Chapter 14 Configuring the BCM system Initial parameters overview The initial parameters are the required parameters that can be configured using Telset Administration Element Manager or the Startup Profile See Table 64 for a list of the initial parameters Table 64 Initial parameters Parameters Telset Administration Element Manager Startup Profile Keycode Feature 9 8 gt Feature codes Configuration gt System gt Keycode Keycodes IP address Feature 9 8 gt IP Address Configuration gt Resources IP Address e Obtain dynamically gt Network Interface e IP address e IP subnet mask Modem Feature 9 8 gt Modem Configuration gt Resources Modem e Enable disable modem gt Network Interface System Feature PROFILE Administration gt Utilities gt System e Region Reset gt Cold Reset 2 Telephony Services Telephony startup Feature STARTUP Administration gt Utilities gt Telephony Startup e Template Reset gt Cold Res
189. e Determining system capacity on page 109 e Assigning DS30 resources on page 114 e Determining MBM DIP switch settings on page 116 e Setting MBM DIP switches on page 120 e Assigning line and extension numbers on page 121 e Installing an MBM on page 135 Selecting MBMs for your BCM system MBMs are plug in devices that connect your extensions and the public switched telephone network PSTN lines to the call processing capabilities of the BCM system When you order your BCM system there are no MBMs installed You can select the number and type of MBMs that best suit your business requirements There are three types of MBMs e Trunk media bay module see Selecting trunk MBMs on page 106 e Station media bay module see Selecting station MBMs on page 108 e Specialized media bay module see Selecting a fiber expansion module FEM on page 109 For further information on the role and function of each type of MBM refer to Media bay modules MBMs on page 51 If you have a large BCM system there are some configuration restrictions that can apply to your system For information about these restrictions refer to Assigning DS30 resources on page 114 See Figure 63 for an overview of the process for determining the MBMs for your system BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 106 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM Figure 63 Process for determin
190. e 2 Ring Orange White 3 28 Tip White Green 3 Ring Green White 4 29 Tip White Brown 4 Ring Brown White 5 30 Tip White Slate 5 Ring Slate White 6 31 Tip Red Blue 6 Ring Blue Red 7 32 Tip Red Orange 7 Ring Orange Red 8 33 Tip Red Green 8 Ring Green Red 9 34 Tip Red Brown 9 Ring Brown Red 10 35 Tip Red Slate 10 Ring Slate Red 11 36 Tip Black Blue 11 Ring Blue Black 12 37 Tip Black Orange 12 Ring Orange Black 13 38 Tip Black Green 13 Ring Green Black 14 39 Tip Black Brown 14 Ring Brown Black 15 40 Tip Black Slate 15 Ring Slate Black 16 41 Tip Yellow Blue 16 Ring Blue Yellow 42 No connection Yellow Orange 17 No connection Orange Yellow N0060612 Appendix D 4x16 wiring charts 345 Table 90 4x16 MBM RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 2 of 2 Set Pin Connection Wire color 50 No connection Violet Slate 25 No connection Slate Violet BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 346 Appendix D 4x16 wiring charts N0060612 Appendix E DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts 347 Appendix E DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts Digital telephones such as the Business Series Telephones are connected to a digital station module DSM16 or DSM32 through the RJ 21 connectors on the front of the media bay modules MBM The DSM16 has a single RJ 21 connector and the DSM32 has two RJ 21 connectors see Figure 193 Figure 193 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ 21 connectors
191. e DTMs or Tip The BCM400 main unit holds a maximum of four MBMs If you require more gt MBMs the BCM expansion unit supports a maximum of six additional MBMs BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 108 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM Selecting station MBMs The number and type of telephones and related equipment you have determines which station MBMs you require Note If you are adding any extensions in the near future include them in your calculations To select station MBMs 1 In Table 26 record the number of each type of extension you have 2 Use the number of extensions and the number of extensions per MBM to determine how many MBMs you need Table 26 Determine station MBMs requirements Number of Number of extensions Number of MBMs Type of extension extensions Type of MBM per MBM required Digital extensions DSM16 DSM16 16 DSM16 Digital extensions DSM32 DSM32 32 _____DSM32 Digital extensions 4x16 16 DSM16 Analog extensions ASM8 8 ASM8 Analog extensions GASM8 8 GASM8 Specialty modules Digital extensions are digital or IP telephones You do not need to include IP telephones when calculating the number of required DSM MBMs For a list of the telephones that can be used with the BCM system refer to Telephones and adapters on page 72 Analog extensions include single line telephones fax machi
192. e Figure 146 12 Connect the power cable and IDE cable to the hard disk 13 Run the auxiliary cable to the chassis cable slot see the next step 14 Connect cable runs P2 and P3 to the media bay backplane as follows a Connect cable P2 into the bottom media bay module backplane power connector b Connect cable P3 into the top media bay module backplane connector c Bundle power cables P2 and P3 along with auxiliary cable P7 or P8 together with a grommet see Figure 154 d Insert the P2 P3 and auxiliary cable into the cable slot on the chassis secured with the grommet Upgrading to a redundant power supply Use the procedures in this section to upgrade a BCM400 main unit currently equipped with a standard power supply with a redundant power supply This section contains the following procedures N0060612 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 287 e Removing the PSU status connector jumper on page 287 e Installing a redundant power supply cage BCM400 only on page 288 e Removing a BCM400 redundant power supply cage on page 293 e Installing a power supply module on page 295 e Removing a power supply module on page 297 Figure 147 provides an overview of the steps required to upgrade your BCM400 system from a standard power supply to a redundant power supply Note A BCM expansion unit with a standard power supply cannot be upgraded You must replace the expansion unit
193. e at the top of the ATA2 see Figure 84 Figure 84 ATA2 back view Be o3 Mounting keyhole slots Test insertion loss measurement The maximum loss for ATA2 to Central Office CO configuration must not exceed 10 dB see Figure 85 on page 171 N0060612 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter 171 Figure 85 Insertion loss from the CO to the analog telephone BCM main unit ATA 2 Analog telephone Central Office cable loss SS Cable loss i BCM to ATA 2 5 ATA 2 to BCM 10 dB Max gt Longitudinal balance to ground 50 dB 60 to 4 000 Hz With IEEE 455 1976 test Overload level 3 dB Measure the total insertion loss between the CO and analog device by using standard dial up test lines with a transmission test set for example Hewlett Packard 4935A Transmission Test Set To measure the insertion loss from the CO to the analog device 1 Establish a connection to the 1 mW 1 kHz CO service line with an analog telephone attached to the ATA2 2 Ensure that the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms e Replace the analog telephone with the test set e Use RECEIVE 600 OHM HOLD mode on the test set 3 Ensure that the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the analog telephone
194. e container BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 266 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk To remove a hard disk from a standard configuration hard disk cage 1 Remove the standard hard disk cage from the main unit see Removing a hard disk cage on page 258 2 Unscrew the hard disk retainer screws from both sides of the standard hard disk cage see Figure 127 Place the retainer screws in a safe location 3 Remove the hard disk from the standard hard disk cage see Figure 127 A Place the hard disk on a flat clean and static free surface Figure 127 Remove the hard disk from the standard hard disk cage BCM200 Hard disk cage IDE connector and hard disk cage lift tab are at opposite ends 2 Remove hard disk from the hard disk cage Ki J BCM400 Hard disk cage IDE connector and hard disk cage lift tab are at the same end Removing a primary hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage Use this procedure to remove the primary hard disk from the RAID hard disk cage for the BCM200 and BCM400 system Use this procedure if you need to replace a faulty hard disk If a primary hard disk fails the mirror hard disk assumes control and service remains uninterrupted Nortel recommends that you replace the failed primary hard disk to retain full redundancy Replace the failed primary hard disk during a period of low call traffic Warning Protect the hardware components against damage
195. e failed mirror hard disk during a period of low call traffic If you choose to remove both the primary and mirror hard disks from the hard disk cage place an identifying mark on the primary hard disk to ensure correct installation Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 268 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk To remove a mirror hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage 1 Remove the RAID hard disk cage from the main unit or advanced function tray see Removing a hard disk cage on page 258 Disconnect the hard disk IDE connectors from the mirror hard disk and RAID card Unscrew the hard disk retainer screws from both sides of the RAID hard disk cage see Figure 129 Lift the mirror hard disk IDE ribbon cable to access the retainer screw Place the retainer screws in a Safe location 4 Remove the mirror hard disk from the RAID hard disk cage see Figure 129 Figure 129 Remove the mirror hard disk from the RAID hard disk cage 1 Disconnect the mirror hard disk IDE ribbon cable gt Disconnect the mirror hard disk retainer screws from the hard disk and RAID card EA N to access the hard disk SS retainer screws Slide the mirror hard disk out from BCM400 RAID shown the hard disk cage
196. e following e Examine the status report to determine which hard disk has the smaller capacity e Replace the smaller hard disk primary master or mirror master with a new hard disk of the correct size Equipment provided by Nortel assures correct hard disk capacity requirements Solid red e Drives are not in mirror mode Immediate action required e Missing or bad hard disk 1 or both Check the RAID operational status e Occurs on newly installed RAID card e Check hard disk power and data or hard disk first 10 min SSM connections nn process no action e Replace the hard disk if required a eh e Initialize the BCM system e SSM determined BCM is not initialized core software WAN MSC RAID disk mirroring The RAID configuration RAID 1 uses two hard disks One disk is called the primary master hard disk and the other is called the mirror master hard disk Disk mirroring is the process of ensuring the data from one hard disk is identical to the other Disk mirroring provides data redundancy and fault tolerance should one disk fail The mirror hard disk continues to function and the system operates without any loss of service if the primary master hard disk fails Similarly the primary master hard disk continues to function and the system operates without any loss of service if the mirror hard disk fails Over time configuration or load data on your system changes The system writes the new data to both disks s
197. e required Orange Channel activity read write Normal operation during disk mirror function no maintenance required Solid Red Drive not installed or failed Immediate action required e Check the RAID operational status e Check hard disk power and data connections e Replace the hard disk if required 2 Examine the mirror mode Status LED on the BCM400 advanced function tray faceplate Alternatively examine the hard disk cover access panel on the rear of the BCM200 Use Table 79 to interpret the operational state of the disk mirror function Perform any associated maintenance action if required Table 79 Status LED description Sheet 1 of 2 Status LED description Description Maintenance action Solid green Drives are in mirror mode Data is Normal operation no maintenance identical required Orange Copy or compare is in progress Normal operation no maintenance required N0060612 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting 221 Table 79 Status LED description Sheet 2 of 2 Status LED description Description Maintenance action Flashing green Drives may not be identical Indicates a data comparison fault For 3 5x version software and later the system automatically adapts for data mismatches and unequal hard disk capacity The system attempts a disk mirror rebuild The system continues to operate Nortel recommends that you perform th
198. e the base function tray from the main unit Ensure you do not pinch stretch or damage any cables If required remove the base function tray completely from the main unit see Removing the base function tray on page 234 7 Remove the base function tray bezel See To remove the base function tray bezel on page 237 8 At the front of the base function tray loosen and remove the PCI cover plate screw use a 2 Phillips screwdriver Figure 162 shows an interior view of the base function tray Place the screw in a safe location 9 Remove the PCI cover plate from the base function tray Place the PCI cover plate in a safe location 10 Use both hands to carefully hold the WAN card along the side edges Push the WAN card away from the PCI riser card connector Figure 162 Remove the WAN card and PCI cover plate Pa vn 5 Remove the WAN card AS 1 BP N Remove the PCI cover plate screw Pi PCI cover plate WAN card I 11 Remove the WAN card from the base function tray Place the card in a safe static free and clean location or container Installing the WAN card Use this procedure to install a replacement WAN card Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free co
199. ear the hard disk You can lose the information stored on the disk Shock can damage the hard disk Do not drop or hit the hard disk drive Warning You must remove all of the connections to the BCM main unit base function tray before you power the system down Failure to disconnect lines before power down can cause damage to the system Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Figure 122 provides an overview of the hard disk replacement process Figure 122 Hard disk replacement overview If possible do a software shutdown Set up unit for Restore unit to maintenance operation Remove the hard disk and replace Perform system with new disk initialization and a BRU data restore Test all functions N0060612 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 255 Installing a RAID system Use this procedure to upgrade an existing standard BCM200 or BCM400 single disk configuration to a RAID configuration To install a RAID system BoD Obtain the correct RAID field redundancy or upgrade components Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power source Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wri
200. ect the BCM expansion unit using a cable that varies in length BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 104 Chapter 7 Installing an expansion unit To connect the expansion unit to the main unit 1 Plug one end of the supplied DS256 cable into the DS256 connector on the expansion unit see Figure 61 Figure 61 DS256 connector on the expansion unit NORTEL NETWORKS DS256 connector 2 Plug the other end of the cable into the DS256 connector on the faceplate of the MSC in the BCM main unit see Figure 62 Figure 62 BCM main unit DS256 connector 008 m wm m oe Anes esas ERE ee Zu 800008 000008 0000000 0 DS256 connector N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 105 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM Use the procedures in this chapter to select and install the media bay modules MBM in BCM main unit and the expansion unit This chapter contains the following information e Selecting MBMs for your BCM system on page 105
201. ed metal surface on the BCM main unit Remove the RAID hard disk cage from the main unit or advanced function tray Refer to Removing a hard disk cage on page 258 Remove the faulty hard disk primary or mirror Refer to Removing a primary hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage on page 266 or Removing a mirror hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage on page 267 Install a new hard disk to replace the faulty hard disk For further information refer to Replacing a hard disk in the hard disk cage on page 265 Ensure the hard disk cables connect to the correct hard disk see caution Caution Use only Nortel approved replacement components Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts S Caution It is vital that you connect the correct IDE ribbon cables to the correct hard disks Connect the primary IDE ribbon cable to the primary hard disk Connect the mirror IDE ribbon cable to the mirror hard disk 9 Install the RAID hard disk cage in your system For further information refer to Installing a hard disk cage in a BCM200 main unit on page 262 or Installing a hard disk cage in a BCM400 main unit on page 263 10 Restore the BCM system to operation see Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 After bootup the system automatically detects the presence of a RAID configuration and begins the disk initialization and mirroring pr
202. ed with a RAID configuration BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 226 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting Monitor disk mirroring progress in tandem with the RAID LED status indicators Note The mirroring process can take up to 3 hours to complete The BCM system continues to operate normally during the disk mirroring process However because disk mirroring occupies computing resources Nortel recommends that you perform disk mirroring during a period of low call traffic Nortel recommends that you perform any system reboot only as required and at the beginning of the disk mirroring process To monitor disk mirroring 1 Open Element Manager after system boot up is complete 2 From the Administration tab click System Status and then click Disk Mirroring The Disk Mirroring screen displays see Figure 103 3 Select Reports and click Drive Status The progress indicator shows the current state of the mirroring process BCM system does not function The BCM system can experience a complete failure for any of the following reasons e Power supply failure e Incorrect power supply connections e AC power failure Emergency telephone does not function If the emergency telephone is connected to the system refer to To troubleshoot the emergency telephone on the system on page 226 If the emergency telephone is connected to the CTM refer to To troubleshoot the emergency telephone
203. ed with the rack mount bracket Do not replace the screws Other screws can damage the unit 4 Align the screw holes between the BCM main unit and the left rack mount bracket 5 Fasten the bracket to the main unit using four screws Refer to Figure 51 Figure 52 or Figure 53 Note Rack mount bracket The expansion unit rack mount bracket has an additional set of holes that allows you to install the brackets so that the expansion unit sits flush with the BCM main unit in an equipment rack Figure 51 Attach the rack mount bracket to the BCM200 main unit amp Install rack mount bracket screws BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 94 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit Figure 52 Attach the rack mount bracket to the BCM400 main unit ae es Install rack mount bracket screws y U 77 J TU To mount the main unit in an equipment rack Determine the location in the rack where you want to install the main unit Position the main unit in the rack Have an assistant hold the main unit Align the holes in the rack mount bracket with the holes in the equipment rack rails A OO N Fasten the rack mount brackets to the rack using the four supplied screws see Figure 54 Figure 55 or Figure 56 N0060612 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit 95 Figure 54 Fasten the BCM200 main unit to an equipment rack
204. een and follow the instructions to download After BCM Element Manager has finished downloading double click the application and follow the instructions to install N0060612 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 195 To connect to the BCM system N Oo f Open BCM Element Manager From the Network menu select New Network Element and then select Business Communications Manager Enter the BCM system IP address the username and password the default is are shown below IP address 10 10 10 1 Username nnadmin Password PlsChgMe Click OK From the Network Elements folder select the BCM system IP address Make sure that the correct username and password are entered Click Connect You are now connected to the BCM system For more information on using BCM Element Manager refer to the online Help within BCM Element Manager Configuring the initial parameters Use the following procedures to configure the initial parameters for the BCM system using BCM Element Manager To enter a keycode To configure the LAN IP address To configure the modem on page 196 To configure the startup template for telephony services on page 197 To initialize voice mail on page 197 To enter a keycode A WO N From the Configuration tab click the System folder to expand it Select Keycodes The Keycodes panel opens Click Connect to Nortel Keycode Retrieval System
205. een Solid green Reboot complete and system is functional Note You can safely remove USB device Note 1 If you use Element Manager to configure the parameters the overall times are similar Startup Profile enables you to configure multiple parameters at once rather than individually using Element Manager Note 2 To re apply the Startup Profile remove the applied keycode file by returning the system to factory defaults using the BIT tool Next step After you have loaded the Startup Profile you can complete the installation process Refer to Completing the initial installation optional on page 211 for more information BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 210 Chapter 17 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters N0060612 Chapter 18 Completing the initial installation optional 211 Chapter 18 Completing the initial installation optional This section provides information on completing the initial installation of your BCM system These options are described for informative purposes and do not have to be completed Figure 97 shows an overview of completing the initial installation Figure 97 Overview of completing the initial installation Complete the initial installation Configure media bay module s Configure modem settings Check for software updates Configure voicemail Customize security policies Perform a backup BCM2
206. elect the Global Settings tab Select the regional profile from the Modem Region dropdown list for your region Select the Enable modem checkbox to enable the modem For more information on modem configuration refer to the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide N0060612 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 197 To configure the startup template for telephony services Note This procedure erases all the telephony programming that is currently on gt the BCM system Select Reset A OO N From the Administration tab click the Utilities folder to expand it Click Cold Reset Telephony Services The Cold Reset Telephony dialog box opens Configure the Cold Reset Telephony attributes see Table 67 Table 67 Cold Reset Telephony attributes Attribute Description Region Specify the startup region Template Specify the startup template Start DN Specify the startup DN The default is 221 Force MSC Download Select the checkbox to enable a forced download of the modified information 5 Click Ok To initialize voice mail 1 From the Configuration tab click Applications folder to expand it Select Voice Messaging Contact Center Click Launch CallPilot Manager The Quick Install Wizard form opens If your voice mail system is already initialized you will not see the Quick Install Wizard Instead you will see the CallPilot Manager Main Menu web page
207. er plate PCI cover screw Modem card interface f A I Yo re PCI Riser Vie card A mr ar DDR Annnnnnnnn an N 5 WED EUER hot ka N ZT A WwW DI Modem card PR Main card N0060612 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 301 Figure 161 Card replacement overview If possible do a software shutdown Perform BCM maintenance shutdown Remove the base function tray Remove the old card Install the new card in the same slot Insert the base function tray Restore unit to operation Check LEDs END To remove the WAN card Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge S Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray Remove the main unit top cover Refer to Removing the main unit top cover on page 244 a fF Q N Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 302 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 6 Partially remov
208. ervision There are two auxiliary jacks on this MBM which connect to Line 1 and Line 5 The auxiliary ports enable you to connect to a V 92 or V 90 modem fax machine or analog telephone When the auxiliary device is active the BCM system disables the associated line Conversely when the line is active the auxiliary port line is disabled When you connect an analog telephone to the auxiliary port you can use it as an emergency telephone because this line remains active during a power outage Figure 28 shows the front of the CTM4 and CTM8 Figure 28 CTM4 and CTM8 module faceplate LEDS and connectors N Front View CTM 4 8 7 6 Aux 5 CTM 8 z 1 Aux 2 3 4 2 Power LED Status LED Line 1 Aux Line 2 Line 1 R N Line 3 Auxiliary port B Line 4 gt Z Auxiliary port Line 5 Basic rate interface media bay module The basic rate interface media bay module BRIM connects a maximum of four BRI ISDN loops to the BCM system The BRIM only recognizes the T interface used in European networks To use the BRIM with the U interface typical in North American networks you require an external NT1 box to convert the U interface to a T interface BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 56 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Each BRI ISDN loop you connect adds two telephone l
209. es Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes trunk ans Restriction Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Restriction N A 999 N A N A 112 N A global overrides 112 990 Restriction filter 0 0 0800 1 0 N A N A 0 1 1800 01 1 1800 1 1800 1877 1877 1877 1888 Service modes 1888 1888 911 911 911 911 911 911 9411 976 9411 976 9411 976 1976 1976 1976 1 976 1 976 1 976 1900 1900 1900 1 900 1 900 1 900 5551212 5551212 5551212 Restriction filter N A 010 1 00 N A N A N A N A 05 Restriction filter N A i N A N A N A N A 06 Routing service Off Off Off Off Off Off mode Routing service No No No No No No overflow Public DN Public DN Default 7 Default 8 Default 7 Default 25 Default 7 Default 7 lengths 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 00 12 00 17 00 12 00 12 01 17 1 3 9 3 01 17 01 17 011 18 011 18 011 18 1 11 1 11 1 11 411 3 411 3 411 3 911 3 911 3 911 3 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 364 Appendix G Market profile attributes Table 99 Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland PRC Unknown Variable Variable N A Variable Variable Variable number length Public OLI Local number Variable Variable 7 Variable Variable Variable length National
210. es a list of formats based on language or country Table 95 Time date formats based on language Language country Time date format Danish 2001 01 01 13 57 Dutch 1 Jan 01 13 57 EuroFrench 1 jan 13 57 EuroSpanish 1 Ene 13 57 Brazil German 1 Jan 13 57 Italian 1 Gen 13 57 NA English Jani 1 57 pm NA French 2001 01 01 13 57 NA Spanish Ene 1 1 57pm Norwegian 1 Jan 13 57 Swedish 2001 01 01 13 57 Turkish 1 Ock 13 57 UK English 1 Jan 1 57 pm Language support for South America and Central America Table 96 shows the language support for South American and Central American countries Table 96 South Central America language support Language Country Anguilla Bermuda Montserrat Suriname Antigua Cayman Islands St Kitts Turks and Enak Aruba Curacao St Lucia Gaios g Bahamas Dominica St Maarten Trinidad Barbados Grenada St Thomas USVI Belize Guyana St Vincent French Haiti Argentina Dominican Republic Jamaica Puerto Rico Bolivia El Salvador Mexico Peru Spanish Chile Ecuador Nicaragua Uruguay Columbia Guatemala Panama Venezuela Costa Rica Honduras Paraguay Portuguese Brazil N0060612 Appendix G Market profile attributes 355 Caller ID display formats The Caller ID function is supported on telephones that provide a display window Caller ID formats consist of the name and number of the calling party For further information on compatible telephones
211. eshooting cooling TANG ss 334 Appendix A DTM Wing CHA 0450er 335 Appendix B BRIM wiring chafl auanananaanan anna 337 Appendix C GATM wiring CHAN 666 ce cc ce 0000 eher 339 Appendix D 2X16 wiring CHANG 60s sce ceed nora Onde eke aan 343 Appendix E DSM16 and DSM32 wiring chartS 000 22 cece eee eee 347 Appendix F ASM8 ASM8 and GASM8 wiring chart 0 000ee eee eeee 349 Appendix G Market profile attributes 00 c cece eee eee 351 Media bay module availabilty en u bdGekar ee Pebee Res 351 FEM MBM Norstar trunk cartridge combinations 0 000 e eee eee 352 Time zones and language information 00220 e eee eee eee 353 Time and date format based on language 2 0 e eee eee 353 Language support for South America and Central America 354 Galler ID display TOUHAG ars 355 Core parameters for market profiles nauan annaa 355 Global analog trunk parameters 0 000 eects 368 GASWS parameta oats aan bac a ERS EMCEE a a KREME OGRE ORE RSS 371 ISON NING SOMERS 2ocscae decease ra ist 374 Analog and digital tunk types unse ees en u br nEn ERRENA KER 375 NEX rrr Tr ree ree ere er eT ree Te rere ee er ree 377 N0060612 17 Regulatory information Refer to the following sections for regulatory information on the BCM system e North American regulatory information e International regulatory information on page 22 North American regulat
212. et Start DN Telephony Services Voice mail Feature 983 Configuration gt Voice Mail Startup e Attendant DN Applications gt Voice Messaging Contact Center e Ulstyle e Language e From Line e To Line e Number of rings User account e Telset user ID numeric e Telset password numeric Feature 9 8 gt User Accounts Configuration gt Administrator Access gt Accounts and Privileges gt View by Accounts tab User Account N0060612 Chapter 14 Configuring the BCM system 185 Startup parameters overview The startup parameters are the remaining required parameters that cannot be configured using Telset Administration These parameters must be configured using Element Manager or the Startup Profile See Table 65 for a list of the startup parameters Table 65 Startup parameters Sheet 1 of 2 e Community string e Type of access Administrator Access gt SNMP gt Community strings tab Parameters Telset Administration Element Manager Startup Profile System N A Configuration gt System gt System e System name Identification ID set automatically System N A Configuration gt System gt System e System ID Keycodes View ID it is set automatically and cannot be changed Time N A Configuration gt System gt Time e Date and Time source Date and Time e NTP server address e Date and time e Time zone DHCP server N A Configura
213. et profile attributes This section describes some of the differences in the market profile attributes These attributes are based on the market profile that you select when you configure the system Each market profile is designed using a set of system attributes that provide specific functionality for the geographical area in which the system is deployed This section covers the following main topics e Media bay module availability on page 351 e FEM MBM Norstar trunk cartridge combinations on page 352 e Time zones and language information on page 353 e Core parameters for market profiles on page 355 e Global analog trunk parameters on page 368 e GASM8 parameters on page 371 e ISDN line services on page 374 e Analog and digital trunk types on page 375 Media bay module availability Some of the media bay modules MBM are customized for a specific region and are not available to all market profiles Table 93 provides a list of market profiles and MBMs available within each market profile The symbols in the chart are defined as follows vY indicates full support The MBM is available and is localized in the market profile indicates that functionality and support is limited The MBM is available in the market profile but is not localized Table 93 Media bay module availability by market profile Sheet 1 of 2 DSM16 ASM CTM4 GATM4
214. f Prime PBX gt Busy Prime PBX gt Busy Busy Prime busy setting DID gt DID gt Prime Prime Companding A law A law mu law A law A law A law law DTI carrier type E1 E1 T1 E1 E1 E1 System settings Number of rings 1 2 1 2 2 1 ina cycle M7000 set Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes supported Default delay 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring Hunt groups cycles cycles cycles cycles cycles cycles Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busytone Busytone Busytone Busy tone Busy tone Mode Broadcast Sequential Broadcast Sequential Sequential Broadcast N0060612 Appendix G Market profile attributes 363 Table 99 Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland PRC Night Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 08 00 End 07 00 Service times Evening Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 00 00 Start 17 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 00 00 End 23 00 Lunch Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 00 00 Start 12 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 00 00 End 13 00 Ringing service Off Manual Off Manual Off Off mode Ringing service Y
215. ff Off Off Off Off service mode Restriction N A N A N A N A N A N A global overrides Restriction filter N A N A 0 N A 00 170 N A 01 1 1800 172 173 1877 1747 1760 Service modes 1888 1761 1766 911 911 1770 1771 9411 976 1772 1775 1976 1778 1783 1 976 1788 900 1900 1 900 5551212 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A N A 05 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A N A 06 Routing service Off Off Off Off Off Off mode Routing service No No No No No No overflow Public DN Public DN Default 25 Default 25 Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 25 lengths 0 11 0 11 00 12 00 12 01 17 01 17 011 18 011 18 1 11 1 11 411 3 411 3 911 3 911 3 Unknown Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable number length Public OLI Local number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length National Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable number length Handsfree Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Pickup group None None None None None None Sereapabiliies Toy redirect lDisabled gt Disabled Disabled Disabied Disabled Disabled Call forward Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled delay 4 4 4 4 4 4 N0060612 Appendix G Market profile attributes 361 Table 98 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile
216. flicts The default address for the BCM system is e IP address 10 10 10 1 e Subnet 255 255 255 0 If the default IP address will create a network conflict you must change the IP address of the BCM system before you connect any network connections To change the IP address outside of a network you can use a computer and an Ethernet crossover cable or a terminal and a null modem cable Refer to Using the Ethernet crossover cable on page 178 or Connecting through the serial port on page 179 for detailed instructions about connecting to the BCM system Connecting the cards The data networking hardware MSC is installed in the BCM main unit at the factory All systems have dual embedded Ethernet interfaces Some models come with an embedded V 92 modem WAN cards and modems are ordered separately Figure 79 shows a BCM200 configuration with a field installed WAN card Figure 79 Main unit ports and connectors DB26 connector female WAN card field upgrade North America version Media services card Modem port North COM Ethernet USB BCM200 version America only port ports ports Note Your system may not have all the cards indicated A Warning Do not plug the WAN or modem cables into the system unless it is running For maintenance shutdowns refer to Performing a system shutdown on page 231 N00606
217. fore you handle components Always place the components in a static free container To remove a BCM200 cooling fan Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 4 Remove the top cover from the main unit see Installing the main unit top cover on page 246 5 Disconnect the I O card fan cable connection see Figure 184 on page 330 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 330 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan Figure 184 Disconnect the BCM200 fan cable from the I O card aaa WON KAA AA gt ADJ ssseesssee C Be Disconnect from h O Card single fan fan 1 Main Card 6 Remove the fan at the rear of the main unit see Figure 185 a Remove the snap rivets that hold the fan to the mai
218. from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container N0060612 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 267 To remove a primary hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage 1 Remove the RAID hard disk cage from the main unit see Removing a hard disk cage on page 258 Disconnect the hard disk IDE connector from the primary hard disk Unscrew the hard disk retainer screws from both sides of the RAID hard disk cage see Figure 128 Place the retainer screws in a safe location 4 Remove the primary hard disk from the RAID hard disk cage see Figure 128 Figure 128 Remove the primary hard disk from the RAID hard disk cage Remove the primary hard disk retainer screws 4 Disconnect the primary hard disk IDE ribbon cable from _ the primary hard disk IDE connector N Ca gt BCM400 RAID shown Mirror hard disk ribbon cable 3 N Remove the primary hard disk from _ the hard disk cage 5 Place the primary hard disk on a flat clean and static free surface Removing a mirror hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage Use this procedure to remove the mirror hard disk from the RAID hard disk cage for the BCM200 and BCM400 system Use this procedure if you need to replace a faulty mirror hard disk Nortel recommends that you replace the failed mirror hard disk to retain full redundancy Replace th
219. fsets on a DS30 bus You assign the first offset to the MBM and the second offset is automatically selected This means that you can choose offset pairs 0 1 1 2 or 2 3 Because the MBM requires two offsets on the same DS30 you cannot select offset 3 Refer to CTM switch settings on page 123 Not all MBMs are available to all systems Refer to Selecting MBMs for your BCM system on page 105 for specifics about each MBM Note Remember if you have chosen a 3 5 bus split for your system DS30 bus 7 is no longer available for MBMs N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 115 Choosing the assigned order for MBMs Assign the MBMs and DS30 buses in the order shown in Figure 68 on page 115 Station MBMs are assigned starting with DS30 2 This allows telephones to start numbering from the system Start DN the default is 221 Trunk MBMs are assigned starting at DS30 7 in a system with a 2 6 DS30 split and at DS30 6 ina system with a 3 5 split The exception to this is the 4x16 and the DDIM which require two DS30 buses that must be set to a DS30 that has the next bus open Figure 68 Assigning single density MBMs to the DS30 bus hierarchy After you choose your MBMs choose where to assign them on the DS30 buses 6 DSM 3 Example of North American Example of a European based DS30 DN ass
220. g signal to an external paging amplifier customer supplied Music on hold jack The BCM system uses the music on hold input to connect an external music source that supplies a signal to held lines music on hold or telephone speakers background music The input source can be any available radio or music source approved for connection to the network For directions on setting up these features refer to Installing optional telephony equipment on page 173 Warning External equipment connected to the auxiliary ringer page relay page output IN and music on hold interfaces must use safety extra low voltage SELV All four interfaces are SELV and the external equipment connected to these interfaces must be SELV If these interfaces are not SELV you must use external line isolation units LIU N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 43 MSC IP call processing hardware If your system requires a high volume of IP telephones or more IP trunks than the standard eight trunks you can switch a DS30 bus setting on the MSC from providing service for an MBM to providing digital processing service for additional IP telephones and trunks To ensure adequate data flow from the system you can increase the number of PEC III cards BCM200 can have maximum of two cards BCM400 can have a maximum of four e DS30 buses DS30 buses contain internal communication paths Each DS30 bus provides up to 32 signali
221. ge 77 Note If the hard disk fails completely in a standard configuration the system either fails to respond or performs a software shutdown Replace the hard disk and perform a backup using the backup and restore utility BRU See Using the backup and restore utility on page 248 The system status monitor indicator shows hard disk access activity A flashing green indicator signifies normal disk access activity N0060612 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting 219 To monitor hard disk status 1 Open Element Manager 2 From the Administration tab click System Status and then click LED Status The LED Status screen appears see Figure 101 Figure 101 LED Status screen Task Navigation Panel Configuration Administration E General B A System Status shar POWER WE EL status m nia E Nic E 005 Monitor UPS Status NTP Metrics Interface Metrics msc E yoo E Disk Mirroring so QoS Metrics Telephony Metrics E Utilities E Backup and Restore io p Refresh Software Management aa LED Status nia E Temp E Fans m FE ee 3 Verify that the indicator shows normal access to the hard disk flashing green light If the hard disk fails in a single hard disk configuration a system shutdown is either imminent in progress or complete Replace the hard disk see Replacing a hard disk in the hard disk cage on page 265 Monitoring the R
222. guide pin see Figure 165 Figure 165 Modem card pin locking clip Compress modem guide pin locking clip Modem card Main card 16 Grasp the modem card edges with your fingertips Carefully pull the modem card away from the main card Place the modem card in a clean safe and static free location 17 Disconnect the modem cable from the main card and RJ 11 interface 18 Unfasten the modem RJ 11 interface screws Place the screws in a safe location Figure 166 Modem card positioning Base function tray interior view Modem RJ 11 ___ Modem RJ 11 interface interface connection Modem card connection to main card U e nn N0060612 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 309 19 Unfasten the modem RJ 11 interface mounting screws Place the screws in a safe location 20 Remove the modem RJ 11 interface from the base function tray 21 Carefully grasp the modem card guide pin and remove it Place the pin in a safe location 22 Remove the modem card Installing the modem card Use this procedure to install a modem card in a base function tray This procedure assumes the base function tray is not installed in the main unit Note Before you power down the system to remove the base function tray confirm that the CallPilot region of operation information is correct 1 From the Configur
223. gure 78 GATM pin outs GATM Line Pin Wire color module 26 White Blue f 1 Blue Whit por 1R ue White nen 26T 27 White Orange Line 2 2R 2 Both En 27T 2 Orange White 28T No 28 3 connection 29 4 30 White Slate 3 Both 5 Slate White 31 Red Blue 4 Both 6 Blue Red No 32 7 connection 33 8 34 Red Brown 5 GATM8 9 Brown Red 35 Red Slate 6 GATM8 10 Slate Red No 36 11 connection 37 12 38 Black Green 7 GATM8 13 Green Black 39 Black Brown 8 GATM8 14 Brown Black No 40 15 to connection 49 24 50 Violet Slate Aux Both 25 Slate Violet Wiring MBMs to internal connections After you wire the trunk MBMs you can install the wiring to the station MBMs These are the MBMs that connect to the internal telephone sets All station MBM wiring uses 25 pair cable with a female amphenol connector at the MBM end Note DSM 32 MBMs require two 25 pair cables N0060612 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 145 To connect the DSM16 DSM32 ASM8 GASMB8 or 4x16 MBMs 1 Wire 16 wire pairs from the amphenol connector to the local connecting blocks so they connect to the 16 station sets you want connected to this MBM Note Use 16 wire pairs from each connector for the DSM 32 Note If you are connecting a DSM16 4x16 or DSM32 use Table 48 If you are connecting an ASM8 or GASM8
224. half of the DS30 bus to expand the number of extensions to 32 e DSM32 supports 32 digital telephones through two RJ 21 connectors A DSM32 operating in single density mode occupies two DS30 buses Set the double density switch to enable the DSM to carry 32 extensions over a single DS30 bus Note Devices that share a DS30 bus must be similar Use two DSM16 gt module in double density mode on a single DS30 bus Do not mix a DSM16 module with aDSM32 module over a single DS30 bus Figure 31 DSM faceplate LEDs and connectors DSM 16 DSM 32 u e o e leE el e I 4 3 C Power Status Power Status BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 58 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 4x16 media bay module The 4x16 media bay module MBM provides both analog trunk connections and connections to digital telephones The 4x16 MBM provides connections for four analog trunk lines and 16 digital telephones Each of the four analog trunk lines support caller ID and disconnect supervision An auxiliary port next to the Line 1 port enables you to use an analog telephony device such as a modem fax or telephone to share the trunk Figure 32 shows the 4x16 MBM The 4x16 MBM has one RJ 21 connector and five RJ 11 connectors on the faceplate Figure 32 4x16 faceplate LEDS and connectors elli ia eee Power Status Lin Modem Analog station media bay modules The analog
225. hanges this value is overwritten Use caution when changing this value BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 200 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters Table 70 Subnets General Settings attributes Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Description WINS node type Allows you to specify a client s WINS node type The BCM system automatically sets this value to H node on all DHCP clients This setting configures the DHCP client PCs to use P node name resolution before resorting to B node name resolution This is efficient when a WINS server is configured for the network The BCM system also includes a WINS server Note Use caution if you change this attribute Default gateway Allows you to specify the IP address of the default next hop router BCM automatically assigns the value for this parameter If the IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes this value is overwritten Use caution when changing this value Lease time Allows you to specify the time in seconds for an address assignment until the client s lease expires The default is 259200 seconds 72 hours 8 Click the IP Terminal DHCP Options tab 9 Configure the DHCP server attributes see Table 71 Table 71 DHCP server IP Terminal DHCP Options attributes Attribute Description VLAN identifiers Allows you to specify the Virtual LAN VLAN ID numbers that are give
226. harge gt Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container 1 Ensure you have a current data backup of your system see Using the backup and restore utility on page 248 Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 5 Completely remove the base function tray from the main unit see Removing the base function tray on page 234 Ensure you do not pinch stretch or damage any cables 6 Grasp the top edge of the PEC you want to remove and it pull out Place the PEC in a safe and static free container Refer to Figure 170 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 314 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware Figure 170 Remove the processor expansion card PEC Ill a f Processor expansion card Installing a processor expansion card PEC When you replace or add PECs ensure you follow the directions for shutting down the system Ensure you have a current data backup of your system This procedure assumes the base function tray is completely removed from the main unit Warning Possible data loss Ensure that you do not touch the PEC casing to any of the components on the MSC This may cause shorting which can erase
227. he BCM system using an Ethernet crossover cable see Using the Ethernet crossover cable on page 178 or through the serial port Connecting through the serial port on page 179 Warning Before using the default address on your network check with your system A administrator If this address conflicts with the LAN settings you can cause network damage if you connect to the network without changing the IP address BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 178 Chapter 13 Initializing the system If you must change the IP address due to a conflict with your network connect to the BCM system using an Ethernet crossover cable see Using the Ethernet crossover cable on page 178 through the serial port see Connecting through the serial port on page 179 or change the IP address using Telset Administration Using the Ethernet crossover cable You use an Ethernet crossover cable connected to a computer with a network card to connect your computer to the LAN card in the BCM main unit With this connection you can use Element Manager to configure the BCM system when you are unable to immediately connect your system to the LAN card or your system does not have a network connection You use this type of connection in these situations e The computer you are using does not have access to the BCM system through the network e The BCM system is not connected to a LAN or WAN e You have to change the IP a
228. he MBM has a single connector that provides signaling channels media channels and power to the MBM This connector plugs into the MBM backplane in the main unit or expansion unit Some MBMs also have a cooling fan that runs off the MBM power source Figure 26 shows the rear views of the two types of MBMs N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 53 Figure 26 MBM connectors rear view Signaling media and power connector Signaling media and power connector This section provides information on the following telephony MBMs e Trunk media bay modules MBMs on page 53 e Station media bay modules MBMs on page 56 e Specialized media bay modules MBMs on page 61 Trunk media bay modules MBMs You install the trunk MBMs in the BCM main unit or the BCM expansion unit Trunk MBMs connect telecommunications lines to the BCM system The type of MBM you install is determined by e which lines are available from your telephone service provider e what lines you require for the types of telephones you want to use e budget considerations Table 8 lists the types of trunk MBMs that are available for the BCM system Table 8 Trunk MBMs Sheet 1 of 2 MBM What it does Special notes DTM see Digital trunk media bay module on page 54 Connects digital public switched telephone lines to the BCM system Install in the BCM main unit only DTMs do not f
229. he station remains on hook after the disconnect signal the ASM8 disconnects the station equipment from the network without returning a tone to it TIA EIA 464 section 5 4 10 2 5 1 After the station equipment goes on hook the ASM8 station interface is restored to on hook idle It is important to ensure that the device application or interface card connected to an ASM8 station interface conform to these on hook and off hook conditions The ASM ASM8 ASM8 and GASMS each have one RJ 21 connector on the faceplate Figure 33 on page 59 shows the GASMB8 Figure 33 GASMS faceplate LEDs and connectors GASM Ono ing Power Status em The ringer equivalency number REN per port for ASM8 is 1 the REN for ASM8 and GASM8 is 2 the REN of the interface to which the device is connected Note The termination of the analog interface can consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed Table 10 shows the specifications for ATA2 ASM8 ASM8 GASMS and global analog station interface GAS Table 10 ATA2 ASM8 ASM8 GASM and GASI analog device specifications Sheet 1 of 2 Specification ATA2 ASM8 ASM8 GASM8 GASI Ringing frequency 20 Hz 1 Hz 20 Hz 1 Hz 20 Hz 1 Hz 20 Hz 1 Hz 20 Hz 1 Hz North America Ringing frequency 25 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 1 Hz Europe
230. hen use a USB storage device to transfer the Startup Profile data to the BCM main unit Loading the Startup Profile increases the time for the BCM system to boot depending on the selected parameters For example if you apply a keycode using the Startup Profile the BCM system might reboot which can add up to 30 minutes to the total time However if your selected parameters do not require a reboot as little as 5 extra minutes are added to the total time for the system to become operational If you decide to configure these parameters using Element Manager the overall time required for system reboots and applying the parameters are the same When the Startup Profile is successfully applied the BCM system automatically reboots to complete the system configuration The Startup Profile is not fully loaded until the system reboots Figure 96 shows an overview of using the Startup Profile Figure 96 Overview of using the Startup Profile Use the Startup Profile to set the basic parameters Check the prerequisites Customize a Startup Profile for your system Load the Startup Profile onto the system BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 206 Chapter 17 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters Note The USB storage device must be formatted for the FAT32 file system If necessary reformat the USB storage device by plugging it into the USB port of your computer right clicking the USB device
231. her with one fan or a redundant fan set The single fan unit is not upgradeable Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge S Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container To remove an expansion unit fan 1 Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 2 Disconnect the fan power cable from the hub card Note If the unit has redundant fans each fan has a connector on the hub board 3 Locate the screws that fasten the fan casing to the expansion unit back wall and remove them Refer to Figure 187 on page 333 and Figure 188 on page 333 Remove the four screws or snap rivets that hold the fan to the expansion unit Lift the failed fan out of the expansion unit N0060612 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan 333 Figure 187 Fan screws location in expansion unit 2 0 models Fan connector on hub board Screws attached to fan Figure 188 Fan screws location in expansion unit 2 5 redundancy models Fan connectors S 5 on hub board f o oO S Mf o o Bo NNNNYZ ge VY 117 gt IAR N gt u Load resistor module Screws attached to fan BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 334 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan Installing an expansion unit fan Warning
232. hooting This chapter describes monitoring and troubleshooting options to determine the operational status of or cause of malfunctions in the BCM hardware This section describes the following troubleshooting topics and issues e System status display LEDs on page 216 e Monitoring media bay module LEDs on page 217 e Monitoring the RAID LEDs on page 219 e RAID disk mirroring on page 221 e Monitoring or configuring disk mirror settings using Element Manager on page 222 e BCM system does not function on page 226 e Emergency telephone does not function on page 226 e ATA2 does not function on page 227 Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the main unit Read and follow installation instructions carefully Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container NZ Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Use Element Manager or remote access interfaces in conjunction with the faceplate LEDs to determine the operational state of the system hardware components Hardware problems are indicated by the following e The LEDs on the BCM base function tray advanced function tray RAID upgrade or the media bay modules MBMs do not display normal operational status e The BCM system does no
233. ied the Startup Profile does not function This condition prevents overwriting of the parameters of a configured system To re apply the Startup Profile remove the applied keycode file by returning the system to factory defaults using the BIT tool 3 Remove the USB storage device from the USB port on the BCM main unit See Table 76 for the appropriate point in the sequence to remove the USB storage device N0060612 Chapter 17 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 209 Note Make sure the bootup sequence is complete before removing the USB storage device from the BCM system Startup Profile times and LED sequence The Startup Profile is now loaded on your BCM system Table 76 provides details about the BCM system boot times and LED sequence using the Startup Profile to configure system parameters Table 76 Startup Profile times and LED sequence Cummulative Duration time minutes minutes Power LED Status LED Comments 2 2 Solid green Flashing green 4 6 Solid red off 2 8 Solid green Solid green Initial boot sequence complete 30 38 Solid red Solid green Startup Profile functioning Duration varies depending on selected parameters 2 40 Solid green Flashing green Startup Profile is successfully applied Off error If there is an error the remaining steps are not completed 4 44 Solid red off Duration varies based on selected parameters 2 46 Solid gr
234. ignment based setup setup buses begins with Start DN default 221 2 Station MBMs are assigned 2 starting at the top DS30 2 of DSM 32 e the available MBM DS30 buses 3 DSM 32 3 A __ 7 Renae r Ea DSM 16 CM E Trunk MBMs are assigned m 5 starting with the last 5 available MBM DS30 bus DS30 5 supports the BRI DS30 6 or 7 depending on station part of the 4x16 E the bus split in effect 6 Exception a 4x16 or a DDIM 6 BRI cannot be assigned to the last DS30 bus DSM 32 E Ta 7 DECT Lines start at 61 on DS30 7 ETETA 3 5 bus split DS30 7 is not available to any MBM if your system has been configured with a 3 5 bus split MBMs that require two DS30 buses such as the DSM32 and the 4x16 must be assigned to DS30s higher than 6 to accommodate all the resource requirements BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 116 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM Determining MBM DIP switch settings Assign DIP switch settings before you install an MBM The DIP switches are located on the back or underside of the MBM Note Fiber expansion module FEM switches The switches on the fiber expansion module FEM do not work in the same way as those of the trunk or station MBMs On the FEM the switches turn the fiber ports on and off For information about setting the switches on an FEM refer to FEM switch settings on page 133 To determine MBM DIP swi
235. ility controller DMC In turn the DMC is wired to a digital module on the BCM200 main unit the BCM400 main unit or the BCM expansion unit Depending on the mobility configuration you can have up to 64 sets assigned to your system These handsets have a two line display with display keys that allow user interaction with system prompts Otherwise their function emulates the 7100 digital phones Refer to the Nortel Digital Mobility System Installation and Configuration Guide for details N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 75 Note Nortel provides limited support for legacy Norstar telephones Accessories The following accessories can be used with the BCM system Station auxiliary power supply SAPS provides power for the OKIMs when the 7316E is connected to five or more KIMs It can also be used to extend the loop length between a telephone or terminal and the BCM system from 1000 to 2600 feet You must use a dedicated cable to connect the two locations Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA2 converts digital signals to analog signals to allow communication with analog devices such as fax machines modems and answering machines The ATA2 supports a maximum transmission rate of 28 8 kbit s With a single line telephone the ATA2 supports a long loop configuration BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 76 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware N0060612 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM s
236. imes and LED sequence 0000 ee eee eee eee 209 Chapter 18 Completing the initial installation optional 00005 211 Configuring the media bay module 000 cece eee eee 212 Configuring modem settings an en ERAS 213 Checking for software updates 2 can cee tee 213 San lolilglate VOCE Mal EHE EU 213 Customizing security policis 2 242120 ra ee aaa 213 Performing a backup cc cn ee 08er er ae ib a ie 214 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 14 Contents Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting 2000eeeeeeee 215 System status display LEDS au ne a Swe 216 Monitoring media bay module LEDs 2 000 eee 217 Monitoring standard configuration hard disk status using Element Manager 218 Monon ne RAID LEDS ers en 219 RAID disk WONG runs nee en ia ORR RR EoD 221 Monitoring or configuring disk mirror settings using Element Manager 222 Accessing disk mirroring through Element Manager 005 222 Monitoring RAID disk mirror operational status using Element Manager 224 Accessing the RAID status report using Element Manager 225 Monitoring disk mirroring using Element Manager 00005 225 BCM system does not function 0 0c eee 226 Emergency telephone does not function 000 cece eee 226 ATAZ does nal function 2655 2 cncc cee nennen czar rer eee cams 227 Chapter
237. imultaneously Note Under some conditions the system will halt operating if a hard disk fails during a read write to the operating system O S portion of the hard disk To continue operation reboot the system The RAID configuration disk replacement scenarios are as follows BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 222 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting e Ifyou replace a RAID hard disk on site the BCM system status monitor service automatically detects the presence of a RAID device The system copies the data from the programmed disk to the blank replacement disk In this case the programmed hard disk is the mirror master e If you replace a RAID primary master disk on site the mirror master disk acts as the primary data source mirror master The system status monitor service identifies the new blank primary master disk and instructs the RAID to copy the data from the mirror master disk to the primary master disk In this case the mirror master hard disk is the mirror master Use one of the following two methods to access the disk mirror functions e Monitoring or configuring disk mirror settings using Element Manager on page 222 e BCM system does not function on page 226 The disk mirror function allows you to e monitor RAID card operational status e monitor disk operational status e monitor disk mirror status e change a standard hard disk configuration to a RAID configuration
238. ines to the BCM system Therefore each BRIM adds a maximum of eight lines to the BCM system through the four RJ 48C jacks on the faceplate The LEDs beside each RJ 48C jack are on when the ISDN line is active Figure 29 on page 56 shows the BRIM faceplate LEDs and connections Figure 29 BRIM faceplate ISDN BRI S T Interface Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 3 Loop 4 el J A ol J A Power Status Global analog trunk media bay module The global analog trunk media bay module GATM provides an interface for four or eight analog public switched telephone network PSTN lines The GATM supports both pulse and tone dialing as well as caller ID and disconnect supervision in selected markets throughout the world The GATM uses an RJ 21 connector as the trunk interface Figure 30 shows the GATM faceplate LEDs and RJ 21 connector The GATM is available either in four port GATMA4 or eight port GATMS8 configurations Figure 30 GATM faceplate GATM e IIl ee el Power Status Station media bay modules MBMs Station MBM connect telephones and analog telecommunication devices to the BCM system Table 9 lists the available station MBMs Table 9 Station MBMs Sheet 1 of 2 58 Combination of a CTM4 and a DSM16 public switched telephone lines to the see 4x16 media bay module on page BCM system MBM What it does Special notes DSM16 DSM32 Connects a maximum
239. ing MBMs Determine trunk Determine which and extension DS30 buses are requirements available Determine DS30 Set DIP switches on requirements for MBMs each MBM Determine if any ee ie en nn offsets can be used a as The first step in selecting the MBMs is to establish the number of extensions internal lines and PSTN lines trunk lines you have or need This step allows you to determine the number and type of MBMs you require The following sections describe how to determine which MBMs and how many you require for your system e Selecting trunk MBMs on page 106 e Selecting station MBMs on page 108 e Selecting a fiber expansion module FEM on page 109 After you determine the MBMs required calculate how the MBMs use the available system resources The following sections describe how the MBMs work within the available channels on the media services card MSC in the BCM system Selecting trunk MBMs The number and type of lines coming into your system determine which trunk MBMs and how many MBMs you require to support your needs Trunk lines come from the public network PSTN or they support connections in a private network If you are setting up an entirely new system perform a site survey to determine your current and future needs Nortel recommends that you perform the survey before you order any MBMs Note If you plan to add any lines in the near f
240. ing a redundant power supply cage BCM400 only 288 Removing a BCM400 redundant power supply cage 20000 293 Installing a power supply module 0 0 0 0 eee eee 295 Removing a power supply module 000 eee eee 297 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 0 45 299 Replacing COIS oc ccc arnt eran eee arena 299 installing the WAN Card occ sk eee oes Ree etal ee Rha ete Soda 302 Installing he modem Card ern 309 Replacing the processor expansion card PEC 000 e neces 311 Installing a processor expansion card PEC 000e cee eee eee 314 Replacing MOMO 242 cence nennen 315 Increasing the amount of memory 2222er een en eee 316 Removing the dual in line memory module DIMM card 316 Replacing the clock calendar battery 0 0 ccc cee eens 318 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan 000 c eee eee 323 PRepacng a coolo N eu 323 Removing a BCM400 cooling fan anaana 324 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 16 Contents installing a BOM400 cooling AN 2e 2ns dooce pe Meee sd beGa bad FOaw ened ox 326 Removing a BCM200 cooling fan 22 7422 aa bare ees 329 Installing the BCM200 cooling fan 1 2 0 2 0 00 e ee eee 331 Removing an expansion unit fan 00 0 eee eee 332 Installing an expansion unit fan 2 2 60c5cccaecenes sees ns 334 Troubl
241. installation of additional hardware and or servicing is required disconnect all telephone cable connections prior to unplugging the BCM modules Ensure the BCM system is connected to a wall outlet with a third wire protective earth connection prior to connecting any telecommunications cables to the BCM main unit or expansion units N0060612 Regulatory information 21 Caution Only qualified persons should service the system The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the BCM system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire ground Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground through the power cord Therefore it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the unit Specifically operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections central office lines rem
242. ion Therefore after configuring the initial parameters you must use Element Manager to set the startup parameters Refer to Configuring the startup parameters on page 198 Refer to the BCM 4 0 Telset Administration Guide for more information on Telset Administration Figure 94 shows an overview of using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters Figure 94 Overview of using Telset Administration Use Telset Fdministration to set the basic parameters Configure the initial parameters Configure the startup parameters BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 188 Chapter 15 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters Configuring the initial parameters Use the following procedures to configure the initial parameters for the BCM using Telset Administration To enter the keycodes To configure the IP address To configure the modem on page 189 To select the region on page 189 To select the telephony startup template and start DN on page 190 To initialize voice mail on page 190 To create Telset user accounts on page 190 To enter the keycodes Select Feature 9 8 from a two line display telephone Enter the following user ID and password User ID SETNNA Password CONFIG The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344 respectively Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select Feature Codes Pres
243. ion a reproduction of the copyright notices trademarks and all other proprietary legends and or logos of NORTEL NETWORKS and or NORTEL NETWORKS suppliers appearing on the original copy of such licensed software delivered to CUSTOMER and retain the same without alteration on all original copies and e Issue instructions to each of its authorized employees agents and or representatives to whom licensed software is disclosed advising them of the confidential nature of such licensed software and to provide them with a summary of the requirements of this License and e Return the licensed software and all copies through an Authorized Distributor to NORTEL NETWORKS at such time as the CUSTOMER chooses to permanently cease using it CUSTOMER shall not e Use licensed software i for any purpose other than CUSTOMER s own internal business purposes and ii other than as provided by this License or e Allow anyone other than CUSTOMER s employees agents and or representatives with a need to know to have physical access to licensed software or e Make any copies of licensed software except such limited number of object code copies in machine readable form only as may be reasonably necessary for execution or archival purposes only or e Make any modifications enhancements adaptations or translations to or of licensed software except as may result from those CUSTOMER interactions with the licensed software associated with n
244. ion tray face Place the screws in a safe location Pull and tip the bezel away from the base function tray until the bezel clips are clear of the base function tray chassis Move the bezel in a downward direction between the base function tray latches Place the bezel in a safe location See Figure 108 Figure 108 Remove the base function tray bezel lt Tip bezel away from base function tray wo rn A e gt Fa ea gt Unfasten bezel J screws Ww Unhook bezel clips Move bezel downward from base function 4 _ and between latches tray To install the base function tray bezel Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container or work area Warning Use care when removing or inserting the base function tray Do not forcefully L i remove or insert the base function tray because you could damage or stretch the cables N0060612 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 239 1 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet 2 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Remove the base function tray latch screws if applicable Place the screws in a safe location Move the base function tray latches to the unlocked position Position
245. is on the side of the slot nearest to the BCM cards 2 Carefully and firmly press down on the top of the DIMM card with your thumbs At the same time use your index fingers to move the fastening tabs inward toward the card When the card is completely inserted in the connector the fastening tabs clip to the side of the DIMM card Note Do not force the DIMM into its slot If the DIMM does not slide in easily check the alignment of the DIMM Install the media services card see To install the media services card MSC on page 306 Partially install the base function tray in the main unit Install the WAN card if applicable See Installing the WAN card on page 302 Connect the DS30 connectors to the MSC N Oo oO fF W Completely install the base function tray in the main unit see To install the base function tray on page 236 Ensure you do not pinch or damage any cables Install the base function tray bezel See To install the base function tray bezel on page 238 9 Insert all connectors in the correct locations on the base function tray face 10 Restore the BCM system to operation Refer to Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 for details Replacing the clock calendar battery This section describes how to remove and install the clock calendar battery located on the main card This section provides the following procedures e To remove the clock calendar battery on page
246. is unplugged prior to disconnecting the cables from the front of the base function tray this hazard can occur System shutdown You must disconnect the MBM cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet System startup You must reconnect the power cords to a grounded outlet before reconnecting the cables to the MBMs Danger Electrical shock hazards Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunications network and ac mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the BCM system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire ground In addition all unused slots must have blank faceplates installed The covers on all units must be in place at the completion of any servicing Warning Electrical shock warning The BCM MBMs have been safety approved for installation into BCM main units and expansion units It is the responsibility of the installer and user to ensure that installation of the BCM hardware does not compromise existing safety approvals BEFORE YOU OPEN the BCM main unit or expansion unit ensure that the network cables are unplugged and the unit is then disconnected from the AC power source Station MBMs The ports on these MBMs are meant to be connected only to approved digital telephones and peripherals with the proper cables on a protected internal wiring system Do not connect any telephones to wiring that runs outside of the building
247. it BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 278 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 11 Remove the four power supply chassis screws from the back of the main unit see Figure 136 Place the screws in a safe location Figure 136 Remove the BCM200 power supply screws ae 12 Separate the power supply cable from the hard disk cable Cut the tie wrap that secures the power supply cable to the hard disk cable see Figure 138 13 Remove the power supply from the interior of the main unit Note Remove the power supply carefully Ensure the power supply cables are not entangled or connected to any internal components Installing a BCM200 standard power supply Use this procedure to install a functional standard power supply in a BCM200 main unit The I O card must be removed from the main unit before you perform this procedure The base function tray must be partially removed Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Warning Power supply cable management is critical Loose or incorrectly positioned L i cables can result in cable damage To install a BCM200 standard power supply 1 Obtain and use only the power supply recommended by Nortel 2 Place the new power supply into the main unit
248. it 136 Connecting the Gables cisiricsirsirkericarisrrsoricioriirisiis 137 TO ORIEL ponor and WIE ae 138 Tocheck system power and FR peciccccasigassieesiciadsicai eisdaiesitiadicanidadinaeabaancabiiaaamaale 139 To connect DTM CTM CTM8 BRIM S T or 4X16 MBMG cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 142 To connect IE GAT nenne 143 To connect the DSM16 DSM32 ASM8 GASMB8 or 4x16 MBMS cen 145 Toconneci ie bar gabe nee 148 To connect the BCM system to the WAN uusnnssnnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnannnn 157 TERROR DET nee 157 Installing telephones and peripherals 0 0c ee eee eee 161 To install the emergency telOPNONGS orisiirisii ene rennen 165 Installing the analog terminal adapter 0 cee eee eee 167 GS Bale elated IR een 169 BETT Rena aridiamuseti amnesia manisenannsee 170 To measure the insertion loss from the CO to the analog device 171 To measure the insertion loss from the analog device to the CO nenn 171 Installing optional telephony equipment 0000ee eee eeee 173 To Maalan auka DIOR enun 173 To install an external paging System nenne a nn a 174 To connect SIT extemal MUS C SOUCO ana iienaa iraina 176 Initializing the System 2 osc ois cee wedi cakes as wens deeewe ise eats 177 To connect the Ethernet crossover cable un 178 To con gur your Sampler ee ee ree terre tre 179 To display the configuration mens een 180 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintena
249. k configuration provides one fault tolerance capability BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 68 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware The RAID card has three ribbon cable connectors The hard disk connectors are mounted on the right and left sides of the RAID controller card The third ribbon cable connection mounted at the rear of the card connects to the primary IDE connector on the I O card see Figure 43 Figure 43 RAID upgrade kit BCM400 main unit standard installation shown Front view Primary hard disk RAID bracket Mirror hard disk _ Mirror hard disk ribbon RAID controller card cable connector primary hard disk connector on opposite side RAID card status LEDs Reset button Rear view Note Reverse RAID bracket installation for BCM200 Lift tab is on opposite end Primary hard disk RAID connector Mirror hard disk Le gt J A lt l Primary hard disk RAID connector ribbon cable connector IDE connector Hard disk bracket litib ee y connectors Cooling fan The BCM200 main unit and BCM400 main unit standard have a single cooling fan while the BCM400 main unit RFO configuration has two fans Figure 44 illustrates a cooling fan and connectors The cooling fan mounts in the back of the BCM200 main unit The cooling fans mount on a removable panel in the back of the BCM400 main unit N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 69
250. king screw until the plate is firmly set in place see Figure 163 Install the base function tray bezel see To install the base function tray bezel on page 238 Completely insert the base function tray into the main unit See To install the base function tray on page 236 Restore the BCM system to operation For details refer to Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 322 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware N0060612 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan 323 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan This chapter describes how to replace a cooling fan in the BCM200 and BCM400 main unit This chapter also describes how to add a second fan to the BCM400 main unit available through the field redundancy upgrade kit This chapter contains the following topics e Replacing a cooling fan on page 323 e Troubleshooting cooling fans on page 334 Note For the BCM400 RFO configuration a redundant cooling fan and power supply is included Warning You must remove all of the connections to the BCM main unit before you l f power the system down Failure to disconnect lines before you power down the system can cause damage to the system Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle com
251. l with respect to the wall 2 Mount the plywood backboard securely to the wall N0060612 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit 97 Note If the backboard for the BCM main unit has enough room for the expansion unit you do not require a second backboard 3 Choose a location on the backboard that is level and leaves enough space on the sides 23 cm or 9 in to insert and remove the media bay modules MBMs 4 Mark the location of the wall mount bracket holes on the plywood backboard a Use the wall mount bracket as a template b Use a bubble level to check that the wall mount bracket is level with respect to the plywood backboard 5 Install four 10 x 2 5 cm 10 x 1 in round head wood screws in the backboard a Do not tighten the screw heads against the backboard Leave approximately 0 5 cm 0 25 in of the screw exposed from the backboard b Perform a trial installation of the wall mount bracket on the plywood backboard Ensure the wood screw heads seat in the wall mount bracket slots If the wood screws are too tight loosen until the screw heads fit fully in the slots c Ensure that the wall mount bracket is level with respect to the plywood backboard d Remove the wall mount bracket 6 Align the screw holes on one side of the BCM main unit with the wall mount bracket Note The bracket suspends the BCM main unit on the wall Consider the direction you gt want the media bay modules to face left or right
252. lane Front view Rear view gt SZ a gt a MBM backplane A _ _ connector to MSC MBM backplane ER connectors X S MBM backplane a a Q connector to power xX supply N Figure 24 illustrates the BCM400 MBM backplane and connectors Figure 24 BCM400 MBM backplane Front view Rear view MBM backplane connector to MSC J 7 MBM backplane connector to power supply MBM backplane e connectors Media bay modules MBMs The BCM system is modular You can increase the capacity of the system by adding more media bay modules MBMs Each BCM allocates a maximum of six DS30 buses to the MBMs The number of MBMs that can be added to your system is determined by the number of media bays that are open combined with the number of DS30 buses each component uses BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 52 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware If your system requires many IP lines or trunks you can reduce the number of DS30 buses that are assigned to MBMs and increase the number of buses available to IP telephones This is known as a 3 5 DS30 bus split In this case you only have five DS30 buses available for use by the MBMs Refer to Understanding DS30 numbers on page 109 for more information Warning Changing the DS30 bus split If you change the bus split from 2 6 default to 3 5 after the system is initialized any m
253. lashing The DTM is initializing Tip You can install a maximum of three DTM modules in the BCM main unit depending on the available buses BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 82 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM system LEDs BRIM LEDs The BRIM has one additional LED beside each RJ 48C jack Figure 48 shows the location of the LEDs on a BRIM Figure 48 BRIM LEDs Power LED Status LED ISDN BRI S T Interface Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 3 Loop 4 0 A Power Status Table 22 describes the functions of the BRIM LEDs Table 22 BRIM LED functions LED Status Descriptions Power Refer to Media bay module LEDs for details Status Refer to Media bay module LEDs for details ISDN line ON The ISDN line associated with the LED is active N0060612 Chapter 4 Installation overview 83 Chapter 4 Installation overview To install a BCM system you install a BCM main unit a BCM expansion unit optional and the telephony components Figure 49 and Table 23 provide an overview of the installation process Figure 49 BCM system installation overview Install the BCM system Check the installation prerequisites Install the main unit Install the expansion unit optional Install media bay modules Connect the cables to the Install the telephones and peripherals BCM200 400 4 0 Installation a
254. lation process for these cards BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 160 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables N0060612 161 Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals This section describes how to install telephones and peripherals You can add telephones and peripherals before or after you initialize your system Telephone configuration is determined by which station media bay module MBM you are using The BCM system creates default settings for the telephone DN records when it is first initialized The settings are based on which telephony profile you chose To change these settings use Element Manager Specific instructions for configuring telephone operation through Element Manager are contained in the BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide Note For detailed information on installing various telephones and peripherals refer to the documentation for your particular telephone or peripheral Note Programming occurs on the telephone when the BCM system recognizes the telephone on the system Refer to the following sections for information on installing telephones and peripherals e System telephones e Installing an emergency telephone on page 165 e Installing IP Phones on page 165 e Installing T7406 cordless systems on page 165 System telephones The BCM system supports a number of analog digital IP telephony and cordless telephones Refer to Telepho
255. law A law law DTI carrier type E1 E1 E1 E1 T1 E1 System settings Number of rings 2 2 1 1 1 2 in a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes supported Default delay 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring 4 ring Hunt groups cycles cycles cycles cycles cycles cycles Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busytone Busytone Busytone Busytone Busy tone Mode Sequential Sequential Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Sequential Night Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 Service times Evening Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 Lunch Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 360 Appendix G Market profile attributes Table 98 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong Italy Ringing service Manual Manual Off Off Off Manual mode Ringing service Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes trunk ans Restriction Off O
256. lay ms 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Link time ms N A 600 N A 600 N A Target line if PBX gt Busy Prime PBX gt Busy _ Prime PBX gt Busy busy setting DID gt Prime DID gt Prime DID gt Prime Companding A law A law A law mu law A law law DTI carrier type E1 E1 E1 T1 E1 System settings Number of rings 2 1 2 1 2 in a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes supported Default delay 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4ringcycles 4 ring cycles Hunt groups Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Mode Sequential Broadcast Sequential Broadcast Sequential BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 366 Appendix G Market profile attributes Table 100 Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile United Functionality Attribute Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Night Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 Service times Evening Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 Lunch Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 Ringing service Manual Off Manual Off Manual mode Ringing service Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes trunk ans Restriction Off
257. lick the StartupProfileTemplate tab to begin entering information in the Startup Profile template 4 Enter your BCM system ID in the System ID field in the Startup Profile template The system ID is on the box of the main unit and on the main unit itself If you enter the wrong system ID the Startup Profile will not work with your system 5 Click the large button at the top of the Startup Profile template to save a version of the Startup Profile sps file and a version of the Startup Profile editor Excel spreadsheet on your computer The filenames for the Startup Profile editor and the Startup Profile consist of the system ID followed by the appropriate extension Note Never edit the Startup Profile sps file directly always use the Startup Profile editor to make changes BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 208 Chapter 17 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 10 11 12 Enter the remaining information into the Startup Profile editor that you want loaded onto the BCM main unit The Startup Profile editor contains explanations of the various parameters Click the cell where you want to enter information and the Help text appears You can specify which parameters to load onto your system by selecting Apply for the parameters you want to load If you do not want to load certain parameters select Ignore When you have entered all the information click the large button at the top of the
258. lit GASM8 mode and country switch settings The GASM8 has a second set of eight DIP switches on the right side at the rear of the MBM that allow you to choose a mode of function based on country of operation These settings are dependant on the version of the system software N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 129 The mode used defines which features are available as shown in Table 40 Table 40 GASM8 modes and features GASM8 modes Standard Enhanced Mode features Basic call features for analog devices e e Message Waiting Indication MWI e Firmware download capability e Disconnect Supervision Calling Line Identification CLID The GASMS has the following switches e Switch 1 firmware download capability off Standard mode on Enhanced mode e Switch 2 when to download firmware for the enhanced mode only off automatic firmware download from BCM default on forced firmware download from BCM system cold start e Switch 3 echo cancellation off Enabled default on Disabled e Switches 4 8 settings choices are based on a country profile Refer to the tables below for the correct settings to ensure proper functionality Standard mode Mode select DIP switch Country select settings DIP switch settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Country profile North America on United Kingdom on Australia on
259. ly from the main unit Ensure you do not pinch stretch or damage any cables See Removing the base function tray on page 234 11 Remove the media services card see To remove the media services card MSC on page 304 12 Carefully push down on the fastening tabs on either side of the DIMM you want to remove As you press down on the fastening tabs the DIMM lifts out of the DIMM slot 13 Grasp both ends of the DIMM with your fingertips Lift the DIMM up and away from the DIMM slot see Figure 173 on page 317 Place the DIMM in a static free container Figure 173 Remove and replace the dual in line memory module Base function tray front it PT lt L L ono yooh CI ASTD oa BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 318 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware To install aDIMM card Note There must be at least one DIMM installed in the BCM main unit for the system to function Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge gt Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container 1 Position and correctly align the new DIMM edge connectors first into the connector Note The DIMM has two notches on the edge connector Position the DIMM so that one of the notches
260. main unit top cover on page 244 Remove the advanced function tray latch screws Place the screws in a safe location If the screws are already removed skip to the next step Move the advanced function tray latches to the unlocked position Position the advanced function tray in the correct main unit slot Partially insert the advanced function tray into the main unit see Figure 113 Connect the hard disk power cable connectors Use the first connector Tuck any excess cable under the hard disk Connect the IDE connector Push the advanced function tray completely into the chassis Be careful not to crimp the cables see Figure 113 Move the advanced function tray latches to the locked position Install the advanced function tray latch screws Install the main unit top cover Refer to Installing the main unit top cover on page 246 Restore the BCM system to operation See Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 Observe the system status display LEDs to ensure the advanced function tray initializes correctly BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 244 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades Figure 113 Install the advanced function tray ge q Connect IDE cable to I O card lt Connect power cables to the hard _ disk or RAID card Insert base function tray completely Move gt advanced function tray latches to the locked lt position
261. must also install a redundant fan Refer to Installing a BCM400 cooling fan on page 326 Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge z Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container To install a power supply module 1 Ensure you have the correct redundant power supply cage installed in the BCM400 main unit see Installing a redundant power supply cage BCM400 only on page 288 2 Ensure that you position the power supply modules correctly before inserting them into the power supply cage The green LEDs are located at the top right of the power supply modules BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 296 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 3 Insert the power supply modules into the redundant power supply cage at the rear of the main unit a Push on the power supply module until the face of the module is flush with the casing You hear a click when the power supply module is properly seated b Secure each module with the power supply locking nut located on the right side of the module Refer to Figure 157 Figure 157 Install the power supply modules into the power supply cage or Power supply modules slide into the power supply cage va os Fasten the power supply A module locking nut J Push the power supply module into the power supply c
262. n connector SS HJ Connect to 2 A redundant power Ban supply status i i Connectto gwar PCL riser Unser Beilziskr Main card nn Connect to connection to MSC and I O card or power supply connection to BCM200 PSU AUX WAN card connector PCI riser card The peripheral component interface PCI riser card extends upward and at a right angle from the main card The PCI riser card provides a PCI for the MSC and field installed WAN cards Figure 14 shows the PCI riser card installed in the base function tray Figure 15 shows the PCI connectors without the MSC or WAN cards Two screws at the top of the PCI riser card attach the card to the side of the base function tray Figure 14 PCI riser card installed in base function tray WAN card ance e MSC field installable aughter cards p p E PCI riser card UN mem 5 WAN PCI connector e MSC PCI connector Main card PCI riser card connector Main card BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 46 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Figure 15 PCI riser card connectors PCI riser card mounting screws Base WAN PCI connector function pn tray front TTT MSC PCI connector o u DOTDEEETDEERETTEHTEETETGETETDITOITERGEEETEOCEOITETCETDEETTOEEREETEETCETETEE PCI riser main card connector Main
263. n tray latch Advanced function tray Status LEDs gt RAID only Reset button Bezel screw For information on how to replace the hard disk refer to Removing a hard disk cage from a BCM400 advanced function tray on page 260 Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the BCM main unit Read and follow installation instructions carefully Caution Use only a Nortel approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts Warning Use care when removing or inserting the advanced function tray Do not l f forcefully remove or insert the advanced function tray because you could damage or stretch the cables Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container or work area Use the flowchart shown in Figure 111 as a summary guide to maintain the advanced function tray N0060612 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 241 Figure 111 Advanced function tray replacement overview If possible do a system shutdown Perform BCM Insert the maintenance advanced function setup tray Remove the advan
264. n Figure 123 until the unit detaches from the mounting points on the chassis 7 Slide the hard disk cage through the access panel and out of the main unit Do not place strain the hard disk IDE or power cables 8 Disconnect the hard disk from the system a Disconnect the power supply connector from the hard disk b Disconnect the IDE connector from the hard disk or RAID card Figure 123 Detach the hard disk cage from the BCM200 main unit eez A Slide the hard disk cage 3 Z toward the rear of the chassis 7 TN 1 Remove access panel N Ed 2 Lift hard disk cage tab 9 Remove the hard disk cage completely from the BCM200 main unit Place the hard disk cage on a flat clean and static free surface BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 260 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk Removing a hard disk cage from a BCM400 advanced function tray Use this procedure to remove the BCM400 standard or RAID configuration hard disk cage from the BCM400 advanced function tray See also Replacing a hard disk in the hard disk cage on page 265 Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container To remove a hard disk cage from a BCM400 main unit 1 Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect
265. n on 181 203 6 91 113 4 on on on on 151 173 61 83 If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 split DS30 bus 7 is not available BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 122 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM Table 32 shows the switch settings for each DS30 bus and the resulting line assignments Table 32 DTM switch settings E1 and UK PRI Select DS30 bus Enter these switch settings To N o A oa o assign these lines on on on on on on 211 240 on on on on on 181 210 on on on on on 451 180 Select DS30 bus Enter these switch settings To If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 split DS30 bus 7 is not available assign these lines 121 150 91 120 61 90 DDIM switch settings The DDIM combines a DTM and a data module The switch setting you choose determines the DS30 bus assigned to the DTM portion of the DDIM The data module is automatically assigned the next DS30 bus number The DS30 bus you assign to the DDIM determines the line numbers of the T1 line connected to the DDIM Table 33 shows the switch settings for each DS30 bus and the resulting line assignments Table 33 DDIM switch settings Select DS30 Enter these switch settings bus 1 2 3 4 5 To Data assign module these DS30 lines bus on 211 234 3 181 204 4 151
266. n to the comma delimited IP telephones TFTP Server Allows you to specify the IP address of the TFTP server that is used by WLAN IP telephones If your system does not have WLAN IP telephones leave this box empty Enter the IP address in a valid dot format WLAN IP Telephony Allows you to specify the IP address of the SVP server that is used by WLAN Manager 2245 IP telephones If your system does not have WLAN IP telephones leave this box empty Enter the IP address in a valid dot format To configure IP Phones 1 From the Configuration tab click the Resources folder to expand it Select Telephony Resources From the Actual Type column select IP amp App Sets The Details for Module area displays in the lower pane with the IP Terminal Global Settings tab as the default N0060612 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 201 4 Configure the IP Terminal Global Settings attributes see Table 72 Table 72 IP Terminal Global Settings attributes Attribute Description Enable registration Select this check box to allow new IP clients to register with the system WARNING Remember to clear this check box when you have finished registering the new telephones Enable global registration password If you want to require the installer to enter a password when IP telephones are configured and registered to the system select this box If this box is not selected disabled a
267. n unit The snap rivet has two parts a center pin and a collar Gently separate the plastic rivet pin with your fingernails from the center of the rivet collar Remove the rivet pin and the collar from the chassis Place the rivet pin and collar in a safe location b Pull the fan away from the main unit from the interior c Place the fan in a safe location Figure 185 Remove the snap rivets from the BCM200 main unit f J5 Remove the rivet pin from Fan exhaust the rivet collar a Main unit Remove the rivet collar from _ the fan access panel hole ER A Rivet pin Rivet collar N0060612 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan 331 Installing the BCM200 cooling fan Use this procedure to install a cooling fan in a BCM200 main unit Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container To install a BCM200 cooling fan 1 Place the new fan in proper location in the BCM200 main unit Ensure the I O card connector cable is on the bottom Note Ensure the label of the new fan faces the back wall of the BCM main unit Airflow is out of the chassis as indicated by the arrows imprinted on the fan 2 Align the fan chassis mounting holes with the holes on the main unit 3 Attach the fan to the main unit using four snap rivets
268. n unit on the table or shelf Make sure you leave enough space around the unit for ventilation and access to the cables and media bay modules Next step If you are installing an expansion unit proceed to Installing an expansion unit on page 101 Otherwise proceed to Installing a media bay module MBM on page 105 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 100 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit N0060612 Chapter 7 Installing an expansion unit 101 Chapter 7 Installing an expansion unit Adding an expansion unit increases the capacity of your BCM system by providing a method of adding media bay modules MBMs Each MBM you add increases the number of public switched telephone network PSTN trunks or extensions that you can connect to the BCM system Figure 59 shows the steps required to install the expansion unit Figure 59 Overview of installing a expansion unit Install the expansion unit Unpack the expansion unit Fre you using rack wall or desktop mount Rack Desktop Wall Mount the wall bracket Mount the shelf in the rack Install the unit in the shelf Install the unit on Install the unit in the desk top the bracket Connect the cables to the main unit BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 102 Chapter 7 Installing an expansion unit Refer to the following sections for information on installing an expansion
269. nce Guide 6 Task List Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 187 Toomer ie KeyCite seele 188 Terme he IF ARE 188 Fe OUI Mie ae eier an 189 Ti ae eae TEN aeg Reiki 189 To select the telephony startup template and start DN 0 0 00 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeees 190 TAI ER NEAR ea 190 Te Create Telset User ACCOUNTS nenn 190 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 193 Toratcess the BOM weh Pate an iets unital n EA EA EEEN A 194 To download and install BCM Element Manager cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeees 194 To SCE tothe BCM Syste ae lan 195 To entera MOY COO anna nn han gun 195 To configure the LAN IP address nennen 196 To comigure the len 196 To configure the startup template for telephony services 4444444ssnnnnnnnnnnnn 197 TO iminalize Voice NA er en orai aanak n e aaea ERAT 197 Toenteraname tor your SUI assets canis ccd en 198 Toconigure the date and Imesefliinge a 198 To configure DHCP server Selling m nennen neue 199 To Sorge PHONE Sasra a Ea E EEE AE 200 Teconigur SNMP Se RIS ssnin ar a EEEREN 201 Te configure SNMP comimunib aliigsnnceeee u 202 Toconfigure the SNMP Manager Mat u nee na 202 TO create USER SECHS ae de namen are are ai 203 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 205 To download the Startup Profile template cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeseneeeeteaeeees 206 To customize a S
270. nd Maintenance Guide 84 Chapter 4 Installation overview Table 23 BCM system installation overview Sheet 1 of 2 Tasks Description Link to Prepare for installation Verify these requirements e environmental e electrical e site telephony wiring Checking the installation prerequisites on page 87 Get required equipment and tools Ensure you have these items e basic hardware e optional equipment e other hardware and tools System equipment supplies and tools on page 89 Check required prerequisites Verify environmental electrical and general requirements Checking the installation prerequisites on page 87 Install the main unit Mount the main unit using these options e in an equipment rack with a rack mount shelf e ona wall with a wall mount bracket e ona desktop Installing the BCM main unit on page 91 Install an expansion unit optional Mount the expansion unit using the same options as the main unit e in an equipment rack with a rack mount shelf e ona wall with a wall mount bracket e onadesktop Installing the expansion unit on page 102 Install a media bay module MBM Follow these steps to install an MBM e set the MBM DIP switches e insert the MBM into the main unit or expansion unit Installing a media bay module MBM on page 105 Connect the cables Connect the cables between these items e power suppl
271. nections are used to connect S Loop devices such as video phones terminal adapters and group 3 fax machines The T Loop connections are used to connect to the CO PSTN Warning For a U Loop connection the BRIM must be connected only to an NT1 A provided by the service provider The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV to Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV barrier Figure 190 BRIM RJ 45 ports BRIM ISDN BRI S T Interface m Loop 2 Loop 3 12345678 Power Status RJ 45 pin out RJ 45 jacks Table 86 lists the wiring details for the RJ 45 ports Table 86 BRIM RJ 45 port wiring Pin Signal Signal on system side 1 No connection No connection 2 No connection No connection 3 Receive Rx Tx 4 Transmit Tx Rx 5 Transmit Tx Rx 6 Receive Rx TX 7 No connection No connection 8 No connection No connection BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 338 Appendix B BRIM wiring chart N0060612 Appendix C GATM wiring chart 339 Appendix C GATM wiring chart Analog telephone lines are connected to the GATM4 or GATMS through the RJ 21 connector on the front of the media bay module MBM see Figure 191 Figure 191 GATM RJ 21 connector GATM a 1 25 elle arena x 2 26 50 RJ 21 connector RJ 21 pin out Table 87 lists the wiring details for the RJ 21 connector on the GATM4
272. nee and destroyed all archival copies Except as provided neither this License nor any rights acquired by CUSTOMER through this License are assignable Any attempted assignment of rights and or transfer of licensed software not specifically allowed shall be void and conclusively presumed a material breach of this License If NORTEL NETWORKS i claims a material breach of this License and ii provides written notice of such claimed material breach to CUSTOMER and iii observes that such claimed material breach remains uncorrected and or unmitigated more than thirty 30 days following CUSTOMER s receipt of written notice specifying in reasonable detail the nature of the claimed material breach then CUSTOMER acknowledges that this License may be immediately terminated by NORTEL NETWORKS and CUSTOMER further acknowledges that any such termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights and remedies that NORTEL NETWORKS may have at law or in equity EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTIES FOR ANY ITEM OF LICENSED SOFTWARE IF ANY WILL BE SOLELY THOSE GRANTED DIRECTLY TO CUSTOMER BY DISTRIBUTOR OTHER THAN AS SET FORTH THEREIN THIS LICENSE DOES NOT CONFER ANY WARRANTY TO CUSTOMER FROM OR BY NORTEL NETWORKS THE LICENSED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NORTEL NETWORKS AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WRITTEN OR ORAL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND OF FITNESS FOR A PARTIC
273. ner To remove the PSU status connector jumper a A O N 6 Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM400 system from the AC power outlet Remove the main unit top cover Refer to Removing the main unit top cover on page 244 Locate the PSU status connector on the I O card see Figure 148 Remove the RPS output signaling connector jumper Use needle nose pliers to pull the jumper out and away from the connector Place the jumper in a safe location Connect the PA cable to the PSU status connector see Figure 148 on page 288 Figure 148 Remove the PSU status connector jumper PSU Status connector Jumper O Card Installing a redundant power supply cage BCM400 only This procedure describes how to install a redundant power supply cage in the BCM400 main unit After you install the redundant power supply cage in the main unit install the two power supply modules see Installing a power supply module on page 295 Note When you upgrade to a redundant power supply you must also install a redundant fan Refer to Installing a BCM400 cooling fan on page 326 N0060612 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power su
274. nes and modems For example in North America e Ifyou require 12 digital extensions you need 1 DSM16 DSM16 e If you require 24 digital extensions you need 1 DSM32 DSM32 Note If you require only a few analog extensions you can use an ATA 2 to connect these devices to your DSM16 DSM32 or the DSM connector on a 4x16 MBM Each analog extension requires an ATA 2 N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 109 Selecting a fiber expansion module FEM The FEM allows you to connect a maximum of six Norstar MBMs to a BCM system Each FEM connection requires one DS30 bus therefore the BCM used for this purpose can only support one FEM module if you are converting a fully configured Norstar system Note The DIP switch settings you chose determine which FEM ports are available If you enable all six FEM ports the BCM system has no more DS30 resources available Therefore you cannot connect more MBMs to the system Determining system capacity After you have selected the MBMs you require you must ensure that the BCM system can support all the MBMs System capacity is ultimately determined by the line requirements of each MBM The following sections describe the DS30 buses which manage the DS30 buses and how you fit your MBMs into the overall system planning e Understanding DS30 numbers on page 109 e Setting offsets on page 110 e Determining bus requirements on page
275. nes and adapters on page 72 for more information on supported telephones Analog telephones are supported either through the analog station ports on the main unit or analog station MBMs ASM or by connecting to a digital module through an analog terminal adapter 2 ATA2 Documentation describing installation and telephone features is supplied with each piece of equipment Analog terminal adapter 2 The analog terminal adapter 2 ATA2 connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to a digital station connector on the BCM system BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 162 Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals Refer to Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter on page 167 for the requirements and procedure for installing the device Central Answering Position CAP eCAP A Central Answering Position CAP provides additional auto dial positions or additional line appearances A 7316E telephone can support up to 9 OKIMs Each module provides 24 programmable keys with indicators A telephone can be configured as an eCAP which allows it to support line appearances on the KIM buttons If the telephone is configured as an eCAP a maximum of four KIMs can be added eKIMs A T7316E KIM configuration that is not configured as an eCAP can support up to nine KIMs In this configuration only memory button programming is supported A supplementary power supply is required afte
276. ng You must disconnect power from the main unit after you have performed an Element Manager shutdown The main unit cannot start operating again until after power has been disconnected and then reconnected Turn off the power switch located at the back of the BCM main unit and expansion unit Disconnect the BCM main unit and expansion unit power cords from the AC outlet Ensure you have room to access the part you are working on Remove the BCM main unit from the rack if necessary Restarting the system after maintenance When you finish your shutdown maintenance procedure restart the BCM system in the order described in this section To restore the system to operation 1 Ensure that all cables inside the housing are connected snugly to the correct boards and excess cables are bundled neatly out of the way Replace the bezel on the BCM main unit if you removed it Replace the main unit top cover and replace the screws If you removed the BCM main unit from the rack or wall replace it Plug the expansion unit if there is one into the AC power source Plug the BCM main unit into the AC power source No OF FF W KN Turn on the power switch on the BCM main unit The BCM system starts booting Warning When you restart the system all IP clients voice mail and VoIP ports are not l f available until the system services restart N0060612 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 233 8 Re
277. ng channels and 32 media channels Two DS30 buses are exclusively dedicated to MSC data resources Five paths within these buses have hard coded applications The other paths can be assigned to various data applications such as voice mail dialup ISDN WAN VolP trunks or IP telephony Five DS30 buses are exclusively reserved for the MBMs One DS30 bus can be switched to accommodate MBMs or more channels for IP telephones or VoIP trunks You control the use of this bus by using either a 2 6 or 3 5 DS30 bus split This is set when you configure the system e PEC IIIs PEC IIs increase the digital signal processing capacity for voice mail call center fax VoIP trunks IP telephony and dial up ISDN WAN features The BCM200 system uses one PEC III card expandable to two The BCM400 system uses two PEC IIs expandable to four to accommodate increased requirements for media processing Main card The main card contains several field replaceable units FRUs such as the RAM modem card and CMOS battery A riser card set at right angles to the main card provides connections for the MSC and a field installed wide area network card WAN Figure 12 shows the layout of the main card as installed in the base function tray BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 44 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Figure 12 Main card connectors installed in the base function tray O A A A AN ATA K
278. ngs 123 CTM dip switch settings 123 DS30 channel hierarchy 114 DSM dip switch settings 130 DTM dip switch settings 121 FEM settings 133 LEDs 217 offset configurations 117 119 switch offsets 110 system capacity 109 media services card see MSC 41 memory button 7000 72 7100 72 7208 72 7316 72 7316E 73 7316E KIM 73 modem card auxiliary jack 55 backup to integrated QoS routing 48 internal V 90 interface 48 modules DS30 channel hierarchy 114 offset configurations 117 119 moving telephones 166 MSC description 41 music source permission 20 music on hold copyright 20 N network equipment registration 21 networking connecting WAN 157 modem card 48 WAN card 46 N0060612 Index 381 numbers of extensions 108 O offset 110 offset configurations 117 119 one line display 7100 72 7208 72 output jack 42 P page external paging amplifier 42 paging 42 external output jack description 42 relay jack description 42 PCI MSC description 41 peripherals ATA2 161 CAP 162 ports FEM fiber ports 133 power 217 power outage emergency phone jack 55 power supply adapter cord 66 PRI line types 375 process map hard disk replacement 254 programming moving telephones 166 protective ground 157 PSTN service provider 105 Q QoS routing modem card backup 48 R radio frequency interference 21 RAID upgrade kit description 67 receive clock 157 receive data 157 red LED 217 regio
279. ns caller ID 355 ISDN line services support 374 modules 351 system defaults 355 regulatory information 2 related publications 29 relay jack external paging 42 repair authorization 21 replace hard disk 254 replacing MBM 249 power supply 275 request to send 157 RF interference 21 RJ 45 jack 142 RJ 48C jack 157 S safety extra low voltage SELV external equipment 31 42 scope status LAN DHCP scope 200 signal ground 157 signal ground common return 157 South America supported languages 354 specialized media bay modules 61 specifications ATA2 ASM8 GASM and GASI 59 system standards 22 startup profile 205 basic parameters 205 station auxiliary power supply see SAPS 75 station media bay module 4x16 combination module 58 ASM8 ASM8 GASMB8 modules 58 DSM 16 DSM 32 57 station media bay modules 56 station modules DSM switch settings 130 overview 56 rules for assigning 114 status 217 symbols 27 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 382 Index system capacity 109 system defaults by region 355 T Ti network interface card 46 telephone wireless LAN overview 74 telephones 7000 72 7100 72 7208 72 T3lao 72 Pollok 73 7316E KIM 73 7406 73 ATA2 161 audio conferencing unit ACU 74 CAP 162 digital mobility overview 74 emergency 165 moving 166 telephones adapters 72 Telset Admin basic parameters 187 termination analog port 171 time zones by country 353
280. nsion unit media bay module MBM telephones cabling for connections between hardware units Note You must include specific features in the keycode file for some hardware to function Optional equipment You can add the following equipment to the BCM system to support specific requirements beyond the basic hardware station auxiliary power supply SAPS key indicator module KIM for T7316E telephones analog terminal adapter 2 ATA2 if connecting analog equipment to a digital extension line uninterruptable power supply UPS analog emergency telephone optional WAN card field replaceable unit FRU BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 90 Chapter 5 Checking the installation prerequisites e digital mobility controller DMC base stations repeaters and digital mobility phones e Wireless LAN handsets SVP and TFTP servers and access points Countries outside of North America must order separately a power cord that conforms to their specific requirements or standards All North American main unit and expansion units are equipped with a North American power cord Other hardware and tools You need the following equipment to install a BCM unit e mounting hardware either a rack mount bracket a wall mount bracket per unit or four rubber feet per unit e Phillips screwdriver 2 e flat blade screwdriver e pliers e antistatic grounding strap e punch down tool e surge protector recommended
281. nstalling a media bay module MBM Figure 66 Space requirements for MBMs on a per DS30 configuration Trunks lines 1 DS30 bus offset set to 0 1DTM per DS30 L 1 DS30 bus offset set to 0 1 or 2 3 BRIs per DS30 i 1 DS30 bus offset set to 0 1 2 or 3 4CTMs per DS30 Ei 1 DS30 bus offset set to 0 1 or 2 CTM8s max of 2 offsets per DS30 i 1 DS30 bus offset set to 0 1 2 or 3 4 GATM4s per DS30 i 1 DS30 bus offset set to 0 u per DS30 2 DS30 buses offset set to 0 I Stations extensions Single density modules 1 DSM 16 1 DSM 32 per 2 DS30s 1 DS30 bus offset set to 0 1 or 2 GATM8 max of 2 offsets per DS30 Double density modules 1 DS30 bus 4 DD ASM 8s or GASMB8s per DS30 1 DS30 bus 2 DD DSM 16 per DS30 1 DS30 bus 1 DD DSM 32 per DS30 Figure 67 on page 113 illustrates the space requirements for special MBMs N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 113 Figure 67 Space requirements for special MBMs Combination and specialized media bay modules 4x16 module DDIM module 2 DS30 buses 2 DS30 buses offset set to 0 1 2 or 3 offset set to 0 1 full DS30 1 offset of for hie 1 full DS30 mo Jor lines 1 full DS30 for telephone 1 full DS30 Note The FEM module requires a and equipment for data DS30 bus fo
282. ntainer N0060612 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 303 To install a replacement WAN card Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet 2 Partially remove the base function tray from the main unit If required remove the base function tray completely from the main unit see Removing the base function tray on page 234 Remove the base function tray bezel if applicable Insert the WAN card in the same PCI slot from which you removed the original card Refer to Figure 163 Push firmly on the WAN card until it sits completely in the top PCI riser card connector Position the PCI cover plate on the front of the base function tray so that the base function tray and cover plate screw holes align 7 Position the PCI cover plate locking screw in the PCI cover plate Tighten the PCI cover plate locking screw until the plate is firmly set in place see Figure 163 Figure 163 Install the WAN card co Install the F he WAN card PCI cover plate s Ka 7 Install the PCI cover P IO x plate gt u WAN card 10 11 12 Partially insert the base function tray in the main unit see To install the base function tray on page 236 Ensure you do not pinch or damage any cables Install the base function tray bezel See To install the base function tray bezel on page 238 Move the base functi
283. nts against damage from electrostatic discharge To install a hard disk cage 1 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power source 2 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 264 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 3 Install the hard disk in the hard disk cage see Installing a hard disk into a standard configuration hard disk cage on page 268 or Installing a primary hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage on page 269 or Installing a mirror hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage on page 271 4 Position the hard disk cage in front of the cage chassis mounting points in the advanced function tray The hard disk cage lift tab is at the rear of the hard disk cage If you are installing a RAID the LEDs point to the front of the advanced function tray 5 Slide the hard disk cage in the direction shown in Figure 126 until the unit engages with the chassis mounting points in the advanced function tray Figure 126 Insert the hard disk cage into the BCM400 advanced function tray Lift and slide the hard disk cage toward Insert hard disk cage the front of the advanced function tray gt a no o vo Pe we O gt 2 a 6 Partially insert the advanced function tray into the BCM400 main unit Ensure you do not pinch any cables against the chassis or internal components 7 Connect the hard
284. nufacturers to be tied together over E1 lines offering significant enhancements to BCM networking capabilities DPNSS makes it easier to support centralized network functionality within private networks for operators and attendants dealing with large numbers of calls Its routing capabilities provide more of the larger network capabilities without the expense of installing a new system reconfiguring all the nodes and worrying about a lot of downtime Most functionality over DPNSS lines is transparent once the DPNSS is programmed into the system DPNSS allows a local node acting as a terminating node to communicate with other PBXs over the network using E1 lines For example corporate offices separated geographically can be linked over DPNSS lines to other BCM systems bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be connected This allows connected BCM systems to function like a private network Analog trunk types Loop start Standard PSTN telephone line N0060612 377 Index Numbers 1120E IP Phone description 73 1140E IP Phone description 73 2001 IP Phone description 74 2002 IP Phone description 74 2004 IP Phone description 74 2007 IP Phone description 74 2033 audio conferencing unit 74 2050 IP Phone description 74 2210 22112212 WLAN overview 74 4x16 default DNs 344 dip switch settings 114 117 119 126 overview 58 wiring chart 343 7208 72 7406 telephone
285. o BCM400 main unit and expansion unit Example 2 JE l System needs ji mars DIM 32 analog phones ie i ln 160 digital phones 10 IP Phones BCM400 expansion gateway DSM32 ASM8 o SS a o ol og op oooo0 000000 BCM400 main unit and expansion unit N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 135 Figure 73 BCM400 expansion gateway configuration Example 3 pa System needs E i 16 analog trunks E A 160 digital phones o TIF Phone 3 3 BCM400 expansion gatewa 48 digital trunks o DSM32 TE o p g y IMB o 8 BCM400 main unit and expansion unit Example 4 System needs 192 digital phones 10 IP Phones 48 digital trunks BCM400 expansion gateway 8090900 BCM400 main unit and expansion unit Warning Ensure you are properly grounded before handling modules or any E4 components that are part of the BCM hardware Installing an MBM After you set the switches on the MBMs you can install them in the BCM main unit or the expansion unit The BCM200 main unit accommodates a maximum of two
286. ocedures for the BCM system and contains the following information e Connecting power to the BCM system on page 138 e Checking system power and status on page 139 e Wiring the MBMs on page 140 e Setting DNs and port numbers on page 149 e MBM combinations on page 150 e Changing configurations on page 154 e System setup on page 155 e Connecting the data networking hardware on page 155 The BCM main unit and expansion unit are each powered through an AC outlet The voltage required depends on the geographical location of the units All systems are initially set at the factory based on the intended destination You must check that the voltage and wiring are correct for your system before you connect any of the units to the power source Incorrect power settings result in equipment damage Read the following warnings You must protect yourself and the BCM system from possible electrical shocks N Warning Use only qualified persons to service the system The installation and service of this unit must be performed by service personnel with the appropriate training and experience Service personnel must be aware of the hazards of working with telephony equipment and wiring They must have experience in techniques that minimize any danger of shock or equipment damage Danger Electrical shock hazards Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunications network and AC mains are pos
287. ocess BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 258 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk Note RAID disk mirroring takes up to 3 hours to complete The BCM system continues to operate normally during the disk mirroring process However because disk mirroring occupies computing resources Nortel recommends that you perform disk mirroring during a period of low call traffic Note If this is the first time installation of the RAID configuration both primary and mirror status LEDs are green Removing a hard disk cage Use the procedures in this section to remove a hard disk cage from either the BCM200 or BCM400 system When a hard disk causes problems or fails remove the hard disk cage from the BCM200 main unit or the BCM400 main unit Remove the hard disk cage for RAID upgrades or for hard disk or RAID card replacement conditions For information on how to determine if you have a faulty hard disk refer to Monitoring standard configuration hard disk status using Element Manager on page 218 or RAID disk mirroring on page 221 This section provides the following procedures for removing a hard disk cage from the BCM200 and BCM400 main unit e Removing a hard disk cage from a BCM200 main unit on page 258 e Removing a hard disk cage from a BCM400 advanced function tray on page 260 Warning Maintain a current backup of your system configuration on a separate backup IN network server Re
288. odule set to DS30 bus 7 or requiring the use of bus 7 becomes inoperable If you change the bus split from a 3 5 split to a 2 6 split after the system is initialized all data is lost and all optional applications must be reinstalled and reconfigured Figure 25 Telephony hardware components Trunk media bay modules on on page 53 lt Station media bay modules MBMs on page 56 SM nm Specialized media bay modules MBMs on page I a J om als oo nd bene hu mi m m Refer to Media bay module availability on page 351 and FEM MBM Norstar trunk cartridge combinations on page 352 to determine which MBMs and which types of trunk lines are available in your location Telephones and adapters on page 72 The MBMs connect with external devices to implement various types of voice trunks and extensions Install the MBMs in the MBM bays in the BCM200 or BCM400 main units and the BCM expansion unit MBMs have LEDs on the faceplate For information on MBM LEDs see Viewing the BCM system LEDs on page 77 Note Refer to Media bay module availability on page 351 to determine which gt MBMs and which types of trunk lines are available in your location The back of t
289. of the parties and the remainder of this License shall continue in full force and effect This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the licensed software and the associated documentation and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements written or oral regarding such subject matter No amendment to or modification of this License will be binding unless in writing and signed by a duly authorized representative of NORTEL NETWORKS N0060612 Task List 5 Task List Installing the BCM main unit 200 e eee eee eee 91 TO attach the rackmount brackels unee un 93 To mount the main unit in an equipment rack 2 um 4424404H4nnnnHnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 94 Te install the maim unt an he WAN anne aan 96 To install the BCM main unit on a table or shelf 20unnsnnssnnnnnnnannnannnnnnnnnnnanannnn 99 Installing an expansion unit zrsssenne nenn eee 101 To connect the expansion unit to the main Unit ee eee eeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeenenseeneeeees 104 Installing a media bay module MBM 00 00 e eee ee ee eee 105 Te Select EHE MBN Se een ee een 106 To select stain NBME a tee rere reer te rere rrr errr eer etree err er ert er 108 To determine busterulenene anse een 113 To determine MBM DIP switch Beliings nase 116 To Set MBM DIF SWINE en centennial 120 To install an MBM in the BCM main unit or expansion un
290. of 16 DSM16 or see Digital station media bay module 32 DSM32 digital telephones to the on page 57 BCM system 4x16 Connects a maximum of four analog Also connects a maximum of 16 digital telephones to the BCM system N0060612 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 57 Table 9 Station MBMs Sheet 2 of 2 MBM What it does Special notes ASM ASM8 Connects a maximum of eight analog see Analog station media bay modules devices to the BCM system on page 58 ASM8 GASM Connects a maximum of eight analog see Analog station media bay modules devices to the BCM system on page 58 The GASM provides the following additional services caller ID pass through message waiting indication and disconnect supervision at the telephone The GASM also allows you to download new firmware Note Refer to Market profile attributes on page 351 for supported regions Digital station media bay module The digital station media bay modules DSM support digital telephones on the BCM system This section describes the DSM16 and DSM32 MBMs see Figure 31 The DSMs have the following characteristics e DSM16 supports 16 digital telephones through one RJ 21 connector Set the double density switch to enable the DSM to carry 16 extensions over a half DS30 bus If required install a second DSM16 and set the double density switch to occupy the second
291. ombination with the Power LED supply module Disk Indicates access to the system hard disk Green ON hard disk activity detected This LED lights when the HDD is accessed If the systems does not need to read or write to the HDD the LED is off BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 78 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM system LEDs Table 18 Base function tray system status LED states Sheet 2 of 3 LED Description LED states Status Indicates the system status Six non blinking LEDs in the center indicate monitoring software is not active Green ON all monitored services are functioning Green FLASH failure in one or more telephony services Green OFF not all services are working MSC PCI Device MSC Green ON device is present and operating properly Green FLASH driver is not running Green OFF device is defective or not present WAN PCI Device WAN1 WAN2 Green ON device is present and operating properly Green FLASH driver is not running Green OFF device is defective or not present Modem PCI Device Modem Green ON device is present and operating properly Green FLASH driver is not running Green OFF device is defective or not present LAN 1 PCI Device LAN 1 Green ON device is present and operating properly Green FLASH driver is not running Green OFF device is defective or not present LAN 2 PCI De
292. on Poland Note Switch settings not shown in this table will default to the North American profile Enhanced mode on North America on on United Kingdom on on Australia on on on Poland BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 130 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM Note Switch settings not shown in this table will default to the North American profile Table 41 ASM8 country select DIP switch settings Manual settings Country profile Manual settings pre BCM 3 6 systems BCM 3 6 and newer systems 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 North America on United Kingdom on on DSM switch settings There are different types of DSMs e DSM16 DSM16 have one connector which connects to 16 lines telephones These modules require a full DS30 number each single density or half a bus double density e DSM32 DSM32 have two connectors each of which connects to 16 lines telephones These modules require two full consecutive DS30 numbers single density or one full bus double density This section includes these charts e DSM16 DSM32 single density switch settings upgraded system on page 130 e DSM16 and DSM 32 double density switch settings upgraded system on page 131 e DSM16 DSM 32 single density switch settings new system on page 132 e DSM16 and DSM 32 double density switch settings new system on page 132 DSM16 D
293. on loss measurement 170 install ATA2 161 CAP 162 emergency telephone 165 installation overview 83 installing telephones and peripherals 161 installing expansion unit 101 installing main unit 91 equipment rack 92 flat surface 98 wall mount 96 international components 72 IP Phone 1120E 73 1140E 73 2001 74 2002 74 2004 74 2007 74 2050 74 IP telephone wireless LAN overview 74 ISDN line services by region 374 J jack BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 380 Index external paging 42 page relay 42 L language South and Central America 354 lease time LAN DHCP scope 200 LED BRIM 82 DTM 80 expansion unit 79 MBM 79 LEDs media bay modules 217 off 217 others 218 licence music on hold 20 line BRI and PRI line types 375 line numbers defaulton GATM 339 340 line services ISDN support by region 374 lines BRI and PRI line types 375 module dip switch settings 121 main unit BCM200 32 BCM200 BCM400 31 BCM400 34 installing 91 installing equipment rack 92 maintenance maintain backups 254 maximum loss ATA2 170 MBM 4x16 58 BRIM 55 configuring 212 CTM 55 DDIM 61 default DNs 344 349 default line numbers 340 DTM 54 FEM 61 FEM DDIM 61 GATM 56 overview 52 replacing 249 specialized 61 wiring chart 335 337 339 343 347 349 media bay module see MBM 52 media bay modules 4x16 settings 126 availability by regions 351 BRI dip switch setti
294. on tray latches to the locked position and install the latch screws Insert all connectors in the correct locations on the base function tray face Restore the BCM system to operation For details refer to Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 304 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware The BCM system automatically initializes the new WAN card You can configure the WAN card to meet the needs of your system in Element Manager Configuration gt Resources gt Network Interfaces To remove the media services card MSC Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Note If you purchased optional BCM applications that require keycode activation regenerate the keycodes after you install the replacement MSC For further information see Software keycode on page 181 and To install the media services card MSC on page 306 Note If you need to install a new MSC you must upload new core software from the hard disk See To install the media services card MSC on page 306 a fF O N 10 11 12 Ensure you have a current data backup of your system see Using the backup and restore utility on page 248 Shut down the system see Perf
295. onnections for eight analog calling line identification CLID or supervision disconnect PSTN lines Each line uses one line in the DS30 bus offset Because each DS30 bus has four lines per offset you require two offsets for each GATM 8 You can assign a maximum of two GATM 8s to a DS30 bus by making the offset switch settings different for each MBM You can also combine a GATM 8 with a 4x16 on the same DS30 number When you choose an offset number for the GATM 8 the system automatically adds the next offset number You cannot assign offset 3 to the GATM 8 because this does not allow the MBM to assign the second set of lines There are two sets of DIP switches located on the rear of the GATM e The left set allows you to determine the DS30 bus and offset for the MBM e The right set allows you to manually configure a country profile operation which is required for earlier versions of software However BCM 3 6 and newer software supports downloadable firmware for the North America Taiwan UK and Australia telephony profiles BCM 3 6 1 and newer versions of BCM software also support the Poland profile in download mode only To allow the GATM to download the parameters for these countries and to allow for firmware upgrades set all the country DIP switches to 0 zero off factory default The MSC telephony profile you choose must support the appropriate country setting to ensure that the correct firmware installs Refer to Figure 71 Figu
296. onnectors to the MSC 18 Position the PCI cover plate on the front of the base function tray so that the base function tray and cover plate screw holes align 19 Position the PCI cover plate locking screw in the PCI cover plate Tighten the PCI cover plate locking screw until the plate is firmly set in place see Figure 163 20 Push the base function tray completely into the main unit see To install the base function tray on page 236 Ensure you do not pinch or damage any cables 21 Restore the BCM system to operation For details refer to Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 22 Reinitialize your system Replacing the processor expansion card PEC This section describes how to replace the processor expansion card PEC in the BCM200 and BCM400 main units This section contains the following procedures e To remove the processor expansion card PEC on page 313 e Installing a processor expansion card PEC on page 314 e Removing the dual in line memory module DIMM card on page 316 The BCM200 is equipped with one PEC III mounted on the media services card MSC The BCM400 is equipped with two PEC IIIs mounted on the MSC The PECs provide signal processing capabilities for such applications as voice mail and IP telephony applications Figure 169 provides an overview of the process for replacing a PEC BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 312 Chapter 24 Replacing d
297. ons Terminal Equipment as adopted by the European JS Parliament And Of The Council This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Hereby Nortel declares that BCM units with Model No NTIT61XX NT9T62XX NT9T64XX and NT9T65XX are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Information is subject to change without notice Nortel reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the European Safety requirements EN 60950 and EMC requirements EN 55022 Class A and EN 55024 These EMC limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial and light industrial environment A Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures The above warning is inserted for regulatory reasons If any customer believes that they have an interference problem either because their Nortel product seems to cause interference or suffers from interference they should contact their distributor immediately The distributor will assist with a remedy for any problems and if nece
298. or 10 Remove the advanced function tray completely from the main unit 11 Place the advanced function tray on a flat clean and static free surface If you need to remove the hard disk component refer to Removing a hard disk cage from a BCM400 advanced function tray on page 260 Figure 112 Remove the advanced function tray Pr A Es ___ Unfasten advanced function Pa tray latch screws 7 2 Disconnect IDE cable from 1 O SES card o pe A a 4 Disconnect power cables from the lt hard disk or RAID card nn S N 8 A Move advanced function tray latches to the unlocked position from the main unit N0060612 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 243 To install the advanced function tray Warning Use care when removing or inserting the advanced function tray Do not forcefully remove or insert the advanced function tray because you could damage or stretch the cables Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the g Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge components in a static free container or work area on OA 11 12 13 14 15 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Remove the main unit top cover See Removing the
299. or to prevent water damage BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 88 Chapter 5 Checking the installation prerequisites Electrical requirements Ensure you meet the following electrical requirements e Power must be supplied from a non switched unobstructed outlet within 1 5 m 5 ft of the BCM units e The supplied power must be 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz and 10 A minimum service with a third wire safety ground The third wire safety ground provides shock protection and prevents electromagnetic interference Danger Risk of electric shock The safety of this product requires connection to an outlet with a third wire ground Use only with the supplied BCM power supply and a three wire power outlet Caution Check ground connections Ensure that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metal water pipe system if present are connected together If these ground connections are not connected together contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority Do not try to make the connections yourself e You can connect the power supply to a power bar The total length of the power cables from the power supply to the electrical outlet including power bar should not exceed 2 m 6 5 ft You must use a power bar approved by an appropriate National Test Body with a third wire ground Nortel recommends not to use an extension cord between the power supply an
300. ormal use and explained in the associated documentation or e Attempt to reverse engineer disassemble reverse translate decompile or in any other manner decode licensed software in order to derive the source code form or for any other reason or e Make full or partial copies of any documentation or other similar printed or machine readable matter provided with licensed software unless the same has been supplied in a form by NORTEL NETWORKS intended for periodic reproduction of partial copies or e Export or re export licensed software and or associated documentation by downloading or otherwise from the fifty states of the United States and the District of Columbia PLEASE REFER TO THE NEXT PAGE BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 4 Except for Java Product as defined herein below CUSTOMER may assign collectively its rights under this License to any subsequent owner of the associated hardware but not otherwise subject to the payment of the then current license fee for new users if any No such assignment shall be valid until CUSOMTER 1 has delegated all of its obligations under this License to the assignee and 2 has obtained from the assignee an unconditional written assumption of all such obligations and 3 has provided NORTEL NETWORKS a copy of such assignment delegation and assumption and 4 has transferred physical possession of all licensed software and all associated documentation to the assig
301. orming a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet Disconnect any cables from the front of the base function tray Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Partially remove the base function tray from the main unit see Removing the base function tray on page 234 Do not exert force on the DS30 cables and connectors Disconnect the DS30 cables from the MSC Remove the base function tray completely from the main unit Ensure you do not pinch or damage any cables see Removing the base function tray on page 234 Place the base function tray on a flat clean and static free surface Remove the base function tray bezel See To remove the base function tray bezel on page 231 At the front of the base function tray loosen and remove the PCI cover plate screw use a 2 Phillips screwdriver Figure 162 shows an interior view of the base function tray Place the screw in a safe location Remove the PCI cover plate from the base function tray Place the PCI cover plate in a safe location Remove the two mounting screws that secure the MSC to the base function tray extension at the rear of the MSC see Figure 164 Place the screws in a safe location N0060612 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 305 Figure 164 MSC mounting screws PEC Ill slots Base function tray extension
302. orming the maintenance procedure 7 Warning Alerts you to remove the BCM main unit and expansion unit power T cords from the AC outlet before performing any maintenance procedure These conventions and symbols are used to represent the Business Series Terminal display and dialpad Convention Example Used for Word in a special font shown in Pswd Command line prompts on display telephones the top line of the display Underlined word in capital letters FLAY Display option Available on two line display shown in the bottom line of a telephones Press the button directly below the two line display telephone option on the display to proceed Dialpad buttons Buttons you press on the dialpad to select a particular option These text conventions are used in this guide to indicate the information described Convention Description bold Courier Indicates command names and options and text that you must enter text Example Use the info command Example Enter show ip alerts routes italic text Indicates book titles plain Courier Indicates command syntax and system output for example prompts text and system messages Example Set Trap Monitor Filters FEATURE Indicates that you press the button with the coordinating icon on HOLD whichever set you are using RELEASE N0060612 Chapter 1 Getting started 29 Related publications This section provides
303. ort bracket Place the support ue bracket on the power supply Be _ Place power Bnet pads down on flat surface Secure the power cables to the power supply bracket with the tle wrap 6 Insert the standard power supply and support bracket in the main unit The power supply support bracket rests on the MSC guide bracket on one side and the chassis wall on the other 7 Ensure the mounting holes in the power supply support bracket align with the holes in the main unit 8 Fasten the power supply support bracket mounting screws see Figure 145 Figure 145 Fasten the power supply support bracket to the main unit BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 286 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 9 Align the mounting holes in the power supply with the chassis holes at the rear of the main unit Fasten the power supply mounting screws to the main unit see Figure 146 Figure 146 Fasten the standard power supply to the main unit j Fasten power a A auxiliary IDE Fasten power supply mounting cables using screws Pa cable clamp A located on K L underside of cover 10 Attach the 20 pin motherboard connector and the 12V power connector into the I O card 11 Route the power cable auxiliary and IDE cables to the hard disk cage Bundle the cables together and fasten to the roof of the main unit using the cable clamp se
304. orth N A 600 3 dB CCITT American America A law based A law Hong Kong No North North N A 600 3 dB CCITT American America mu law based mu law Mexico No North North N A 600 3 dB CCITT American America A law based A law New Zealand No UK N A 300 1000 220 nF 1 8 dB CCITT UK base A law d telephony with Australian tones North Yes North EIA TIA 464A 600 3 dB CCITT America America T5121 mu law 7512 2 Poland Yes Poland 1 Polish 600 OdB for Rx CCITT ASS_1_v1 doc 7dB for Tx A law 2 Technical Requirements for Private Automatic Branch Exchanges Reference Analog interfaces11 d oc United Yes UK BS 6450 Part 4 300 1000 220 nF 1 8 dB CCITT Kingdom BTNR 1080 A law EN 41003 Annex D BS 6305 BTNR 315 N0060612 Appendix G Market profile attributes 373 Table 106 Loop interface and call supervision parameters Loop interface Call supervision Min Min max Loop current Ringing Ringing Min seize answer recall Min clear Market profile limit frequency amplitude duration duration duration duration Australia 32 mA 25 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 50 ms 30 150 ms 1500 ms Canada 32 mA 20 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 25 ms 250 1100 1400 ms ms Caribbean 32 mA 20 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 25 ms 250 1100 1400 ms ms Global 32 mA 20 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 25 ms 250 1100 1400 ms ms Hong Kong 32 mA 20 Hz 65 Vrms 200 m
305. orway Spain Sweden and Switzerland For PRC and Hong Kong analog trunks are available in North American DIP switch mode only The global analog trunk parameters are provided in the following tables e Localization PSTN standards and pulse dialing parameters see Table 101 e Transmission parameters see Table 102 e Call supervision parameters see Table 103 e On hook caller ID disconnect supervision and message waiting parameters see Table 104 Table 101 Localization PSTN standards and pulse dialing parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Pulse Dialing ms Break Make Interdigit Market profile Localized PSTN standards time time time Australia Yes 1 AS ACIF S003 2005 2nd 85 15 860 Edition Customer Access Equipment for Connection to a Telecommunications Network 2 AS ACIF S002 2001 Analogue interworking and non interference requirements for Customer Equipment for connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network Brazil Yes 1 Identification of the Calling Party 66 34 800 for SPC With DTMF 220 250 713 2 Si3050 Global Voice Data Direct Access Arrangement Specification CALA No N A 60 40 700 North American based A law Canada Yes N A 60 40 700 Caribbean Yes N A 60 40 700 Global No North American N A 60 40 700 based A Law Mexico Yes 1 Mexico general Specification 60 40 700 June 9 1993 New Zealand No UK based N A 66 34 740 telephony with Australian tones North America
306. ory information This Class A device complies with Part 68 amp Part 15 of the FCC Rules and ICES 003 Class A Canadian EMI requirements Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate Do not attempt to repair this equipment If you experience trouble write for warranty and repair information USA Canada Nortel Nortel Repair Service Centre 30 640 Massman Drive 30 Norelco Drive Nashville TN USA Weston Ontario Canada 37210 M9L 2X6 For warranty and repair service outside the USA or Canada please contact your distributor Canadian Notice The Industry
307. our wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface on the BCM main unit 3 If accessible remove the main unit top cover see Removing the main unit top cover on page 244 4 You can access the hard disk location from a panel at the rear of the main unit Remove the four hard disk access panel screws see Figure 123 Place the panel and screws in a safe location 5 Install the hard disk cage in the BCM200 main unit a b Insert the hard disk cage through the hard disk access panel in the back of the BCM200 Position the hard disk cage in front of the cage chassis mounting points The hard disk cage lift tab is at the rear of the hard disk cage Slide the hard disk cage in the direction shown in Figure 125 until the unit attaches to the chassis You will hear a snap as the hard disk cage locking tab slips into position 6 Reconnect power and IDE cables to the hard disk and connect the hard disk to the system a b Connect the IDE ribbon cable connector to the hard disk or RAID card IDE interface Connect the power supply to the hard disk Caution It is vital that you connect the correct IDE ribbon cables to the correct hard disks Connect the primary IDE ribbon cable to the primary hard disk Connect the mirror IDE ribbon cable to the mirror hard disk Note All connectors have a notch that allows you to align the connectors correctly If you cannot push a connector in easily do not force it Examine
308. ource includes equipment such as a radio with a high impedance earphone jack Music on hold specifications Ensure that the music source follows these guidelines e Nominal input impedance is 3 3 kilohms e Nominal sensitivity of this interface returned to digital encoded PCM is 22 dBm0 for a 0 25 V rms input signal e The input is limited so that the encoded analog content at the digital interface to the network does not exceed 12 dBm when averaged over any 3 second interval e The maximum non clipped input level is 1 V rms e The interface is protected against ringing cross BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 176 Chapter 12 Installing optional telephony equipment To connect an external music source 1 Connect the miniature jack of the music source output to the music on hold input on the MSC Refer to Figure 89 Figure 89 Music on hold jack Ring No connection MSC faceplate Music on hold 7 input Tip Music signal Lloooo Sleeve Ground 2 Adjust the volume of the music source to an appropriate level by activating Background Music and adjusting the volume at the music source Tip You can adjust the Background Music volume at every telephone 3 Enable music for callers on hold and for background music through programming Next step After you have connected the cables to the BCM system you can configure the BCM system Refer to Configuring the BCM s
309. oved first Enhanced 911 configuration Warning A Local state and federal requirements for Emergency 911 services support by Customer Premises Equipment vary Consult your telecommunication service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws and regulations Radio frequency interference Warning Equipment generates RF energy IN This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If not installed and used in accordance with the installation manual it may cause interference to radio communications It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with ICES 003 CLASS A Canadian EMI Requirements Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his or her own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference Telecommunication registration BCM equipment meets all applicable requirements of both Industry Canada CS 03 and US Federal Communications Commission FCC Part 68 and has been registered under files Industry Canada 332D 5980A and FCC US AB6KF15B20705 key system US AB6MF15B20706 hybrid system and US AB6PF15B23740 PBX system Connection of the BCM telephone system to the nationwide telecommunications network is made through a standard network interface jack that you can order from your local telecommunic
310. overview 73 A accessories ATA2 161 CAP 162 adapters telephones 72 adding new extensions 108 American Society of Composers Authors and Publishers music on hold licence 20 analog device specifications ATA2 ASM8 GASM and GASI 59 analog equipment ATA2 161 analog extensions 108 analog port termination 171 analog station media bay module ASM8 ASM8 GASM8 58 analog station modules 57 analog telephone ASM8 ASM8 GASMB8 modules 58 analog terminal adapter 2 see ATA2 75 analog trunk media bay module 55 56 ASM default DN 349 description 58 dip switch settings 117 119 wiring chart 349 ASM switch settings 128 ATA2 data communication 168 data transmission requirements 168 insertion loss measurement 170 installing 161 maximum loss 170 mounting on wall 169 overview 75 power source 169 audio conferencing unit overview 74 automatic telephone relocation 166 auxiliary jack 55 backups maintenance warning 254 base unit replacing the hard disk 254 BCM power supply 63 BCM200 main unit 32 BCM400 expansion gateway 62 BCM400 main unit 34 BCM400 redundant power supply 64 BRI dip switch settings 117 119 123 line types 375 BRIM overview 55 wiring chart 337 bus numbers DS30 channel hierarchy 114 C caller ID BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 378 Index by region 355 internal lines 56 CAP installing 162 SAPS cable 75 Central America supported languages 354 chassis
311. ower and IDE connectors are on the bottom and on the same side as the hard disk cage lift tab see Figure 132 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 272 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk Note The hard disk storage capacity in MB for both hard disks must be identical gt Equipment provided by Nortel assures correct hard disk capacity requirements To install a mirror hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage 1 Install the mirror hard disk into the bottom position of the RAID hard disk cage 2 Align the hard disk and hard disk cage retaining screw holes Fasten the hard disk cage retainer screws into both sides of the hard disk cage see Figure 132 Figure 132 Install a mirror hard disk into the RAID hard disk cage A Install the mes i into the bottom 9 Install the mirror hard disk retainer screws _ position or the hard disk cage i 2 SS BCM400 RAID shown La N Install and connect the mirror hard disk IDE 3 j ribbon cable to the mirror hard disk and RAID card 3 Install and connect the mirror hard disk IDE ribbon cable to the mirror hard disk and RAID card Retain the folds in the mirror hard disk IDE ribbon cable Ensure you connect the mirror hard disk to the correct RAID IDE connector 4 Ifyou removed the primary disk see Installing a primary hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage on page 269 Install and connect the primary hard disk IDE ribbon cable to the RAID card Ret
312. ower supply standard provides power to the main unit see BCM power supply on page 63 RFO The two redundant hot swappable power supply modules provide power to the main unit see BCM power supply on page 63 Cooling fan Standard The system cooling fan forces warm air out of the main unit see Cooling fan on page 68 RFO The two system cooling fans force warm air out of the main unit see Cooling fan on page 68 MBM backplane The MBM backplane provides the MBM component interface to the power supply and main card see MBM bays and backplane on page 50 Rack mount bracket The rack mount bracket is required to install the main unit in an equipment rack Hard disk and RAID The two hard disks and RAID controller card Rear view MBM backplane connector The MBM backplane connector connects to the MSC and power supply Fan access panel The fan access panel provides access to the fans for maintenance purposes Fan exhausts The fan exhausts allow the fans to move warm air outside the main unit Power supply support bracket mount The power supply support bracket stabilizes the power supply when mounted in the main unit BCM400 advanced function tray The advanced function tray houses the hard disk assembly and an extra unpopulated bay The standard configuration contains a single hard disk and has no redundant array of independent disks
313. ower supply module completely from the power supply cage to ensure complete electrical discharge Caution Use only a Nortel approved replacement Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 230 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades Warning Maintain a current backup of your system When you replace the hard disk you must restore the BCM system programming from the backup Caution Do not use an electric or magnetized screwdriver near the hard disk You can lose the information stored on the disk Shock can damage the hard disk Do not drop or hit the hard disk drive Warning You must remove all of the connections to the BCM base function tray before l you power the system down Failure to disconnect lines before power down can cause damage to the system Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Figure 104 provides an overview of the process for preparing the BCM system hardware for maintenance or upgrade procedures Figure 104 Prepare for maintenance overview Shut down the system Disconnectcables Remove the top Restore power from the front of from the unit to the units the main unit and ex
314. p cover forward until the cover engages with the main unit Press the top cover down until it rests on the chassis Refer to Figure 116 or Figure 117 N OOA ff Install the two top cover screws at the rear of the main unit N0060612 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 247 Figure 116 Install the BCM200 top cover f 4 Slide cover x BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 248 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades Figure 117 Install the BCM400 top cover _ Press cover down fq Slide cover _ _ into place a Install the top _ cover screws Using the backup and restore utility The backup and restore utility BRU provides a means to preserve the integrity of your BCM system operating system software and configuration data Use the BRU if you need to replace the following hardware e Hard disk see Replacing the hard disk on page 253 e Media Services Card MSC see Replacing data cards and processing hardware on page 299 Before you perform any substantial maintenance on the BCM system save your data to a safe storage module location elsewhere in the network After hardware maintenance is complete restore the data to your BCM system Access the BRU through the Element Manager main page For further instructions about how to operate the BRU refer to the BCM 4 0 Administration Guide N0
315. pansion unit Perform Reconnect Remove AC power maintenance cables to the plugs from both upgrade front of the units units procedure Test system Remove from rack functions or wall Place on static free surface N0060612 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 231 Special tools Before you replace the components ensure you have the following equipment e Phillips screwdriver 2 with a blade 3 5 in long e 3 16 inch slot screwdriver e antistatic wrist grounding strap Warning You must wear an antistatic grounding strap at all times when handling EA electronic components Failure to do so can result in damage to the equipment Performing a system shutdown If there is a need to perform maintenance the system may already be powered down If this is the case proceed to To shut down the system hardware on page 232 If the system is still operating perform the following procedures e To shut down the system software on page 231 e To shut down the system hardware on page 232 To shut down the system software Check for a recent backup of the BCM system programming 2 Ifthere is no recent backup use Element Manager to back up the system data For information about backing up the system data refer to the BCM 4 0 Administration Guide In Element Manager from the Administration tab click the Utili
316. pdates Configuring voice mail Your voice mail system was initialized during the basic configuration of your BCM system You must still configure your voice mail to take advantage of the many feature available If you need to perform further configuration tasks refer to the documentation for your voice mail system Refer to the CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide for information on using the web based interface to configure your voice mail system or refer to the CallPilot Telephone Administation Guide for information on using Telset Administration to configure your voice mail system Customizing security policies You configured a system password and security settings during the basic configuration of your BCM system Depending on your needs you can choose to perform further configuration of the security policies Refer to the BCM 4 0 Administration Guide for information on customizing the security policies BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 214 Chapter 18 Completing the initial installation optional Performing a backup You can perform a backup of your BCM system at regular intervals including after initial installation This ensures that you have a copy of your system data available to restore the system if needed Refer to the BCM 4 0 Administration Guide for information on performing a backup and restore of your system N0060612 215 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubles
317. place all the connectors to the front of the units The reboot can take several minutes to complete Base function tray maintenance procedures The base function tray contains the core processing components To prepare for base function tray removal perform a software and hardware shutdown see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Use this procedure only under the following conditions e to replace the MSC modem memory DIMMs battery PEC III or WAN if applicable e to replace the base function tray Remove the components from the old base function tray and install them in the replacement base function tray Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and AN network cables before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Caution Use only a Nortel approved replacement parts Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge l f Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Use the flowchart shown in Figure 105 as a summary guide to replace the base function tray BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 234 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades Figure 105 Base function tray replacement overview
318. ponents Always place the components in static free container Replacing a cooling fan This section contains procedures to replace the cooling fan in the BCM200 and BCM400 main unit and the expansion unit This section contains the following topics e Removing a BCM400 cooling fan on page 324 e Installing a BCM400 cooling fan on page 326 e Removing a BCM200 cooling fan on page 329 e Installing the BCM200 cooling fan on page 331 e Removing an expansion unit fan on page 332 e Installing an expansion unit fan on page 334 Cooling fans circulate air through the main unit and expansion unit to prevent the components from overheating Figure 176 provides an overview of the fan replacement process BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 324 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan Figure 176 Cooling fan replacement overview FAN LED and or temp LED indicate problem Install new fan Set up unit for Connect fan maintenance cables to power Disconnect and Restore unit to remove failed fan operation Check fan LED Removing a BCM400 cooling fan Use this procedure to remove the cooling fans in a BCM400 standard or redundant feature option RFO configuration The BCM400 standard main unit has one fan The BCM400 RFO has two fans Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electro
319. pply 289 Note When you install a redundant power supply you must also remove the jumper installed in the PSU Status connector RPS output signaling connector on the I O card See Removing the PSU status connector jumper on page 287 Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge S Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container To install a redundant power supply cage BCM400 only 1 Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM400 system from the AC power outlet Remove the standard power supply from the main unit see Removing a BCM400 standard power supply on page 282 4 Remove the power supply support bracket from the main unit see Removing a BCM400 standard power supply on page 282 5 Remove the power supply adapter tab from the support bracket see Figure 149 Use pliers to bend and snap the tab away from the support bracket Make sure you remove only the inner adapter tab Figure 149 Remove the BCM400 power supply adapter tab from the support bracket Remove the inner adapter tab 6 Remove the knockout bracket from the rear of the main unit see Figure 150 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 290 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply Figure 150 Remove the power supply knockout bra
320. prompted for a User ID type nnadmin 6 When prompted for a Password type PlsChgMe 7 The Configuration main menu screen appears Refer to Figure 92 Figure 92 Configuration main menu screen root BCM95 CLI 1 gt System name BCM9S 2 gt LAN1 IP address settings static DHCP Static 3 gt LAN1 IP address 172 171 3295 4 gt LAN1 IP subnet mask 295 255 240 0 5 gt Default gateway ries We je Be ba ES Y 6 gt Logout 7 gt Reboot BCM System does not restart telephony FEKETE Change Here FHHHnannnahhhnaiaahahen ENTER 1 gt System name 2 gt LAN1 IP address settings 3 gt LAN1 IP address 4 gt LAN1 IP subnet mask 5 gt Default gateway 6 gt Logout Exit 7 gt Rekoot Make Selection 123 4567 ll 8 Enter the number of the parameter you want to configure Software keycode You require a keycode to enable software features on the BCM system You receive only one keycode whether you purchase one feature or a bundle of features To generate a keycode you require an authorization code for each feature you purchase For example if you have one feature you receive one authorization code and you will generate one keycode If you purchase four features you receive four authorization codes however you will still generate only one keycode BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 182 Chapter 13 Initializing the system To generate a keycode through the Nortel Keycode Retrieval S
321. pter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 41 Table 6 Base function tray internal component descriptions Component Description System status LEDs The system status display LEDs indicate the current status of the hardware components see Base function tray system status display LEDs on page 77 DS256 interface The DS256 interface connects to MBM backplane DS30 connectors PEC III slots The PEC III slots provide connections for installing PECs Media services card MSC The MSC performs call processing and media processing of the voice channels for the BCM system See Media services card MSC on page 41 MSC mounting screws These screws are used to mount the MSC in the main unit Media services card MSC The media services card MSC is a peripheral component interface PCI card that performs call processing and media processing of the voice channels for the BCM system including VoIP trunks The MSC also offers connections for auxiliary features including external customer supplied hardware for paging and music on hold Figure 10 shows the BCM200 MSC components Figure 11 shows the BCM400 MSC components Table 7 describes the MSC faceplate optional connectors Figure 10 BCM200 MSC components Mounting screw holes PEC III 2 slots DS256 interface connect to MBM backplane DS30 connectors PCI connector Bracket press plate Auxiliary ringer e Lanclet
322. r you cannot assign a CTM8 and a BRIM to the same DS30 N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 111 Offsets are assigned using DIP switches 1 2 and 3 on the MBM Note MBMs that do not or cannot share DS30 buses always assign the offset as 0 zero As well if the MBM requires more than one bus such as the 4x16 or the DDIM only the first DS30 is set on the DIP switches The next consecutive DS30 bus is automatically assigned by the MBM Figure 65 on page 111 shows a DS30 broken down into four offset groups of four single density or eight double density lines each Note When you enable a station MBM for double density the line numbers double Figure 65 Offsets are part of DS30 channel line groups Offsets have Offset 0 4 lines single density Offset 1 8 lines double density Offset 2 Offset 3 1 DS30 bus 16 lines 32 time slots single density 32 lines 32 time slots double density Determining bus requirements Figure 66 shows the DS30 bus requirements of each MBM Note the differences between MBMs set to single density and MBMs set to double density Note If you choose a CTM8 DDIM or 4x16 there are some restrictions on the offsets gt you can choose Refer to the DIP switch settings in CTM switch settings on page 123 and 4x16 switch settings on page 126 for details BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 112 Chapter 8 I
323. r 21 Replacing a media bay module Installing an MBM After removing the old MBM follow the steps in this section to install the new MBM To install an MBM 1 Set the DIP switches on the new MBM to match the settings of the old MBM 2 Refer to Installing an MBM on page 135 to install the MBM into the media bay Returning the system to operation To return the system to operation refer to Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 N0060612 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 253 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk This chapter describes how to replace the hard disks and hard disk cage assembly in the main unit The replacement procedures describe both the standard and RAID hard disk configurations For information on how to monitor and troubleshoot the hard disk in a standard or RAID configuration refer to System monitoring and troubleshooting on page 215 This chapter contains the following primary topics e Installing a RAID system on page 255 e Replacing a RAID configuration hard disk on page 257 e Removing a hard disk cage on page 258 e Installing a hard disk cage on page 261 e Replacing a hard disk in the hard disk cage on page 265 e Initializing the hard disk in a single disk configuration on page 273 e Initializing the hard disk in a RAID configuration on page 273 The hard disk is a core software and data storage component For the BCM2
324. r Applications The Administrator Applications page opens From the Administrator Applications page click Startup Profile Template The Startup Profile Template panel opens Read the information on this panel N0060612 Chapter 17 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 207 5 Click Download Startup Profile Template on the right side of the screen and follow the instructions to download Configuring basic parameters To customize a Startup Profile for your system Note The Startup Profile template uses macros to perform certain functions You gt must set your Excel macro security level to medium or low to enable the macros From the Tools menu select Macros then select Security and select Medium or Low e Exit from Excel e Open the Startup Profile template in Excel e Enable macros if prompted Note You cannot copy and paste data between cells in the Startup Profile If you attempt this the data validation within the spreadsheet becomes corrupt If corruption occurs download another copy of the Startup Profile template from the BCM main unit 1 On a computer that has a USB port and Microsoft Excel open the Startup Profile template Microsoft Excel template If you do not have a copy of the Startup Profile template see To download the Startup Profile template on page 206 Refer to the Usage Instructions tab for instructions about using the Startup Profile template C
325. r details refer to Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 N0060612 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 307 15 16 17 Ensure the Status LED on the BCM main unit is solid green Access the BCM system see Initializing the system on page 177 For a new MSC only Upload the core software to the MSC a In Element Manager select Administration gt Utilities gt Reset b Click Cold Reset Telephony Services c Select the Force MSC Core download checkbox d Click Ok Note If you removed and reinstalled the same MSC for example to replace the battery on the main card you do not need to upload core software from the hard disk 18 19 Restore your telephony data from your backup data using the backup and restore utility see Using the backup and restore utility on page 248 For a new MSC only Restore your BCM application keycode if applicable see Software keycode on page 181 To remove the modem card Z Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container 10 Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Remo
326. r each port that is connections active If all ports are active no 1 2 DS30 for other modules can be added to the stations the system To determine bus requirements 1 Make a list of MBMs and the space requirements for each MBM you chose Refer to the following table Table 27 Matching MBMs to DS30 bus capacity DS30 split 2 6 default 3 5 extra IP lines Type of module Number required DS30s offsets required 2 Set the bus numbers and offsets on the MBM DIP switches Refer to Determining MBM DIP switch settings on page 116 Note that you assign trunk MBMs starting from the bottom DS30 and you assign station MBMs starting from the top DS30 3 Install the MBMs into the BCM main unit or expansion unit Refer to Installing a media bay module MBM on page 105 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 114 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM Assigning DS30 resources MBMs are assigned to DS30 buses in a specific hierarchical manner This section describes the preferred order of positioning for each type of MBM The following are some general notes about assigning MBMs The DIP switches on the DDIM are used to set the DS30 designation for the DTM part of the MBM The MBM automatically assigns an additional DS30 for the data part of the DDIM You cannot choose DS30 7 for the DDIM because the data MBM would not be accessible The same applies to DS30
327. r the fifth KIM is added Note Programming The T7316E eKIM does not support auto dial keys programmed with Hunt group DNs Refer to the CAP user card for instructions about using a CAP For more information refer to the BCM 4 0 Device Configuration Guide Telephone port and DN cross reference The media bay module that analog and digital telephones connect to dictates DNs and port numbers Use Table 61 and Table 62 to identify which port connects to each telephone For future reference put a check mark beside the ports where there are telephones installed Note The following table is based on a system with three digit DNs and a start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs the system automatically adds a repeat of the first digit for each additional DN length unit for example 221 becomes 2221 Also note on the following tables that DN numbering differs between systems that were upgraded from BCM 2 5 software and systems that were new with BCM 3 0 or newer software N0060612 Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals 163 Table 61 Cross referencing ports and DNs on a 2 5 system upgraded to 3 0 or newer software DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 DS 30 bus 02 bus 03 bus 04 bus 05 bus 06
328. r up press the reset button on the base function tray front panel b Ifthe Power LED is red and does not respond to a manual reset this indicates a faulty power condition Contact your Nortel representative c Ifthe Power LED is green the system is operating normally Removing a BCM400 standard power supply Use this procedure to remove the standard power supply from a BCM400 main unit Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container N0060612 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 283 N Warning Power supply cable management is critical Loose or incorrectly positioned cables can result in cable damage To remove a BCM400 standard power supply O ON O 10 Set up the BCM400 for maintenance see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect all cables from the front of the base function tray Disconnect the main unit and the expansion unit if applicable from the AC power connection Remove the top cover from the main unit see Removing the main unit top cover on page 244 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Disconnect all cables from the I O card Locate and disconnect the power supply cables from the media bay backplane and hard disk Partially remo
329. ray Disconnect the main unit and the expansion unit if applicable from the AC power connection Remove the top cover from the BCM400 main unit see Removing the main unit top cover on page 244 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Remove the power supply modules see Removing a power supply module on page 297 Partially remove the power supply module from the power supply cage Do not completely remove the power supply module BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 294 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply Warning When the power is on wait several seconds before removing the IN power supply module completely from the power supply cage to ensure complete electrical discharge 8 Disconnect the power supply cables from the I O card media bay backplane and hard disk 9 Unfasten the cable clamp that holds the power and IDE cables in place The cable clamp is located under the top cover of the platform base chassis 10 Run all cables to the rear exterior of the main unit 11 Remove the four power supply chassis screws from the rear of the main unit see Figure 155 Place the screws in a safe location Figure 155 Remove the BCM400 redundant power supply screws N Pe 3 re L _ Remove power supply lt a mounting screws a 12 Unfasten the exterior and interior power supply support bracket moun
330. re 2 600 ft of 24 AWG or less Do not use bridge taps and loading coils between the BCM system and ATA2 External line to the BCM system Ensure the external line is correctly connected to the BCM system and make sure there is dial tone To check for dial tone atthe ATA 2 1 2 If there is no dial tone replace an analog telephone for the data communication device If there is no dial tone at the ATA2 unit a Disconnect the line side of ATA2 Connect a BCM telephone to the ATA2 port b Check that the connection from ATA2 to the BCM system is functioning correctly the telephone has dial tone BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 228 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting To check for trunk line dial tone to the ATA 2 1 a A OW N Disconnect the ATA2 external line from the BCM system and connect the data device directly to this external line Make a call If the problem continues the device or the external line is possibly at fault Plug the device into a different line If the problem continues the device is possibly at fault For more information about ATA2 contact your customer service representative N0060612 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 229 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades This chapter describes how to prepare the BCM system for maintenance activities The following primary topics are covered in this chapter
331. re 71 GATM switch settings Rear of GATM For BCM 3 6 and newer software Function ensure all switches Reserved are off Reserved Reserved 12305070 Reserved A Beas Country 3 Country 2 Country 1 Mode select Country select BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 126 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM Table 36 lists the DIP switch settings for the GATM country select DIP switches Table 36 GATM country select DIP switch settings Country select DIP switch settings 12 3 45 6 7 8 12 3 45 6 78 Setting for automatic downloads all countries off off off off off off off off Download based on profile Manual settings pre BCM 3 5 systems North America 600 ohms Taiwan Australia United Kingdom North America 900 ohms Table 37 lists the possible DIP switch settings for the GATM mode select DIP switches Table 37 GATM mode select switch settings Mode select DIP switch settings Offset positions Offset positions Dip switch settings Offset positions Offset positions Dip switch settings GATM4 GATMS DS30 GATM4 GATM8 Offsets Offsets 2 3 4 5 bus Offsets Offsets 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 Vaikai DS30 4 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 vere DS30 on on on on on on BERN on on on on on on on on mono of 0 on onon on ofl T on on on on on aoe on 13 0 e a cee
332. re the SNMP manager list Use the SNMP manager list to specify IP addresses that are allowed to connect to the SNMP agent N Oo OF FB WO DN From the Configuration tab click the Administrator Access folder to expand it Select SNMP from the Administrator Access folder Select the General tab It is normally selected by default Click Add in the SNMP Manager List area The Add Manager dialog box opens Enter the IP address in the Manager IP Address field Click Ok Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add another manager IP address N0060612 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 203 To create user accounts a A OO N From the Configuration tab click the Administrator Access folder to expand it Select Accounts and Privileges from the Administrator Access folder Select the View by Accounts tab Click Add to add a user account The Add Account dialog box opens Configure the Add Account attributes see Table 75 Table 75 Add Account attributes Attribute Description Description Enter a description for this account User ID Enter a descriptive name for the user or the user function Password Enter a password for this account Telset user ID numeric If the user performs administration through the Telset interface enter a number for the user ID Telset password numeric Enter a password for the Telset User ID Modem Callback Number If Callback is required
333. re when removing or inserting the base function tray Do not forcefully remove or insert the base function tray because you could damage or stretch the cables ao a RR Q 9 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Move the base function tray latches to the unlocked position Position the base function tray in the correct main unit bay Partially insert the base function tray into the main unit see Figure 107 Connect the DS30 connectors to the MSC If necessary install the WAN card see Installing the WAN card on page 302 If required install the base function tray bezel see To install the base function tray bezel on page 238 Push the base function tray completely into the main unit Be careful not to crimp the DS30 cables Move the base function tray latches to the locked position 10 Install the base function tray latch screws N0060612 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 237 Figure 107 Install the base function tray Connect DS30 cables to the 2 MSC E Insert base function tray completely Move base function tray latches to the locked __ position Slide base function tray partially into the main unit 4 C J Fasten base function tray latch screws 11 Insert all connectors in the correct loca
334. reboot to enable DHCP e Press IP to modify the IP settings You have the option to modify the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway However these settings have no effect as long as the system is disabled 7 Press Back to reboot the system To configure the modem 1 Select Feature 9 8 from a two line display telephone 2 Enter the following user ID and password User ID SETNNA Password CONFIG The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344 respectively Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select Modem Press OK The display screen shows if the modem is enabled or disabled Do one of the following a Ifthe modem is disabled press ENL to enable the modem b Ifthe modem is enabled press DIS to disable the modem For more information on modem configuration refer to the BCM 4 0 Networking Configuration Guide To select the region You set the region using Feature PROFILE from a two line display telephone Refer to the BCM 4 0 Telset Administration Guide for information on using Telset Administration to set this parameter BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 190 Chapter 15 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters To select the telephony startup template and start DN You set the template and start DN using Feature STARTUP from a two line display telephone Note You can only set these parameters for only 15 minutes after system bootup
335. rom DS30 08 if there are ports available and DS30 07 if the system is running a 3 5 DS30 split If no ports are available on those DS30 blocks the system may assign digital set port numbers Also ensure that you do not assign DNs that are assigned to Call Center mailboxes CDNs Installing the mobility systems The radio based mobility systems all have their own documentation that describes the hardware and installation and activation of the handsets e Digital Mobility system The BCM main unit can support a maximum of two digital mobility controllers DMC which act as the call processing unit between the BCM main unit and the digital mobility base stations and handsets The DMCs have a one to one connection with digital ports on the BCM main unit For installation and configuration details refer to the Digital Mobility Installation and Configuration Guide Installing T7406 cordless systems The T7406 cordless system consists of a base station that connects up to three digital station ports on the BCM system providing a radio interface for three cordless handsets The cordless handsets register to the base station which transfers the call over the telephone lines connected to the system The handsets are configured to emulate the T7316 M7310 telephone features This system is most suited for small to medium sized office environments that are set up in an open fashion BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 166 Chapter
336. s 117 119 130 overview 57 DSM 16 DSM 32 digital station module 57 DSMI6 default DNs 347 wiring chart 347 DSM32 default DNs 347 wiring chart 347 DTM description 54 dip switch settings 117 119 121 North American PRI settings 121 wiring chart 335 N0060612 Index 379 E electrical requirements 88 emergency telephone analog auxiliary jack 55 installing 165 environment standards and specifications 22 environmental requirements 87 ETSI specifications 22 expansion unit 49 installing 101 extensions dip switch settings 121 number required 108 see also DNs 121 external clock 157 external equipment safety warning 31 42 external line isolation units LIU MSC jacks 31 42 external paging amplifier 42 F fax auxiliary jack 55 FCC registration 21 RF interference 21 FEM dip switch settings 133 DS30 channel requirements 113 fiber ports 133 overview 61 fiber ports FEM module 133 field replaceable units description 69 final configuration 211 flashing LED 217 FRU description 69 future expansion 108 G GASMS switch settings 128 GATM default line numbers 339 340 dip switches 125 overview 56 wiring chart 339 green LED 217 H handset standards and specifications 22 hard disk backup warning 254 description 66 initialization 263 265 replacement 254 hardware overview 31 tools warning 254 Industry Canada registration 21 initial installation 211 insertion loss 171 inserti
337. s 25 ms 250 1100 1400 ms ms Mexico 32 mA 20 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 25 ms 250 1100 1400 ms ms New Zealand 32 mA 25 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 50 ms 25 150 ms 1500 ms North America 32 mA 20 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 25 ms 250 1100 1400 ms ms Poland 32 mA 25 Hz 65 Vrms 180 ms 80 ms 51 88 ms 550 ms United Kingdom 32 mA 25 Hz 65 Vrms 200 ms 50 ms 25 150 ms 1500 ms Table 107 Dial pulse and DTMF parameters Dial pulse DTMF Dial pulse Min max Min max Min interdigit coding break make pause DTMF coding Min DTMF Market profile scheme duration duration duration scheme detect level Australia N 25 120 ms 10 90 ms 250 ms 16 digits 25 dB Canada N 25 120 ms 10 90 ms 250 ms 12 digits 25 dB Caribbean N 25 120 ms 10 90 ms 250 ms 12 digits 25 dB Global N 25 120 ms 10 90 ms 250 ms 12 digits 25 dB Hong Kong N 25 120 ms 10 90 ms 250 ms 12 digits 25 dB Mexico N 25 120 ms 10 90 ms 250 ms 12 digits 25 dB New Zealand N 15 200 ms 15 200 ms 200 ms 16 digits 25 dB North America N 25 120 ms 10 90 ms 250 ms 12 digits 25 dB Poland N 51 88 ms 25 48 ms 150 ms 12 digits 29 dB United Kingdom N 15 200 ms 15 200 ms 200 ms 16 digits 25 dB BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 374 Appendix G Market profile attributes ISDN line services Table 108 shows the ISDN private network services that are supported by BCM 4 0 Table 109 shows the network based ISDN supplementary services and the features available for each
338. s OK Press NEXT to scroll through the list and do one of the following a Ifyou want to enter keycodes to activate features select Feature List e Press SHOW to view the available features e Use the soft keys to activate features for your system b Ifyou want to modify existing keycodes select Keycode e Press SHOW to view the keycodes e Use the soft keys to modify existing keycodes for your system Refer to the Keycode Installation Guide for details on how to retrieve and enter the keycodes for your system To configure the IP address Select Feature 9 8 from a two line display telephone Enter the following user ID and password User ID SETNNA Password CONFIG The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344 respectively Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select IP Address N0060612 Chapter 15 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 189 Press OK Press CHNGE to modify the IP settings The display screen shows if DHCP is enabled or disabled 6 Doone of the following a If DHCP is currently enabled e Press DIS to disable DHCP You have the option to modify the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway However these settings have no effect as long as the system is disabled e Press IP to modify the following IP settings IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway b If DHCP is currently disabled e Press ENL to enable DHCP The system must
339. s a graphical high resolution LCD display backlit with adjustable contrast It also has four user defined feature keys and four soft keys IP Phone 1140E The Nortel IP Phone 1140E brings voice and data to the desktop by connecting directly to a Local Area Network LAN through an Ethernet connection The IP Phone 1140E has a graphical high resolution LCD display backlit with adjustable contrast It also has six user defined feature keys and four soft keys NORTEL mom BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 74 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware IP Phone 2001 not shown connects through an IP link to the BCM system It has a single line text display with a row of display keys on the second display line The IP Phone 2001 can be used to call through any type of BCM line IP Phone 2002 not shown connects through an IP link to the BCM system It has a two line text display with a row of display keys on the third display line and four memory keys with indicators The IP Phone 2002 can be used to call through any type of BCM line IP Phone 2004 connects through an IP link to the BCM system It has a six line text display with a row of display keys on the eighth display line and six memory keys with indicators The IP Phone 2004 can be used to call through any type of BCM line IP Phone 2007 not shown connects to a LAN through an Ethernet connection The IP Phone 2007 supports call proce
340. s available Therefore you cannot connect more MBMs to the system a b Connect the Norstar Line Modules to the FEM beginning at fiber port 1 Connect Norstar Extension Modules to the FEM beginning at fiber port 6 3 Change the DN records in Element Manager or change the set wiring as required to match your system A Warning When you connect a Norstar station MBM to an FEM the extension numbers of the telephones connected to the station MBM may change To keep the same extension numbers you must change the DNs of the telephones or change the telephone wiring to correspond with the required DNs Note If you connect a Norstar station MBM amphenol cable directly to a DSM you do not have to modify the wiring connections Ensure you select the correct DS30 number N0060612 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 149 Table 50 compares the designated extension numbers on the Norstar and on the BCM systems Table 50 Extension comparison chart DS30 bus 2 FEM port 1 Norstar 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 BCM 225 226 227 228 221 222 223 224 233 234 235 236 229 230 231 232 DS30 bus 3 FEM port 2 Norstar 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 BCM 241 242 243 244 237 238 239 240 249 250 251 252 245
341. s not polarity sensitive To connect the ATA2 Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 terminal jack Connect the other end to your telephone modem or fax machine Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 line jack Connect the other end to an available station port on the BCM main unit or expansion unit a fF WO N For a 120 V or 230 V system plug the DIN connector of the power supply cord into the power supply connector receptacle Plug the adapter into a standard AC outlet Caution In North America the ATA2 must be powered from a Class 2 power source that is UL and CSA approved In Europe the ATA2 must be powered from a Class II power source that is CE marked Mounting the ATA2 After the ATA2 is correctly connected you can mount the unit on a wall as described in this section BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 170 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter To mount the ATA2 on a wall 1 When using 0 5 mm wire 24 AWG select a location within 800 m 2600 ft of the BCM main unit Allow 12 5 cm 5 in clearance for the line jack terminal jack and power supply connector Screw two 4 mm 8 screws into the wall 130 mm 5 1 4 in away from each other Leave 6 mm 1 4 in of the two screws showing 4 Align the slots at the back of the ATA2 unit over the screws Push the unit against the wall The line jack terminal jack and power supply connector must b
342. s on the underside of the FEM are used to turn the six ports on the front of the module on or off You need to turn a port on for each Norstar expansion module you want to connect to the BCM system Each port also occupies one full DS30 bus Therefore if you have a fully configured six module Norstar system to convert you must turn on all six ports on the FEM and therefore no other module can be installed in the BCM system Note The FEM module only supports connections to the Norstar trunk and station expansion modules To turn on a fiber port set the DIP switch for the corresponding DS30 bus as shown in Table 46 For example if you want to use fiber port 2 turn on DIP switch 2 DS30 3 After the module is installed an LED lights beside each active fiber port Table 46 shows the switch for each fiber port Table 46 FEM switch settings Choose a port Set this switch to turn on the port This DS30 bus is to turn on assigned If your system is configured with a 3 5 split DS30 7 is not available Note If you turn on all six switches you are using all the DS30 numbers In this case the gt BCM system can support only the FEM module All other media bays must be empty BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 134 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM Warning Do not attempt to turn on ports requiring a DS30 bus that is already in service
343. se lines CTM8 i 1 012 8 Ze TS 4 TAn 0 on on on on on on 211 214 211 214 219 222 1 on on on on on 219 222 219 222 227 230 2 2 on on on on on 227 230 227 230 235 238 3 on on on on 235 238 Not supported Not supported 0 on on on on on 181 184 181 184 189 192 1 on 189 192 189 192 197 200 3 2 on 197 200 197 200 205 208 3 on 205 208 Not supported Not supported 0 on 151 154 151 154 159 162 1 on 159 162 159 162 167 170 2 on 167 170 167 170 175 178 3 on 175 178 Not supported Not supported 0 on 121 124 121 124 129 132 1 on 129 132 129 132 137 140 j 2 on 137 140 137 140 145 148 3 on 145 148 Not supported Not supported 0 on 91 94 91 94 99 102 1 on 99 102 99 102 107 110 2 on 107 110 107 110 115 118 3 on 115 118 Not supported Not supported 0 on 61 64 61 64 69 72 m 1 on 69 72 69 72 77 80 2 on 77 80 77 80 85 88 3 on 85 88 Not supported Not supported If your system is configured with a 3 5 DS30 split DS30 bus 7 is not available N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 125 GATM switch settings There are two models of GATM GATM 4 The GATM 4 provides connections for four analog calling line identification CLID or supervision disconnect PSTN lines Each voice line uses one line in the DS30 bus offset Because each DS30 bus has four lines per offset you can assign a maximum of four GATM4s to a single DS30 bus by making the offset switch settings different for each MBM GATM 8 The GATM 8 provides c
344. sible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the BCM system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire ground In addition all unused slots must have blank faceplates installed The covers on all units must be in place at the completion of any servicing BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 138 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables Warning Leakage currents Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to protective earth ground through the power cord System shutdown You must disconnect the media bay module cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet System startup You must reconnect the power cords to a grounded outlet before reconnecting the cables to the media bay modules Connecting power to the BCM system The BCM system is available in North American and International versions Ensure that the power supply is correct for your location The BCM200 and BCM400 systems have standard power supplies and redundant power supplies that adjust automatically to the required voltage Follow this procedure to check the voltage and wiring and to power up the system To connect power and wiring 1 Check all wiring before connecting power to the BCM units Warning Connec
345. sion unit to replace a single power supply module Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container To remove a power supply module 1 Unfasten the power supply module locking nut When the nut is fully unfastened the nut should move freely in the screw cage Swing the power supply module handle to a 90 degree angle to the power supply module Grasp the power supply module handle With your thumb compress the locking tab toward the handle Pull the power supply module out of the power supply cage see notes in this step e Ifyou are replacing a faulty power supply module power down the power supply module Partially remove the power supply module from the power supply cage Do not completely remove the power supply module N Warning When the power is on wait several seconds before removing the power supply module completely from the power supply cage to ensure complete electrical discharge BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 298 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply e Ifyou are installing the redundant power supply for the first time remove both power supply modules from the redundant power supply cage Remove the power supply modules before you install the power supply in the platform base chassis see Figure 159
346. ssary will have full support from Nortel N0060612 Regulatory information 23 Safety Warning Only qualified service personnel may install this equipment The instructions in this manual are intended for use by qualified service personnel only Warning Risk of shock Ensure the BCM is unplugged from the power socket and that any telephone or network cables are unplugged before opening the BCM main unit or expansion unit Read and follow installation instructions carefully Warning Only qualified persons should service the system The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the BCM system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire Earth Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth through the power cord Therefore it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the
347. ssing features and can work with an External Application Server to display web based and interactive applications on the large color LCD touch screen i2050 software phone not shown installs on a customer PC to provide Voice over IP VoIP services using a telephony server and your company s local area network LAN Nortel IP Audio Conferencing Unit ACU 2033 provides audio conferencing The keypad provides many of the set features of the basic Business Series telephones without display or memory buttons The audio conference phone comes with three microphones Installation instructions are provided with the audio conference phone Wireless LAN handsets 2210 2211 and 2212 Provides telephony access over the LAN or WAN through an 802 11 compatible access point An SVP server provides communication between the handsets and the BCM IP functions These handsets emulate the function of the IP Phone 2004 They have a three line truncated display with display keys There are no navigation keys so core system features requiring navigation are not supported There are no line keys but the telephone uses a line key menu on which lines intercom keys and button features can be programmed Refer to the WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Configuration Guide for details Digital mobility system Provides mobile coverage for your office The handsets communicate through a stationary base station which is wired to a digital mob
348. st and the other end to a grounded metal surface on the BCM main unit If applicable remove the standard configuration hard disk cage from the BCM200 main unit or BCM400 advanced function tray Refer to Removing a hard disk cage on page 258 Remove the original programmed hard disk from the standard hard disk cage Install and use the original programmed hard disk as the primary disk in the RAID configuration see Figure 131 For further information on how to replace the hard disks refer to Installing a hard disk into a standard configuration hard disk cage on page 268 e Caution Use only Nortel approved replacement components Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts 7 Install the RAID hard disk cage in your system For further information refer to Installing a hard disk cage in a BCM200 main unit on page 262 or Installing a hard disk cage in a BCM400 main unit on page 263 Install the main unit cover and access panel if required Restore the BCM system to operation see Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 After bootup the system automatically detects the presence of a RAID configuration and begins the disk initialization and mirroring process For further information on how to monitor the disk mirror process refer to RAID disk mirroring on page 221 Note RAID disk mirroring can take up to 3 hours to complete The BCM
349. st then assign the DIP switches for both MBMs so there is no conflict between them or with any other installed MBM N0060612 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 155 e The goal is to have a balanced mix of trunk and station MBMs e Write the DIP switch settings for each module in a place that is handy to reference when you decide to change or add MBMs e Ifyou update your Norstar system to a BCM system your station amphenol connectors can be connected into the MBMs without adjustment Trunk connectors must be converted to RJ 11 CTM or RJ 45 BRI connectors However if you use the FEM to connect your Norstar MBMs to the BCM system the station wiring must be adjusted Refer to Wiring the FEM on page 148 System setup Use Table 56 to make a note of your basic system setup Post this page near the BCM hardware for future reference Table 56 System setup summary Media bay module Dip switch setting Line set type Line Loop DN range Media bay module Dip switch setting Line set type Line Loop DN range Connecting the data networking hardware This section describes how to connect network cards to the BCM system BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 156 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables A Warning Check with your network administrator before you connect the BCM system to the network to ensure there are no IP address con
350. standard power supply that fails then all activity on the system stops This procedure describes how to replace a failed standard power supply unit Figure 133 provides an overview of the process for replacing a standard power supply BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 276 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply Figure 133 Standard power supply replacement overview Set up unit for maintenance Disconnect power supply cables Note cable routing Install new power Restore unit to supply operation Remove failed Reconnect power power supply supply cables Check power LED Check connections Removing a BCM200 power supply If the standard power supply fails the system is down Use this procedure to remove the standard power supply from a BCM200 main unit Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge gt Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Warning Power supply cable management is critical Loose or incorrectly positioned l f cables can result in cable damage To remove the BCM200 power supply 1 Set up the BCM200 for maintenance see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 2 Disconnect all cables from the front of the base function tray Disconne
351. static discharge Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Before you shut down the system determine if a fan in the redundant version has failed Refer to Table 84 To remove a BCM400 cooling fan 1 Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 4 Remove the fan access panel at the rear of the BCM400 main unit see Figure 177 a Remove the fan access panel screws at the top and bottom of the panel Place the screws in a safe location b Tip the top of the fan access panel toward you c Grasp the fan access panel with both hands and lift the away from the main unit Do not stretch the fan cables N0060612 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan 325 Figure 177 Remove the BCM400 fan access panel R i AR 4 Remove fan access panel screws a oJ Ji u a Sa ad R i SR j Remove fan access a 2 l A a ___ pane L 5 Disconnect the I O card fan cables see Figure 178 For the BCM400 RFO configuration disconnect both fan cables from the I O card Figure 178 Disconnect the fan cable from the I O card
352. store the current backup configuration data to a replacement hard disk For further information on how to perform a backup and restore refer to the BCM 4 0 Administration Guide Removing a hard disk cage from a BCM200 main unit Use this procedure to remove a standard or RAID configuration hard disk cage from the BCM200 main unit see also Replacing a hard disk in the hard disk cage on page 265 Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container N0060612 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 259 To remove a hard disk cage from a BCM200 main unit Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power source Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface on the BCM main unit 4 Access the hard disk from a panel at the rear of the BCM200 main unit Remove the hard disk access panel screws see Figure 123 on page 259 Place the panel and screws in a safe location 5 If accessible remove the BCM200 main unit top cover see Removing the main unit top cover on page 244 6 Place your fingers under the tab located at the bottom rear of the hard disk cage Lift firmly on the tab At the same time slide the hard disk cage in the direction shown i
353. supply 275 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply The BCM200 uses a standard power supply The BCM400 and expansion units use either a standard or redundant power supply This chapter describes the following power supply installation and replacement techniques e Replacing a standard power supply on page 275 e Upgrading to a redundant power supply on page 286 Note For the BCM400 RFO configuration only a redundant power supply is included Use a redundant fan with the redundant power supply see Installing a BCM400 cooling fan on page 326 Warning You must remove all of the connections to the BCM system before you power l f the system down Failure to disconnect the lines before you power down the system can cause damage to the system Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge 7 Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Replacing a standard power supply This section describes how to remove and install a standard power supply in the main unit and contains the following procedures e Removing a BCM200 power supply on page 276 e Installing a BCM200 standard power supply on page 278 e Removing a BCM400 standard power supply on page 282 e Installing a BCM400 standard power supply on page 284 If the main unit or expansion unit has a
354. t e replace current DIMM with a DIMM that contains more RAM Removing the dual in line memory module DIMM card Use this procedure to remove a DIMM when the circuit fails or when you want to increase the amount of RAM in the BCM main unit Note There must be at least one DIMM installed in the BCM main unit for the system to function N0060612 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 317 Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge gt Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container To remove a DIMM card Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray Remove the main unit cover See Removing the main unit top cover on page 244 a A O N Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 6 Partially remove the base function tray from the main unit Ensure you do not pinch stretch or damage any cables 7 Remove the base function tray bezel See To remove the base function tray bezel on page 237 8 Remove the WAN card if applicable See To remove the WAN card on page 301 Detach the DS30 cable connectors from the MSC 10 Remove the base function tray complete
355. t DCD 6 Data Set Ready DSR 2 Serial data in RX 7 Request to Send RTS 3 Serial data out TX 8 Clear to Send CTS 4 Data Terminal Ready DTR 9 Ring Indicator RI 5 Ground required connections Figure 91 Serial pinout 12 3 4 5 67 8 9 Transmission parameters e 9600 bits per second e 8 data bits e no parity e 1 stop bit e hardware flow control Note For instructions about how to set the transmission parameters refer to the terminal or terminal emulation program documentation The BCM system supports carriage return To display the configuration menus 1 Attach the null modem cable to the serial port on the BCM main unit Note The location of the transmit TX and receive RX pins on your terminal can vary gt Refer to your terminal or computer documentation to confirm pin locations 2 Attach the other end of the null modem cable to the serial port on the terminal or computer 3 Ensure that the BCM main unit and your terminal or computer are turned on 4 Access the BCM main unit using one of the following methods N0060612 Chapter 13 Initializing the system 181 a fusing a terminal emulation program Hyperterminal attach a configuration computer to the BCM main unit serial port recommended method b If you are accessing the BCM main unit through your local area network through SSH secure socket shell use the default IP address 10 10 10 1 5 When
356. t function at all e The emergency telephone does not function e The ATA2 does not function BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 216 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting System status display LEDs The LEDs on the BCM base function tray are part of the system status display SSD board Figure 99 shows an interior view of the base function tray and the SSD board location Figure 99 SSD board connections System status display board mounting SSD board screws Main card connector PCI Riser card connectors Modem card SSD Main card connector DIMM connectors BIOS battery I O card connector Main card Figure 100 shows what the LEDs look like on the outside of the base function tray The labels in the illustration indicate the hardware that each LED supports N0060612 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting 217 Figure 100 LED locations on the face of the base function tray Trouble __ 0 Red Off Green Flash or Off Red indication WAN LAN 1 Component ge Power Disk Status MSC Modem re Temp Fan Reset ee inik 2282828 98 9329909 NORTEL 00 012 A a6 as amp BCM400 Business Communications Manager Note The system sta
357. tab Page relay Page output Music on hold input BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 42 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Figure 11 BCM400 MSC components Mounting I screw holes PEC III 4 slots DS256 interface connect to MBM backplane DS30 e connectors e PCI connector Bracket press plate YAS a DS256 to expansion unit Auxiliary ringer e Lanclet tab Page relay Page output Music on hold input Table 7 MSC faceplate optional connectors Connectors Description DS256 connector BCM400 The BCM expansion unit connects to the BCM main unit through the DS256 jack on the MSC faceplate The DS256 cable to make this connection is provided with the purchase of a BCM expansion unit Auxiliary ringer jack The BCM system uses the auxiliary ringer jack to control the cadence of an auxiliary ringer customer supplied You must use this output in a low current low voltage application only Do not use this output for switching the auxiliary ringer directly Page relay jack When you use the page signal output jack to connect an external paging amplifier you also use the page relay jack The page relay jack connects a floating relay contact pair The BCM system uses this jack to control the external paging amplifier Page output jack The BCM system uses the page output to connect an internally generated voice pagin
358. tainer 1 Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 4 Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 320 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 10 11 Partially remove the base function tray from the main unit Do not crimp stretch or damage the cables or connectors Remove the base function tray bezel See To remove the base function tray bezel on page 237 Remove the WAN card if applicable See To remove the WAN card on page 301 Disconnect the DS30 cables from the MSC Do not crimp stretch or damage the cables or connectors Completely remove the base function tray from the main unit See Removing the base function tray on page 234 Remove the media services card see To remove the media services card MSC on page 304 Use your finger to carefully lift the battery out of the socket For the location of the battery socket refer to Figure 175 Caution Do not use any type of tool to remove the battery Figure 175 Removing the clock calendar battery CMOS battery The battery is located under the edge of the power supply Base function tray front ORY
359. talling telephones and peripherals 0 0c eee eee eens 161 System ENON einen anhand 161 Analog terminal adapter 2 zu 05000 600s cue bene en a sn 161 Central Answering Position CAP eCAP 2 22 000 cee eee eee 162 Telephone port and DN cross reference 00 00 cee eee eee 162 Installing an emergency telephone 0 20 e eee eee ees 165 metalmng iP PROMES area ana 165 Installing the mobility systems 0 000 nenn nn 165 Installing T7406 cordless systems 0 00 anana ete ee 165 MOVING Telephones za en 166 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter 0 0c e eee eee 167 DOHAUSHON SVEN series dee 167 Analog Telephone aneeanseenraaee 167 Analog data device sauce eed teen eee eee es t eiseres irasas 168 LARAMIE RN PR a code Se ode se ee aise Bean ec Rance De ar 168 CONC INE ATA zer 168 Mounting WHE ATA as er 169 Test insertion loss measurement 0 00 cee eee eee 170 Configuring ME ATAD 40 420 RR a arm 172 Chapter 12 Installing optional telephony equipment 000ese eens 173 installing an auxiliary ninger cb es cee hid dake a u 173 Activating auxiliary ringer programming seen een nenn 174 Connecting the external paging system 60 0c eee eee 174 Connecting an external music Source 00 snitt takata EEEa DR 175 Music on hold specifications 2 2 00 24 40 HN teens dees citir ewes 175 N0060612 Contents 13
360. tartup Profile for your system nn 207 To load the Startup Profile data onto the BCM system cccscceeeseeeseteeeeeneeeeeeeeees 208 Completing the initial installation optional 2 0005 211 TW GHGS the MBM aan ae 212 System monitoring and troubleshooting 20eeeeeeeeeee 215 To monitor hard disk Falls asco caste ets een 219 Todetermine RAID ai anna 220 Toacoese diek TI ee ee 222 To monitor RAID disk mirror operational status umnsunsensnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnen nn 224 To access the RAID status report nennen 225 To monitor diS K Mmirgting une 226 To troubleshoot the emergency telephone on the system 226 To troubleshoot the emergency telephone connected to a CTM uueeene 227 TO roubleshoot INe BTR2 nee nennen 227 Terk TG ATA ZMIND ea nnrir arvana a aaia 227 To check tor dial tone at the ATA Z nn 227 To check for trunk line dial tone to the ATA 2 un ne nennen 228 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 05 229 To shut down the system software una Bein 231 To shutdown the system hardware urn ee 232 N0060612 Task List 7 To restore the system to OPERATION nen ee inane dcesiouan 232 To remove the base funcion Tee einen 235 Tenetall IE pase UNCION ae sacked sig aus ia 236 To remove the base function tray Dezel o cciiseccccsssveccsstass socctcandveccsideaavecssdansanecnseeess 237 To install the base TUNGHON iray bezel anne i ainean 238 To remo
361. tations are not supported in the following market profiles Brazil CALA Denmark France Germany Holland Italy Norway PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland and Taiwan The GASMS parameters are provided in the following tables Localization DIP switch settings specifications and transmission parameters see Table 105 Loop interface and call supervision see Table 106 Dial pulse and DTMF parameters see Table 107 Table 105 Localization DIP switch settings specifications and transmission parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Transmission DIP Input Bi PCM Market switch source Reference Load directional coding profile Localized setting Specifications impedance impedance impedance gain scheme Australia Yes Australia TS 003 300 820 120 nF 1 3 dB CCITT TCE2 A law Canada Yes North Refer to North 600 3 dB CCITT America America spec mu law Caribbean Yes North Refer to North 600 3 dB CCITT America America spec mu law BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 372 Appendix G Market profile attributes Table 105 Localization DIP switch settings specifications and transmission parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Transmission DIP Input Bi PCM Market switch source Reference Load directional coding profile Localized setting Specifications impedance impedance impedance gain scheme Global No North N
362. tch settings 1 Use Table 28 trunk MBMs and Table 29 station MBMs to determine a switch setting for all MBMs except the FEM Figure 69 on page 117 shows an example of the table and how to do the following steps On Table 28 or Table 29 circle the MBM names Number the order in which you want to assign the MBMs Determine the number of DS30s each MBM requires For some station MBMs this depends on whether you choose to set the MBM to single or double density Circle the DS30 bus and offset numbers Follow the DS30 bus and offset numbers to the far right column where the switch settings are indicated Circle the setting for each MBM Note If you must assign specific line or extension numbers to an MBM refer to the individual switch tables in Assigning line and extension numbers on page 121 for line and DN listings N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 117 Figure 69 How to use the co nfiguration map 1 Indicate the modules you want to install 4 Assign an offset 2 Note how i DS30 buses each module requires number to each module Media bay Modul sitioning DIP switch setting DS30 bus a arta CTM8 1 2 3 4 5 6 Offset 4x16 DTM GATM offset DS30 ch 8 4 8 BRI 2 j b ee eles jon on on on on on 0 3 Choose the DS30 numbers to assign to the modules
363. tel recommends that you maintain a current configuration backup If you do not have a current backup enter the configuration data manually Note When you replace a hard disk IP configuration data is lost The BCM system IP address defaults to 10 10 10 1 To initialize the hard disk in a single disk configuration 1 After the BCM system reboots the system initializes the hard disk automatically and restores the default values 2 To change the default values of the configuration parameters perform the following tasks a Use the configuration menu to change the system IP address or perform other basic configuration tasks see To display the configuration menus on page 180 b Manually enter the values of the configuration parameters for your system see Configuring the BCM system on page 183 3 Restore system and data information except Telephony and Registry from your backup data For information on how to restore data to your system from a backup see Using the backup and restore utility on page 248 Initializing the hard disk in a RAID configuration After replacing either of the hard disks in a RAID configuration the new hard disk is initialized automatically when the system is restarted You do not need to perform specific initialization procedures BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 274 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk N0060612 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power
364. tem 1 Use the installation instructions that came with the external paging hardware to install the external paging system 2 Connect the paging system audio input to the page output on the MSC Refer to Figure 87 Figure 87 Audio input jack Ring Page signal MSC faceplate Page output Tip Page signal Lloooo Sleeve Ground 3 Connect the paging system relay to the page relay output on the MSC Refer to Figure 88 N0060612 Chapter 12 Installing optional telephony equipment 175 Figure 88 Page relay jack Ring Page relay output MSC Faceplate Page relay Tip Page relay output Lloooo Sleeve Ground N Warning The paging connections must not be connected to exposed plant Tip Paging tips BCM external paging does not support talk back paging equipment unless you use an external line port The BCM system provides paging over the telephone speakers when there is no external paging equipment 4 Select the appropriate option for your system e If you are adding more auxiliary equipment proceed to Connecting an external music source on page 175 e Ifyou are finished adding auxiliary equipment proceed to Next step on page 176 Connecting an external music source Use this procedure to connect an external music source to the BCM system You can use any customer supplied approved low power device as a music source A music s
365. ter disk Passed Failed NA e Ifthe field indicates Passed the drive is operating normally e If the field indicates Failed check the power and IDE ribbon cable connections or replace the faulty hard disk e Ifthe field indicates N A not available check the hard disk power and IDE ribbon cable connections Mirror Master Status Read only field that displays the status of the mirror master disk Passed Failed NA e If the field indicates Passed the drive is operating normally e If the field indicates Failed check the power and IDE ribbon cable connections or replace the failed hard disk e Ifthe field indicates N A not available check the hard disk power and IDE ribbon cable connections Rebuild Read only field that displays the mirror data rebuild progress idle started N0060612 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting 225 Accessing the RAID status report using Element Manager Use the procedure in this section to display a status report that summarizes primary master and mirror master hard disk installation and operational information The status report is valid only for systems equipped with a RAID configuration Note You must ensure the system status monitor service is enabled to monitor primary gt master and mirror master disk operation and disk mirroring activity To access the RAID status report Open Element Manager 2 From the Administration tab click System Status and
366. the BCM system from the AC power source Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface on the BCM400 main unit Partially remove the BCM400 advanced function tray see To remove the advanced function tray on page 241 Do not to pinch or stretch any cables when sliding the advanced function tray partially out of the main unit Locate the hard disk or RAID cage in the advanced function tray Disconnect the hard disk cables from the system a Disconnect the power supply connector from the hard disk b Disconnect the IDE connector from the hard disk or RAID card Carefully remove the advanced function tray completely from the main unit Do not pinch or stretch any cables when sliding the advanced function tray away from the main unit Remove the transportation hard disk cage restraint screw and keep it in a safe place Place the advanced function tray on a flat static free surface Place your fingers under the tab located at the bottom rear of the hard disk cage Firmly lift the tab At the same time slide the hard disk cage in the direction shown in Figure 124 until the unit detaches from the mounting points on the advanced function tray N0060612 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 261 Figure 124 Detach the hard disk cage from the BCM400 advanced function tray chassis I mn Be LU Slide the hard disk cage toward the rear gt of the advanced function tray ch
367. the connector before attempting to install the cable to determine the correct orientation N0060612 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 263 Figure 125 Insert the hard disk cage into the BCM200 main unit q Te gt I L f CE ye A EN Slide the hard disk cage toward the front of the main unit 7 Replace the cover if applicable and access panel 8 Restore the BCM system to operation Refer to Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 9 Ifyou installed a new programmed hard disk in a standard configuration for RAID configuration skip to the next step a Initialize the hard disk Refer to Initializing the hard disk in a single disk configuration on page 273 b After the disk is initialized restore your data from your backups If you did not back up your keycodes reenter them see Software keycode on page 181 10 If you installed a new blank hard disk mirror or primary in a RAID wait for the disk mirror process to complete For further information on how to monitor disk mirroring progress refer to RAID disk mirroring on page 221 Installing a hard disk cage in a BCM400 main unit Use this procedure to install the standard or RAID configuration hard disk cage into the BCM400 advanced function tray Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Z Warning Protect the hardware compone
368. then click Disk Mirroring The Disk Mirroring screen displays which displays the hard disk operational status information 3 Confirm that the primary master and mirror master hard disks are functional see Table 82 Table 82 Step table If Then perform the activity The hard disks are not identical Use Nortel equipment to ensure the hard disks meet minimum requirements The software has detected For 3 5x version software and later the system automatically adapts for unequal hard disk storage unequal hard disk capacity The system continues to operate Nortel capacity recommends that you perform the following e Examine the status report to determine which hard disk has the smaller capacity e Replace the smaller hard disk primary master or mirror master with a new hard disk of equal size or larger The RAID is not in mirror mode Change the disk mirroring function to mirror mode A hard disk is not operational Exchange the malfunctioning hard disk with a new hard disk Monitoring disk mirroring using Element Manager Use this procedure to verify and monitor the disk mirroring process Disk mirroring is the process of duplicating the data from one hard disk to the other After RAID installation and system bootup the system automatically detects the presence of a RAID configuration and begins the disk initialization and mirroring process This procedure is valid only for those systems equipp
369. ties folder to expand it From the Utilities folder select Reset Click Shutdown System to prepare the system for power disconnect This action will stop all services All Element Manager sessions will be disconnected from the system The BCM system can be restored to service only by powering the BCM system off and back on again 6 Click Ok The progress update dialog box appears and the BCM system begins the shutdown process When the shutdown process is complete the final warning dialog box appears and the LEDs enter the flashing state 7 Click Ok to disconnect Element Manager When the shutdown Element Manager is disconnected the system gives an audible beep The LEDs remain in the flashing state until the hardware is shutdown see To shut down the system hardware on page 232 If the system hardware is not shutdown within about 15 minutes it automatically boots up again BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 232 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades To shut down the system hardware Warning Remove all of the connections to the BCM system before you power down the c system Failure to disconnect lines before you power down the system can cause damage to the system 1 Remove the DS256 cables from the front of the BCM main unit and if present the expansion unit This includes the data connections on the MSC Mark the cables to ensure correct reconnection Warni
370. ting power Always connect power to the BCM main unit and expansion unit before you reconnect the cabling to the front of the units 2 Connect the BCM main unit power cord to an electrical outlet that is a non switchable third wire ground AC outlet If you use a power bar plug the power cords into the power bar and connect the power bar to the AC outlet 3 Connect the BCM expansion unit power cord to an electrical outlet that is a non switchable third wire ground AC outlet Danger Do not fasten power supply cords Do not fasten the BCM main unit or expansion unit power supply cords to any building surface N0060612 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 139 Checking system power and status After you connect power to the BCM system the power LED on the front of the base function tray and expansion unit lights Once the system services have reactivated the status LED turns solid green For further information on LED indicators see Viewing the BCM system LEDs on page Sr The power LED can indicate RED if the system is in standby mode whereby power is available but shut down by the operating system or Overtemp LEDs in position 3 to 8 will flash when the SSM is not communicating during startup shutdown or operating system hang Note During system initialization the system performs diagnostics on the hardware configuration size and installation If the power fails system data remains in memory
371. ting screws see Figure 143 Place the screws in a safe location 13 Remove the redundant power supply cage and support bracket out and away from the BCM400 main unit see Figure 156 Place the power supply in a safe clean and static free location Note Remove the power supply carefully Ensure the power supply cables are not entangled or connected to any internal components N0060612 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 295 Figure 156 Remove the redundant power supply cage and support bracket a Remove the power 2 J d _ supply and support _ Cut the cable tie wrap away from the power e supply support bracket lt Remove power supply os Unfasten the power supply 1 support bracket power supply not shown 14 Cut the cable ties that hold the power cables to the power supply support bracket Be careful not to cut or damage the cable insulation Installing a power supply module This procedure describes how to install power supply modules in the power supply cage After you install the redundant power supply cage in the main unit insert the two power supply modules Use this procedure also to replace faulty power supply modules Redundant power supply modules can be exchanged while the system is running as long as one of the modules remains active This section is relevant only with the BCM400 main unit Note When you upgrade to a redundant power supply you
372. tinuance of the product may be required But if advance notice isn t practical the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary Ringer Equivalence Number REN The REN provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed 5 EMI EMC FCC Part 15 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and re
373. tion gt Data DHCP Server e Enable disable server Services gt DHCP Server gt Subnets tab e IP domain name e Primary DNS e Secondary DNS e Default gateway IP Phones N A Configuration gt Resources IP Telephones e Enable registration gt Telephony Resources e Enable global pwd e Global pwd e Auto assign DNs e Advertisement logo SNMP Agent N A Configuration gt SNMP Agent e Enable disable SNMP Administrator Access gt agent SNMP gt General tab e Minimum security e SNMP version support SNMP community N A Configuration gt SNMP Community BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 186 Chapter 14 Configuring the BCM system Table 65 Startup parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Parameters Telset Administration Element Manager Startup Profile SNMP manager e Manager IP address N A Configuration gt Administrator Access gt SNMP gt General tab SNMP Manager User account e User ID e Group e Description e Callback number N A Configuration gt Administrator Access gt View by Accounts tab User Account N0060612 Chapter 15 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 187 Chapter 15 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters Telset Administration allows you to use a digital telephone with a two line display to set the BCM configuration parameters You cannot set all the basic parameters using Telset Administrat
374. tions on the base function tray face 12 Restore the BCM system to operation See Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 13 Observe the system status monitor LEDs to ensure the base function tray initializes correctly To remove the base function tray bezel Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge 3 Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container Warning Use care when removing or inserting the base function tray Do not forcefully l f remove or insert the base function tray because you could damage or stretch the cables 1 Shut down the system see Performing a system shutdown on page 231 2 Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 238 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Remove the base function tray latch screws and place them in a safe location Move the base function tray latches to the unlocked position See Figure 106 Grasp the base function tray latches and partially remove the base function tray from the main unit Do not exert force on the DS30 cables or connectors Unfasten the bezel screws from the base funct
375. tus LEDs correspond to the devices not to the PCI slots Note LEDs 3 8 inclusive do not blink if there is a failure in the monitoring software Monitoring media bay module LEDs The BCM MBMs are working when both the Power and Status LEDs on the modules are on and are not blinking e Ifthe Power LED does not light refer to Performing a system shutdown on page 231 After the BCM system is correctly shut down remove the module and check the connectors at the back of the module for dust or loose connections After you reinstall the module if the LED still does not light install a different module into that bay to check for a possible fault in the backplane If the second module works assume that the first module is defective and replace it with a new module e Ifthe Power LED lights but the Status light does not light or continues to blink wait 10 minutes to allow for information download If the light continues to blink power down the system and check the DIP switch settings on the module Ensure the connector is clean and free from debris e Ifthe LEDs are on solid but the module cannot communicate or be communicated with check the Element Manager settings for the module and the DIP switch settings on the back of the module BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 218 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting All modules have power and status LEDs as described in Table 77 When the
376. u law 600 Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB United Kingdom A law 320 1050 No N A 3 dB N A N A 3 dB N A 230nF BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 370 Appendix G Market profile attributes Table 103 Call supervision parameters Call supervision Ring Link flash time Force on hook Wetting time confirmation Market profile ms OSI time ms time ms ms count ms Australia 600 100 1600 0 150 Brazil 300 100 2000 N A 256 CALA 600 100 1500 N A 256 Canada 600 100 1600 N A 256 Caribbean 600 100 1600 N A 256 Global 600 100 1500 N A 256 Mexico 600 100 1600 N A 256 New Zealand 90 100 1600 15 200 North America 600 100 1600 N A 256 Poland 500 500 1800 N A 256 Taiwan 600 100 1600 0 256 United Kingdom 90 100 1600 15 200 Table 104 On hook caller ID disconnect supervision and message waiting parameters Sheet 1 of 2 On hook caller ID Disconnect supervision Message waiting DTMF Market Start Digit Line Voltage Stutter profile FSK Stop Digit OSI Busy tone reversal FSK reversal dial tone Australia Bellcore Not No No ROI and Supported Not Not supported ROA supported supported Brazil Not Not No No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported supported CALA Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Canada Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported
377. uide pin aligns with the correct opening on the main card see Figure 168 Figure 168 Modem card guide pin installation Install the modem guide pin into the main card ho Modem guide pin Main card 8 Carefully grasp the modem card with your fingertips 9 Install the modem card in the correct location on the main card Ensure the modem card pins correctly align with the main card modem connectors and modem guide pin 10 Gently push in a downward direction on the modem card with your fingertips Ensure the modem card seats correctly in the main card modem connectors 11 If applicable install the modem RJ 11 interface to the base function tray faceplate Ensure the modem RJ 11 interface connector is on the right side as shown in Figure 166 12 If applicable connect the RJ 11 modem card connector to the main card socket and the RJ 11 interface see Figure 166 N0060612 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 311 13 Install the MSC in the correct PCI riser card connector See To install the media services card MSC on page 306 14 Install the two mounting screws that secure the MSC to the base function tray extension at the rear of the MSC See Figure 164 15 Position the WAN card if applicable in the top PCI riser card connector See Installing the WAN card on page 302 16 Partially install the base function tray in the main unit 17 Connect the DS30 c
378. unction if installed in the BCM expansion unit CTM4 CTM8 see Caller ID trunk media bay module on page 55 Connects a maximum of four CTM4 or eight CTM8 analog public switched telephone lines to the BCM system BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 54 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Table 8 Trunk MBMs Sheet 2 of 2 MBM What it does Special notes ISDN BRI Connects a maximum of four ISDN BRI see Basic rate interface media S T interfaces bay module on page 55 GATM4 GATM8 Connects either four GATM4 or eight see Global analog trunk media GATM8 analog public switched bay module on page 56 telephone lines to the BCM system Note Refer to Market profile attributes on page 351 for supported market profiles Digital trunk media bay module The digital trunk media bay module DTM connects to a standard digital PSTN T1 fT1 E1 fE1 or PRI ISDN line using either a digital or PRI line The DTM also supports DASS2 DPN22 Q SIG and MCDN over ISDN e On North American BCM systems the DTM connects a Tl or PRI circuit to the BCM system T1 circuits provide 24 digital channels to the PSTN while PRI circuits provide 23 digital channels to the PSTN e On International BCM systems the DTM connects an ETSI ISDN E1 or PRI ED circuit to the BCM system providing a maximum of 30 digital channels to the PSTN
379. unit e Unpacking the expansion unit e Installing the expansion unit on page 102 e Connecting the BCM expansion unit to the BCM main unit on page 103 Unpacking the expansion unit Open the expansion unit box and remove all the components Check that you have the following components e one BCM expansion unit e one power supply cable e one expansion cable shielded Ethernet cable e four rubber feet Visually inspect the components for any damage that may have occurred during shipping If you find any damage contact your Nortel representative Warning Make sure the power supply to the expansion unit is disconnected l f D before inserting or removing an MBM Installing the expansion unit This section describes how to install the BCM expansion unit Make sure that the expansion unit is installed close enough to the main unit so that the supplied 5 m 16 ft expansion cable can be connected between the expansion unit and main unit The expansion unit has the same environmental and electrical requirements as the main unit For more information about these requirements refer to Checking the installation prerequisites on page 87 The expansion unit can be mounted in a rack on a wall or on a desktop Typically the expansion unit is mounted in the same way as the main unit The expansion unit is similar in design to the main unit therefore it is installed in the same manner as the main unit Refer
380. unit Specifically operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections exchange lines removed first Additional safety information The following interfaces TNV can be connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network in accordance with Nortel and the local carriers installation requirements e BCM CSC GATi Ports e BCM CSC ADSL Port option e Expansion Unit Digital Trunk Module T1 E1 ISDN e Expansion Unit Global Analog Trunk Module 4 and 8 Port Loop Start e Expansion Unit CTM4 8 Loop Start e Expansion Unit 4x16 Loop Start e Expansion Unit BRIM ST configuration BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 24 Regulatory information The following interfaces are designated as Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV and cannot be connected to unprotected plant wiring BCM CSC Page Port BCM CSC Auxiliary Ringer Port BCM CSC Music On Hold Port BCM CSC Relay Port BCM CSC USB Port BCM CSC Ethernet Port including optional Ethernet Hub Ports ITU standardization compliance The following list provides voice data applications and telephony support for BCM 4 0 G 711 and G 729AB codecs V 27ter V 29 and V 17 data modem modulation supported T 38 fax control gateway G3 fax T512 1 Type 1 Receiver DTMF G 168 H 323 Q 931 N0060612 25 Chapter 1 Getting started About this guide The BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide des
381. unit used to assess fan functionality Table 84 describes the possible states of the fan and temperature LEDs Table 84 Fan and temperature LEDs on the base function tray Fans All installed fans are working There is a problem with a minimum of se one fan Power All components are working Component failure N0060612 Appendix A DTM wiring chart 335 Appendix A DTM wiring chart The digital telephone line is connected to the digital trunk module DTM through the RJ 48C jack on the front of the media bay module MBM see Figure 189 Figure 189 DTM RJ 48C port DTM y la amp 12345678 o O ame os oN RJ 48C pin out Bantam jack RJ 48C jack Table 85 lists the wiring details for the RJ 48C port Table 85 DTM RJ 48C port wiring Pin Signal Receive Ring Receive Tip Receive Shield Transmit Ring Transmit Tip Transmit Shield No connection OI NID a wo N No connection BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 336 Appendix A DTM wiring chart N0060612 Appendix B BRIM wiring chart 337 Appendix B BRIM wiring chart The digital BRI ISDN lines are connected to the BRIM through the RJ 45 jacks on the front of the media bay module MBM see Figure 190 You can connect up to four BRI ISDN lines to the BRIM Figure 190 and Table 86 apply to S Loop and T Loop connections S Loop con
382. upply adapter cord international users e Uninterruptable power supply e Hard disk e RAID upgrade kit e Cooling fan BCM power supply The BCM200 main unit and the BCM400 main unit standard use a switched power supply Internal cabling routes to the I O card media bay backplane and hard disk External cabling extends to the line power supply outlet see Figure 37 and Figure 38 Figure 37 BCM200 and BCM400 standard power supply rear view Rear view 2 On off switch j AC power connector BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 64 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware Figure 38 Standard power supply connectors Connector Configuration for Standard Sparkle Power Supply New Lengths Purpose and Notes COooooh 525mm MBM Back plane gdoocooh 525mm MBM Back plane for BCM400 not required for BCM200 500mm to first 50mm to next 100mm to last total 650mm tie wrapped _ Hard disk cage extra connectors to be tucked under the every 5cm hard disk 2000 _ _ 430mm to first hog right angle 150mm to next total 580mm Reserved for future use oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo 480mm I O Card 480mm I O Card BCM400 redundant power supply The BCM400 redundant power supply RPS is available as a field replaceable unit FRU or as part of the BCM400 R
383. ure DHCP server settings A OO N a the dropdown list From the Configuration tab click the Data Services folder to expand it Select DHCP Server Select the DHCP Settings tab Configure the DHCP mode attribute Select either DHCP Server or DHCP Relay Agent from 5 Click the Subnets tab and select the LANI heading The details panel for LAN1 appears 6 Select the General Settings tab 7 Configure the attributes according to the following table Table 70 Subnets General Settings attributes Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Description IP domain name The domain name of the network Primary DNS IP address Allows you to specify the IP addresses of the primary DNS server in a valid dot format BCM automatically assigns the value for this parameter If the IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes this value is overwritten Use caution when changing this value Secondary DNS IP address Allows you to specify the IP addresses of the secondary DNS server in a valid dot format BCM automatically assigns the value for this parameter If the IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes this value is overwritten Use caution when changing this value WINS server address Allows you to specify the IP address of the WINS server BCM automatically assigns the value for this parameter If the IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface c
384. use DS30 7 for the DSM 16 module You cannot configure the DSM 32 module for DS30 6 because the second set of DNs cannot be accessed DSM16 and DSM 32 double density switch settings upgraded system The following table shows the switch settings for DSM plus modules deployed as double density on a system that has been upgraded from BCM 2 5 to BCM 3 0 or later software Note DSM modules deployed with BCM 2 5 systems are all single density and cannot be set to double density The DSM 16 and DSM32 modules can be set to either density Table 43 DSM 16 and DSM32 double density switch settings upgraded system Select Enter these switch settings To assign these DNs To assign these DNs to DS30 to DSM 16 DSM 32 bus A DSM1 B DSM2 connectors A top B bottom A 221 236 N 377 3922 B 377 392 B 221 236 A 237 252 A 393 408 B 393 408 B 237 252 A 253 268 A 409 424 B 409 424 B 253 268 A 269 284 A 425 440 B 425 440 B 269 284 A 285 300 A 441 456 B 441 456 B 285 300 A 301 316 A 457 472 B 457 472 B 301 316 The extensions listed are based on a three digit DN with a Start DN of 221 If your system has longer DNs or a different Start DN enter the range in the blank column If your system is configured with a 3 5 split you cannot use DS30 7 for the DSM 16 module BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 132 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module
385. uture include them in your initial estimates To select trunk MBMs 1 In Table 25 record the number of each type of line you have If you do not know the number or type of lines you have contact your service provider N0060612 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module MBM 107 2 Use the number of lines and the number of lines per MBM to determine how many MBMs you need Table 25 Determine trunk MBM requirements Number Number of lines Number of MBMs Type of lines of lines Type of MBM per MBM required T1 digital lines DTM 24 DTM Universal T1 MUX digital DDIM 24 DDIM lines also requires a full DS30 bus for the data module PRI digital lines NA DTM 23 DTM E1 digital lines DTM 30 DTM PRI digital lines EMEA DTM 30 DTM Analog lines CTM4 4 CTM Analog lines CTM8 8 CTM Analog lines GATM4 4 GATM Analog lines GATM8 8 GATM Analog lines 4x16 combination MBM 4 CTM also requires half of the next DS30 bus for the DSM16 part BRI ISDN lines BRIM S T 4 ISDN loops BRIM S T For example e Ifyou require 24 T1 digital lines you need 1 DTM because a single DTM can handle 24 T1 lines North America e If you require 2 analog lines and 24 T1 digital lines you need 1 GATM4 and 1 DTM DDIMs to your BCM system Note Although the DTM supports several types of digital lines you cannot connect different types of lines to the same DTM You can add a maximum of thre
386. vailable only when you select specific market profiles Table 110 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions Sheet 1 of 2 Trunk types Description Digital trunk types T1 E1 Digital line that carries data on 24 channels at 1 544 Mb s North America 30 channels at 2 048 Mb s Europe Loop E amp M DID and ground start lines are also versions of T1 lines You can program auto answer T1 loop start T1 E amp M trunks T1 DID T1 ground start trunks PRI and IP trunks to map to target lines to provide for attendant bypass calling directly to a department or individual and line concentration one trunk can map onto several target lines DID A type of T1 trunk line that allows an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the BCM system Loop A type of T1 line that is used on systems where the service provider supports disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks These trunks provide remote access to the BCM system from the public network These trunks must have disconnect supervision to allow the trunk to be set to auto answer which provides the remote access portal Ground T1 groundstart trunk These lines offer the same features as loop start trunks but are used when the local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for digital loop start trunks Ground start trunks work with T1 only By configuring lines as ground start the system recognizes when a call
387. valid Telset user ID and password is required to register IP phones Global password If the Enable Global Registration Password check box is selected enter the password the installer enters on the IP telephone to connect to the system If this check box is left clear no password prompt occurs during registration Auto assign DNs If this check box is selected the system assigns an available DN as an IP terminal requests registration It does not prompt the installer to enter a set DN If this check box is clear the installer receives a prompt to enter the assigned DN during the programming session Advertisement Logo Any information in this field appears on the display of all IP telephones For example your company name or slogan 24 characters in length Tip To automatically configure IP Phones with DNs assigned 1 Select the Enable registration check box 2 Select the Enable global registration password check box 3 Leave the Global password field blank 4 Select the Auto assign DNs check box After the IP Phones are operational clear the Enable registration check You can configure other attributes on the IP Terminal Global Settings tab depending on the requirements for your system To configure SNMP settings A OO N From the Configuration tab click the Administrator Access folder to expand it Select SNMP from the Administrator Access folder Select the General tab It is norm
388. ve Ihe advanced function WAY ee a 241 To install the advanced function Way ee 243 Toremove the man umt top COVER nucmcnncrcmninanin an 245 Teaneall the man tumitip COVE ee 246 Replacing a media bay module 0 c eee eee 249 Fe Femi MEN are ee une 250 TEE An KB near 252 Replacing the hard disk ses snuansen aan anna nn 253 To etal a BAD Sy ale ae Ren 255 To replace a RAID configuration hard QUGK nn scanaiccesseccataeshoomentesesuanalveniscueds 257 To remove a hard disk cage from a BCM200 main unit a se eenen 259 To remove a hard disk cage from a BCM400 main unit seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereerreeenene 260 To inetall a had BER O rk 262 Talea Nad VE A E nna 263 To remove a hard disk from a standard configuration hard disk cage 266 To remove a primary hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage 267 To remove a mirror hard disk from a RAID hard disk Cage eneee 268 To install a hard disk into a standard configuration hard disk cage 269 To install a primary hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage eseese 270 To install a mirror hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage seeeseeseresrrerrserereeea 272 To initialize the hard disk in a single disk configuration n4sennne nennen ennnnnnnnnn 273 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 00 eee cece eee eee 275 Te remove the BOM200 power supply au 276 To install a BCM200 standard power supply cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeaeeeseeeetsaeees 278 To remo
389. ve a BCM400 standard power supply cccesceeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeaeetenaeeeenaeees 283 Te install a BOM400 standard power supply un 284 To remove the PSU status connector jumper uuurssssunssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnann 288 To install a redundant power supply cage BCM400 only ccceceeeeteeeeteeeeeeeees 289 To remove a BCM400 redundant power supply cage scceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteteeeteaeees 293 To install a power Supply Magus a are en 295 To remove a power supply MOdU G ann imiaaleeeiseuels 297 Replacing data cards and processing hardware e2 05 299 TWO Femi Te WANN ee ee ee 301 To install a replacement WAN card nm ana 303 To remove the media services card MSC cccccceeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeteaeeeeeaeeens 304 To install the media services card MSC _ uur24suunnsasnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanannn 306 18 remove Ihe Modem oard anne aeg 307 To installa modam arten en ice cen nee ee teary meen inne 309 To remove the processor expansion Card PEC cccccssceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeseaeeens 313 Boue ah ste cs E a ald de sed dees ah anhalt de A E E EE 315 TO remove a DIMM Garde a aaa an 317 Bela DAMEN ae en 318 To remove the sloskeslendar batery aan a nn 319 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 8 Task List To install a new clock calendar battery 244u44n440nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 321 Repl
390. ve the base function tray see Removing the base function tray on page 234 Unfasten the power supply cable clamp located on the underside of the main unit top cover see Figure 142 Gather the power supply cables away from the interior and toward the rear of the main unit Remove the four power supply chassis screws from the back of the main unit see Figure 142 Place the screws in a safe location Figure 142 Remove the BCM400 power supply screws Unfasten power supply mounting screws Unfasten cable clamp located on underside of cover 7 e N g AAN Unfasten exterior ZA power supply support u bracket mounting screws BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 284 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 11 Unfasten the exterior and interior power supply support bracket mounting screws see Figure 143 Place the screws in a safe location 12 Remove the power supply and support bracket out and away from the BCM400 main unit Figure 143 Remove the power supply and support bracket Remove the power 4 supply and support bracket from main unit gt Cut the cable 3 tie wrap away from the power supply support bracket Remove power supply Q A ag P L Remove exterior and interior power supply support bracket mounting screws power supply not shown Remove power supply support bracket 13 Remove the
391. ve the top cover of the main unit see Removing the main unit top cover on page 244 Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray Partially remove the base function tray from the main unit See Removing the base function tray on page 234 Do not exert force on the DS30 cables and connectors Ensure you do not pinch stretch or damage any cables Disconnect the DS30 cables from the MSC Remove the base function tray completely from the main unit Ensure you do not pinch stretch or damage any cables see Removing the base function tray on page 234 Place the base function tray on a flat clean and static free surface Remove the base function tray bezel See To remove the base function tray bezel on page 237 Loosen and remove the PCI cover plate screw using a 2 Phillips screwdriver see Figure 162 Place the PCI cover plate screw in a safe location BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 308 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 11 Remove the PCI cover plate from the base function tray see Figure 162 on page 302 Place the PCI cover plate in a safe location 12 Remove the WAN card if applicable see To remove the WAN card on page 301 13 Remove the MSC see To remove the media services card MSC on page 304 14 Locate the modem card on the main card see Figure 166 on page 308 15 Compress the locking clip at the tip of the modem
392. ventions used in this guide 0 nassen nen 27 Related GUNICSUONS ausser 29 Howto gel le 1555465 9836 0b ek a a ae ehe Gad sees 30 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 000eee cece eee eee eee 31 a zur ed Oe hea Ses eRe omen nal Ree Nee eRe Reds 31 SOMO MAM UNI are ara El 32 BEMO MEMA ee a a bende nk Shaw gh re ates aL 34 BCM400 advanced function tray ssassn naa 37 BCM400 advanced function tray RAID status LEDS 00 38 Base function tray component hardware 22H ce eee eee eee ees 39 Base function tray faceplate components 000 cee eee eens 39 Base function tray internal components 00 eee eee eee 40 MOME Sartre 43 Data networking components o caccscciciasereersyeenereeieeeae deeds 46 PO menace 5 1 tE a a E a e E A S EN EE 48 BCM expansion unit BCM400 only sesana auaa 49 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 10 Contents MBM Baye and DACKDIONG ae eueee eee ri RIER RINNEN 50 Media bay modules MBMS i 223444424 HR nn esas ese 51 Trunk media bay modules MBMs 20000 cece eee tees 59 Station media bay modules MBMs 0000 aana 56 Specialized media bay modules MBMs 0000 cee eee eee 61 BCM400 expansion QalOWAY cccs cana idi kruti a ar hr nee 62 BCM GOMmpONnGNS sgucsseecadeee ee ea 63 BCM CE IM sickness hae Seth acai Fine Apa ene gh ena RR 63 BCM400 redundant power supply 60 0
393. vice LAN 2 Green ON device is present and operating properly Green FLASH driver is not running Green OFF device is defective or not present N0060612 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM system LEDs 79 Table 18 Base function tray system status LED states Sheet 3 of 3 LED Description LED states Temp Monitors the main unit and CPU temperature Green ON normal Red ON sensor is non operational or temperature is out of range Note Red LED indicates a possible fan failure Fan Monitors the status of the fans Green ON all installed fans are working Red ON sensor failure or there is a problem with at least one fan During system startup the power LED and the status LED indicate the status of the system Table 19 describes the various states of the Power and Status LEDs and the corresponding alarm conditions during system startup Table 19 Power and Status LED states and descriptions during system startup Power LED Status LED Description Solid Green Solid Green Non alarm condition Normal operation Solid Red Solid Green Alarm condition Normal operation Solid Green Off Alarm condition Startup profile Solid Red Off LED state 5 Alarm 10906 System Startup Operating system and alarm subsystem available Solid Red Blinking Green LED state 6 Alarm 10907 System Startup Telephony and voice mail active Solid Green Blinking Green LED state 7 Alarm 10908
394. wer cable P9 to the I O card BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 282 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 10 Loop the cables together and tie wrap to the side of the power supply to remove P1 P9 P3 P7 8 excess cable length Fold the cables to the rear of the main unit and secure with a tie wrap Ensure the cables are tied far enough back so they do not interfere with the insertion of the base function tray 11 Attach the fan plug to the I O card Fan 1 connection Loop excess fan cable length under the T O card Note Verify the power supply cables are connected correctly and do not interfere with any internal components 12 Insert the base function tray fully into the main unit Ensure the base function tray does not interfere with any cabling 13 Replace the main unit top cover See Installing the main unit top cover on page 246 14 Press the power supply switch to the ON position if applicable Plug the BCM power cord into an AC power outlet 15 Restore the BCM system to operation For details refer to Restarting the system after maintenance on page 232 The BCM system starts when you connect the AC power cord Wait for the start up process to finish 16 Monitor the power LED on the base function tray Refer to Table 83 Table 83 Power supply LED O Indicates state of system OK N A A minimum of 1 PS needs N A power attention a Ifthe BCM system does not powe
395. y to units e lines and extensions to the MBMs e data networking hardware Connecting the cables on page 137 Install telephones and peripherals These telephones can be installed e System telephones e Emergency telephone e IP Phones e 17406 cordless system Installing telephones and peripherals on page 161 Install an ATA2 Perform the steps to install an ATA2 e connect the ATA2 e mount the ATA2 e test insertion loss measurement e configure the ATA2 Installing the analog terminal adapter on page 167 Install optional telephony equipment Perform the steps to install e auxiliary ringer e external paging system e external music source Installing optional telephony equipment on page 173 N0060612 Chapter 4 Installation overview 85 Table 23 BCM system installation overview Sheet 2 of 2 Tasks Description Link to Initialize the system Begin the configuring process for your system Initializing the system on page 177 Set up the system and set configuration Perform the basic system configuration using Element Manager Startup Profile or Telset Administration Configuring the BCM system on page 183 BCM200 400 4 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 86 Chapter 4 Installation overview N0060612 Chapter 5 Checking the installation prerequisites 87 Chapter 5 Checking the install
396. ystem on page 183 for information about configuring the BCM system N0060612 Chapter 13 Initializing the system 177 Chapter 13 Initializing the system After you start the BCM system you are ready to set the initial configuration parameters The initial configuration defines your BCM system to the network It also gives the system a unique identity and initial parameters From that point you can continue with the specific configurations for your system which are described in the BCM 4 0 Administration Guide and the other user guides for each optional application you choose to add to your system Data parameter requirements Obtain the following parameter values from an Internet service provider ISP or corporate network administrator e initial IP address and netmask for each network interface e primary and optional secondary DNS servers e default next hop router e fractional T1 channel numbers if you are using fractional TI e system name e WAN link protocol e frame relay DLCI CIR if applicable V 90 or V 92 modem settings North America only Using the default BCM system IP address All BCM systems are shipped with this default address e JP address 10 10 10 1 e Subnet 255 255 255 0 If you can use the default IP address you can connect the BCM system to the LAN This enables you to configure the BCM system through Element Manager from any PC connected to the LAN You can also connect to t
397. ystem KRS you require e Username and password for the KRS http www nortel com servsup krs e BCM 4 0 feature authorization code for each feature e BCM 4 0 system ID You can apply a keycode file using e Element Manager see To enter a keycode on page 195 e Startup Profile see Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters on page 205 e Telset Administration see To enter the keycodes on page 188 For more information on keycodes refer to the Keycode Installation Guide Regenerating a keycode after system replacement If you replace your media services card MSC you must regenerate your keycode file to reflect the new system identification Apply the keycode file after you perform your system data restore For more information refer to the Keycode Installation Guide Next step After connecting to the BCM system proceed to Configuring the BCM system on page 183 N0060612 Chapter 14 Configuring the BCM system 183 Chapter 14 Configuring the BCM system This section provides information on configuring the basic BCM parameters You can configure more advanced parameters using Element Manager or Telset Administration after the BCM system is operational Figure 93 shows an overview of configuring the basic BCM parameters Figure 93 Overview of configuring the basic BCM parameters Configure the basic parameters configure basic parameters Telset Administration Use Telset A
398. ystem LEDs 77 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM system LEDs Refer to the following sections for information on the BCM system LEDs e Base function tray system status display LEDs e Media bay module LEDs on page 79 Base function tray system status display LEDs A line of 10 LEDs displays on the base function tray faceplate of the BCM main unit see Figure 45 and Table 18 The LEDs show the current state of various hardware components Element Manager contains a monitoring tool that allows you to determine the current condition of the LEDs from your computer Figure 45 BCM base function tray system status LEDs Red or Green WAN LAN 1 Power Disk Status MSC Modem LAN 2 Temp Fan a a a a a 909299999090 NORTELO 0 2 Gs pO Business Communications Manager Table 18 summarizes the possible operating states of the LEDs on the front of the base function tray The BCM expansion unit has both a power and a status LED which provide the same indicators as for the base function tray Table 18 Base function tray system status LED states Sheet 1 of 3 LED Description LED states Power Indicates the status of all power components Green ON normal operation The Power LED is used with the Status LED to show startup conditions see Table 19 Red ON an excessive voltage deficiency or a An LED that monitors a component will also show a component failure such as a redundant power fault in c

Nortel Networks BCM200 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents